DBS 40 72 96 Programming Guide
User Manual: DBS 40-72-96 Programming Guide
Open the PDF directly: View PDF 
.
Page Count: 346
| Download | |
| Open PDF In Browser | View PDF |
zce_-_r Digital Business System Section 400 Panasonic Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com Section 400 FE Issue 3 July 1993 DBS Programming Instructions WC-A / 3.0. CPC-B / 2.0 / 3.0 / 4.0 Chapter 1 General Program Outline Prior to programming the system make certain you have completed the following steps. Step 1: Corr6rn-rthe DBS system feature operations meet the end userrequirements as outlined in Section 700. Step 2: ‘-“. ~ ,.,-’ : Prepare section 450 with the end users requirements. Step 3: Confirm the hardware required for the end user. _I._‘ :. ., Step 4: Initialize the system to the default status. See next page for this. Step 5: Follow the completed program thesystem. section 450 to FFI Key System program settings FF2 Key Central Office line program settings FF3 Key Extension program settings FF4 Key Ring Bz Hunt group program settings FF5 Key Flexible key program settings for lines & features FF6 Key Name & Message program settings FF7 Key Toll restriction program settings FE? Key Least cost routing program settings FF9 Key Copy program settings FFIO Key system and personal speed dial program settings The DBS program entries are divided into 10 primary groups stored under FF keys on the phone. The Flexible Function Keys listed to the right show the major programming groups. Each group contains sub groups which combine similar functions together. Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com Section 400 FFl issue 2 July 1993 Before beginning to program a newly installed DHS for the first lime, set the system programs to the default values by following steps 1 through 5 below: 1.TurnoffthepowerfortheMainCabinet. (Both cabinets if a dual cabinet configuration is being used.) WC-A DBS Frogramming Instructfon~ / 3.0, WC-B / 2.0 /-3.0 / 4.0 This procedure must alwap be performed priortoprogrammingtheDBSforthefb-st time.orincaseswhereitisdesir&toretum allchangedprogramming parameters to the default initialized values. Failure to initialize the CPC card may cause operational problems. 2. Slide the CPC RAM switch to the CLEAR position. 3. Turn on the power for the Main Cabinet(s), then wait until the bottom LED on the CPC card stops flashhg. Note: The CPC-B card will take about twice as much time to initialize the memory as a WC-A card does. 4. Slide the CPC RAM switch to-the RAM HOLD position.. 5. Verify the software version in the system from any display telephone by pressing the [ON/OFF]. [CONF], and entering 7777. Before upgrading fi-omone software version to another, you must tit enter the “New Function Reset” command (FF18# l#). For example, if you are upgrading from Version 3.0 toversion 4.0,you must enter this command. However, if you are upgrading to a point release (4.10 to 4.11). you do not need to enter the command. The “New Function Reset” command erases Tl and DID programming. Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com DBS Programming Instructions WC-A / 3.0, CPC-B / 2.0 / 3.0 / 4.0 Section 400 FFl Issue 3 July 1993 Chapter 2 Requirements for p~gramming I 2-l PREPARING PROGRAMMING DATA TABLE . I Prior to programming the DBS, complete Section 450 (Programming Tables). Review the desired functionality with the end user, making any additional changes as required. Ifthe end user has requested specific functionality you are unfaxmliar with, refer to Section 700 to confum the DBS operation prior to installation. , WhenPreparingProgrammingDataTable Section 450. observe the following: Leave the default values for all programmable areas of central o&e lines, extensions and equipment not being connected. Record all program modificationsmade in the programming tables of Section 450. Program address numbers that cannot be changed during normal system operation have notes to this effect. Program address numbers that are specially marked arc available for the specified version(s) of software only. Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com 2-2 HOW TOACCESS RR-G MODE Programming can be performed from the attendant display telephone. An attendant telephone is connected to extension port 1 and has an extension number of 100, for all software versions. Programming is also possible f?om other extensions. See the note in “From a Non Attendant Port”. Section Z-2.” To enter the program mode from the Attendant position perform the following steps: [ON/OFF], [PROG], ##, thenproceedwith the FF key program desired. Name settings can only be programmed from the attendant telephone, or a DSS console connected to it. WhenprogmmminganactiveDBSsystem through the Attendant position in a DBS set for only one attendant, the DBS will automatically change to the “night” mode. 3 -. _ Section 400 FFl Issue 2 July 1993 When programming from a telephone connected to the test terminal (CN3) of the main DBS cabinet, slide the switch on the cabinet to the test mode. This switch provides a direct connection to ports 7 and 8. To enter the programming mode from the test terminal port, perform the following steps: [ON/OFF], #98,9999 (or presently used Authorization code), [PROG]. ##, then proceed with the FF key program desired. The #98 9999 designates this device as a programming port. Entering the authorization code a second time turns the authorization off for this port in software versions olderthan3.17-CPCA, or 2.05-CPC-B. In software versions newer than these, activating the access code at a second programming port automatically turns off the authorization at any previous port that has been activated. Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com DBS Ro@amming instructions CPC-A / 3.0. CPC-B / 2.0 / 3.0 / 4.0 When programming from a display telephone other than the attendant’s, press: [ON/OFF], #98.9999 (orpresentlyused Authorization code). [PROG], ##. then proceed with the [FF] key program address desired. The #98 9999 designates this device as a programming port. You only have to enter the authorization once. Entering the authorization code the second time turns the authorization off in software versions olderthan 3.17-WC-A, or 2.05CPC-B. in software versions newer than these. activating the access code at a second programming port automatically turns off the authorization at any previous port that has been activated. 6 DBSProgrammingInstructions CPC-A/ 3.0, CPC-B/ 2.0 / 3.0 / 4.0 When programming from a terminal connected to the RS232C (SMDR) port, perform the .following steps: 1. Make certain the cables are configured and connected as outlined in Section 300. 2. Make certain the DBS is in the SMDR mode by performing the following steps i?om the attendant port: !’ ! Section 400 FFl Issue3 JuIy 1993 When performing DBS programming changes from a remote location (using an ASCII terminal), perform the following step: 1. Access the DBS through a DISA line. Once the connection is made, press #6. 9999, P. then press enter. from the terminal. [ON/OFF], #93 3. Perform the following steps from the terminal:.. . #99, 9999 4. After the DBS responds, type: P, then press the enter key: When the communication parameters are in the default settings, they should be: A call can be transferred by any extension, if it is a digital phone, to remote programming, provided the call is placed on hold, and #6 9999 is dialed from the attendant position dial pad. This function will only work if the attendant has no other active calls. Active calls can be determined by the appearance of flashing green LED’s at the attendant position. Remote access programming capability through DISA requires an MFR card and special DISA programming. (see [FF2] program addresses). parity check set to yes, 9600 baud. data length 8, 1 start bit and 1 stop bit. See program addresses [FFl], 2, 2. ( l5) for changes to these options. Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com 5 Section 400 FFl Issue 2 JuIy 1993 2-3 PROG- Example entries: WC-A G METHOD of date/time program To set the date from extension port number 1: Press [ON/OFF], [PROG] (“F* is displayed), # (“F#” is displayed), # (“Program Mode” is displayed on line 1, “MAIN MODE” is displayed on line 2). Ffress [FFl]. (“System Program” is displayed on line 1, ‘SELECT SUB-MODE” is displayed on line 2). Press 1, #, (“Select Time Mode” is displayed on line 1, u 1:DATE 2:TIME”. is displayed on line 2). Press 1, #. taDate Set Mode” is displayed on line 1. “MONTH/DATE/YEAR” is displayed on line 2). From the keypad, enter the new date in the following format: Enter month as MM Enter date as DD Enter year as YY DBS ProgrammingInstructions / 3.0. CPC-B / 2.0 / 3.0 / 4.0 Press # to store the program change. After pressing the [ON/OFF] key, the new date is displayed on all phones with the LCD. To continue with the next program address, press the ‘Y#”key instead of the [ON/OFF] key. While programmin g, be sure to confirm the changes being made on the display of the phone being used. Software UPGRADES from CPC-B version 2.0X to 3.0X can be done by changing EPROMS, and mawally IFwn$gwingthepngnzmsthban5otdable in the 2.0X rxrsbnpreviously used. &faulting the CPC-B card prior to the instauationof the 3.0X uersion IS NOT quin?d.2.OXwMonusersthathave LdilwiDJDprq-ams~toaareJiLuy reukw theNOlESjiAhwing /ltW], 8# pm gram addresses. Complete manual reprogramming of all features is not requind. Default values for each pmgmlnalddmssaredenotedbyan Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com f - DBS Programming Instructions CPC-A / 3.0, CPC-B / 2.0 / 3.0 / 4.0 Section 400 FFl Issue 3 July 1993 Default Value Page (FFI -1-1 ............................ DAY/DATE .......................................................................Jan. 1.1989 ............... 13 [FFI -1-2 ............................ TIME ................................................................................ 12:oo.. ...................... 13 [FFI -2-l-l ......................... CALL DURATION DISPLAY ............................................... Time displayed .......... 13 [FFI -2-l-2 ......................... SMDR/DISPLAY STARTTIMER (30/ 16) ........................... Starts at 16 sec.. ....... 14 [FF 1 -2-l-2 ......................... SMDR/DISPLAY START TIMER (CPC-B 3.0) ...................... Starts at 5 sec.. ......... 14 (FF 1 -2- 1-3 ......................... LEAST COST ROUTING ACCESS ...................................... Pooled trunk access.. 15 (FFI -2-l-4 ......................... OVERRIDE TRS FOR SYS’lEM SPEED DIALING ............... Disabled ................... 15 -2-l-5 ......................... SSD DISPLAY RESTRIClION ............................................ SSD displayed.. ......... 16 -2-l-6 ......................... AUTG FLASH REDIAL.. ..................................................... Autoilash .................. 16 -2-l-7 ........................-ONE-TOUC H CALL ........................................................... Enabled .................... 17 -2- l-8 ......................... ON-HOOK TRANSFER ...................................................... Enabled .................... 17 -2-l-9 ......................... CENTRAL OFFICE LINE AUTOMATIC HOLD .................... Disabled ................... 18 -2-l- 10 ....................... NON-APPEARING CO LINE HOLD ..................................... System hoid .............. 18 -2-1-11 ....................... SINGLE LINE TELEPHONE FLASH CONlROL .................. Retrieve CO line call .-19 -2-l- 12 ....................... EXTENSION NUMBER DIGITS .......................................... 3 digits.. .................... 19 Alternate mode ......... 20 -2-l- 13 ....................... ALTERNATE ATTENDANT ............. . ................................... -2-l- 14 ....................... ATIENDANT INTERCOM CALLING ................................... voice calI ..................20 voice call .................. 21 i::; -2-l- 15 ....................... EXTENSION INTERCOM CALLING .................................... [FFI -2-l- 16 ....................... ALERT TONE FOR VOICE CALLS ..................................... Alert tone sounds......21. [FFI -2-l- 17 ....................... ALERTTONE FOR BUSY OVERRIDE / OHVA.. ................. No sound .................. 22 [FFl -2-l- 18 ....................... SYSTEM INSTALLATION AREA CODE .............................. 1 + Area ....................22 [FFI -2-l-19 ....................... SSDNAMEDISPLAY.. ....................................................... 5names .................... 23 [FFl -2-1-21 ....................... VOICE MAIL BUSY TONE ................................................. Silence ..................... .23 [FFI -2-l-22 ....................... TRANSFER RING PATTERN (CPC-B 3.0) ........................... 3 . 1 set on/ 1 se-coff.. 23 [FFl -2- 1-22 ....................... ATIENDANT OVERFLOW old software (All) ....................... 8 calls .......................24 IFFI -2-l-23 ....................... DELAYED RING ................................................................ No Iines ring.. ............25 bFij-2- 1-24 ....................... SECOND ATIENDANT POSITION attfeature pkg ............. Extension 161 ... ..... ... 25 [FFlJ-2- l-25 ....................... THIRD ATTENDANT POSITION attfeature pkg ................. None ... ......... . ..... .... . .. 26 26 [FFl]-2- l-26 ....................... FOURTH ATTENDANT POSITION a&feature pkg.. ............ None ...._..___._............. [FFl]-2-1-27 ....................... ATlENDANf TRANSFER EXT. attfeature pkg .................. None ..._..._........_........27 Enabled ... ..._.............27 [FFl]-2- 1-28 ....................... ATTENDANT OVERRIDE att.feature pkg.. ......................... [FFlJ-2- l-29.. ..................... ATTENDANT LED ALARM attfeature pkg.. ....................... Enabled .._..._.............28 [FFl]-2- l-30 ....................... EXIENSION (Bu;l DEIAYED RlNG (CPC-B 2.0) ..................... No delayed ring ...... ... 28 [FFl]-2- 1-31 ....................... TRANSFER RlNG PATTERN (CPC-B 3.0) ........................... 3-l set on/l set off ..28 [FFl]-2- 1-31 ....................... ANALGG’IRANSFER RING PATIERN (CPC-B 2.11). ............... .5secon/3.5secoff...28 [FFl]-2- l-32 ....................... MULDPIE DID (CPC-B 3.0) ................................................. Ring at 1 extension ... 29 DID/DNIS (CPC-B 4.0) ........................................ Off .. ..... ..... ..... ... ...... . .. 29 [FFl]-2- l-32 ....................... MI-IL= [FFlJ-2- l-33 ....................... PAGE DURATION (CPC-B 3.0) ............................................ Unlimited ..... ..... ..... ... 29 (FFl]-2- l-34 ....................... SINGLE LINE ‘IEL DISA RING PAmRN (CFC-B 3.0) ............ 1 set on/3 set off .. ... 30 [FFI [FFI [FFI [FFI [FFl [FFl [FFI (FFI [FFI i [FFl]-2-2-1 ......................... PARITYCHECK ................................................................ Parity check.. ............30 [FFl]-2-2-2.. ....................... ODD/EVEN PARITY .......................................................... Even Parity ............... 3 1 [FFl]-2-2-3.. ....................... DATA TRANSMISSION SPEED (BAUD RATE) .................... 9600 bps .................. 31 [FFl]-2-2-4 ......................... STOP BlT LENGTH ........................................................... 1 bit .......................... 32 8 bits ........................ 32 [FFl]-2-2-5 ......................... DATA LENGTH ................................................................. [FFl]-2-2-6 ......................... SMDR PRINTING MODE 1 ................................................ outbound & inhound.. 33 Local/long dis t. ......... 33 [FFl]-2-2-7 ......................... SMDR PRlNTlNG MODE 2 .. .............................................. [FFl]-2-2-8 ......................... SMDR PIUIVI-ING MODE 3 ................................................ No header titles .........34 [FFl]-2-2-9 ......................... DATA DUMP MODE. X ON/X OFF.. .................................. No stop control. .........34 [FFl]-2-2- 10 ....................... F&II BAUD RATE (CPC-B 1.0) ............................................. 1200 baud ................ 35 [FFlj-2-3-( l-8) .................... PBXACCESS CODE(S) ..................................................... None .........................35 [FFl]-2-3-(9- 18) .................. AUID PAUSE FOR PBXACCESS CODES 1 THROUGH 8 ....... None ........................ .36 Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com 7 Section 400 FFl Issue 2 July 1993 WC-A DBS Pqpmming Insimction~ / 3.0, CPC-B / 2.0 / 3.0 / 4.0 [FFl]-2-4-1 ........................ RING PATIFRNS FOR UNA TERMINALS (M.C & Bl ........... 1 set on 3 set OR...... 37 [FFl]-2-4-(2-g) ................... EXTERNAL PAGE CONTROL FOR PAGING CROUPS .......... No settings ............... 37 ml]-2-5-(l-8)-( l-20) ............ EXIENSION CIASS OF SERVICE (CPC-B 3.0) ........................ Class 0 ...................... 37 l~11-2~~1-100)-@001-~l.. .... VERIFlEDFORCEDACCOUNTCODES(CPC-B 3.0). ................ Noneset.. .................. 38 fFFl]-2-6-(l-100)-2-(0-7) ....... ToLLREsT.FoRvERFoRcED~~CODEs(CpC-B3.0) ...... TypeO.. ..................... 39 (FFl]-3- 1 ........................... [FFlj-3-2 ........................... [FF 11-3-3 ........................... [FFl]-3-4 ........................... [FFl]-3-5 ........................... [FF 11-3-6 ........................... [FFl]-3-7 ........................... (FFl]-3-8 ........................... [FFl]-3-9 ........................... pFl]-3- 10 ......................... [FFl]-3-11 ......................... [FFl]-3- 12 ......................... [FFl]-3-13 ......................... [FFl]-3- 14 ......................... [FFl]-3- 15 ......................... [FFl]-3- 16 ......................... [FFl]-3- 17 ......................... [FFl]-3- 18 ......................... [FFl]-3- 19 ......................... [FFl]-3-20 ......................... [FFl]-3-21 ......................... [FFl]-3-22 ......................... (FFl]-3-23 ......................... [FFl]-3-24 ......................... (FFl]-3-25 ......................... [FFl]-3-26 ......................... jFFl]-3-27 ......................... [FFl]-3-28 ......................... [FFlj-3-29 ......................... AUTO NIGHT MODE START TIME .................................... Not set.. .................... 40 ATTENDANT HOLD RECALL ‘IlMER .................................After 20 set ....__........ 40 EXTENSION HOLD RECALL TIMER ..................................After 140 see ............ 4 1 A’lllZNDAN! TRANSFER RECALL TIMER.. ...................... After 20 set .............. 41 EXIENSION TRANSFER RECALL IIMER .......................... After 140 set _.___. ...... 42 ATTENDANT HUNT GROUP RECALL ‘IIMER ..................... After 20 set .............. 42 EXTENSION HUNT GROUP RECALL ‘IIMER ..................... After 140 set ... ......... 42 ATTENDANT PARK HOLD RECALL TIMER.. ...................... After 20 set ...._......... 43 EXTENSION PARK HOLD RECALL -TlMER ........................ After 140 set ............ 43 ATTENDANT CALL REVERSION nME R. ........................... Afk 20 set .............. 43 UNSUPERVISED CONFERENCE TIMER ........................... 10 min. ..........___....... 44 AU’IOMATIC PAUSE TIMER .............................................. 3.5 set ........... _._....... 44 CEIVlRAL OFFICE FLASH lJMER ..................................... .8 set ....................... 45 SINGLE LINE TEL. ON HOOK FLASH TlMER .................... 200.200- 1500.1500 . 45 CO RING CYCLE DETECIION TlMER ............................... 6 set .............._......... 46 INBOUND RING CYCLE EXPANSION TIMER.. ................... 350 ms.. ......... _. ....... 46 DIAL PAUSE lIMER.. ........................................................ 1.5 set ..........___ ........ 47 PBX LINE FLASH ‘IlMER.. ................................................. .8 set ............___........ 47 CALL FORWARD NO ANSWER TIMER (CFC-B 3.0) ............. 12 set ............ ._._...... 47 GROUND STM DElECTlON TlMER (CFC-B 1.0) ............. 4 set .............__.._...... 48 INBOUND GROUND DETEC’IION TYMER(CPC-B 1.0) ............ 1 set .............__._....... 48 A?TEMIANT ICM HOLD RECU’IIMER (Cm-8 2.0) ............ 20 set ...................... 49 EXIENSION ICM HOFD RECAILlIMER (CIPC-B20) ............. 140 set ..........__........ 49 ATIENDM ICMlRANS. RECALLTIMER (Cl%-B 20) .......:.. 20 set ............__........ 49 EXIENSION ICM’IRANS. RECAI&nMER (CFC-B 20) ........... 140 set .......... .......... 49 CO LJNEDEI&ED RING ‘llMER (CPC-B 3.0) ...................... 12 set ............_......... 50 EXTENSION DELAYED RING TIMER (CPC-B 3.0) ............... 12 sic ............_......... 50 HuNTGROUPNOANSWERRlTVGTlMER(cpC-B3.0) ........... 12 set ...........__......... 50 AUTO DAY MODE WC-B 4.0) ........................................... No setting.. .....__........ 50 [FFl]-4 ........._..._._............... REMOTE [FFl]-6-(l-2) ~ PROGRAMMING ID CODE .... .. ............ ... ............ 9999 ..... ........_._........ 51 [FFll-5 ........ .. ... . ...... .. .. ... ... . DISA ID. CODE .... ......_.. . . .. . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . ... . . . /~.......................... Not set .. . .........__........ 52 ...................... DISA OUTBOUND CALL ID CODES 1 & 2.. ....................... 9999 ........................ 52 (FFl]-7.. ............................. ID CODE FOR SYSTEM PROGRAMMING .......................... 9999.. ....................... 53 [FFl]-8-1 ........................... [FFl]-8-1 ........................... (FFl]-8-2 ........................... [FFl]-8-2 ........................... pFl]-8-3(oooo-9999)(loo_ ............................ .......................................... [FFl]-8-4- l- l ..................... [FFl]-8-4-1-2.. ................... [FFlJ-8-4-l-3 ..................... [FFl]-8-4-l-4 ..................... [FFl]-8-4-2- 1 ..................... [FFlj-8-4-2-2.. ................... [FFl]-8-4-2-3.. ................... (FFl]-8-4-2-4.. ................... [FFl]-8-4-2-5 ..................... [FFlj-8-4-2-6. .................... [FFl]-8-4-2-7 ..................... DID RESET (CPC-B 3.0) ..................................................... No reset.. .................. NEW FUNC’ITON RESET (CFC-B 4.0). ................................. No reset .................... DID RESET CONFIRMATION (CFC-B 3.0). .......................... No confirmation ........ NEW FUNCTION RESET CONFIRMAnON (CI’C-B 4.0) ....... No amhnation ......... 53 54 54 55 INBOUND DID DIALNUMBERS (CFC-B 3.0) .......................... Nonumbers set .......... 55 Tl PROGRAMMING (CFC-B 4.0). .......................................................................... SYSTEM CONFIG .............................................................. DBS 40 .................... 56 IST SYNC ......................................................................... Free run.. ................. 56 None ........................ 58 2ND SYNC ........................................................................ None ........................ 57 3RD SYNC ........................................................................ NEIWORK RE-SYNC TIMER ............................................. No retries ................. 58 DISCON TIMER ................................................................. 200 ms.. ................... 58 1200 ms.. ................. 59 GUARD TIMER ................................................................. 240 seconds.. ........... 59 RLS ACKlIMER ............................................................... OUTPULSE DELAY ........................................................... 500 ms.. ................... 60 WINK TIMEOUT nMER .................................................... 5500 ms ................... 60 INCOMING DETECTION lYMER ........................................ 90 ms.. ..................... 61 Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com 8 ‘) (- ( DBS Programming Instructions CPC-A/ 3.0,CPC-B / 2.0 / 3.0 /4.0 Section 40OFFi Issue 3 July 1993 [FFl]-8-4-2-8 ............ .... .._... ANSWER SUPERV ........ .. ... ........... ........... ......... ...._........... 600 ms ...-..........._.....61 [FFlj-8-4-2-9 ......I............... IMM-GLARE -lIMER .......................................... ......... ..... .. 60 ms ...-f..................62 [FFlj-8-4-2- 10 .......... .......... WK-GIARE TIMER ..... ........ .......... ......................... .......... .. 60 ms .. ....._.........._....62 [[FFlj-8-4-3 ... ....... .... .. ........ DIGITAL PAD SET ... ................ ...... .............. .......... ..._....... By circuit type . ......... 63 [[FFlj-8-4-4- 1- 1 . .. . .-. . . . . . . . .. . TFUJNK CONFIGURATION. MASIER CABINET .......... . .... ... Analog only ...... ....._.._65 [FFl]-8-4-5-1-1 .... ... ........... TRUNK CONFIGURATION, SLAVE CABINET .... ..... ......... ... Analog only ....._...__.... 65 [FFl]-8-4-4-1-2 ....... .... ....... NO. OF Tl CHANNELS., MASTER CABINET .......... ... . ..... .. None ....... ......... ..... .... 65 [FFl]-8-4-5-1-2 ....... .... ....... NO. OF Tl CHANNELS. SLAVE CABINET ._....................... None ....... . ............. .... 65 [FFl]-8-4-4- l-3 .......... ..... ... FRAME FORMAT. MASTER CABINET . ... . . .. . .. . .. . . .. . . . .. . . . .. . . . ESF .... ..... .... ..... ..... .... 66 [FFl]-8-4-5-1-3 ........ .. ........ FRAME FORMAT, SLAVE CABINET ............. ...... .... .... ...... . ESF .... ... ...... ..... ..... .... 66 [FFl]-8-4-4- l-4 .......... ........ CLEAR CHANNEL, MASTER CABINET ................. .. ........ ... AM1 ... ..... ............... .... 66 [FFlj-8-4-5-1-4 .. .... ............ CLEAR CHANNEL. SLAVE CABINET . ............... ....._.... .. .. ... AMI . . .. . . . . . . .. . . . .. . . .. . . . . .. 66 [FFl]-8-4-4-1-5 .......... .. ...... FAILURE MODE, MASTER CABINET .... ............ ..... .... ...... . Mode 1 ..... .... ..... .... .... 67 [FFl]-8-4-5-1-5 ..... ..... ... ...-. FAILURE MODE. SIAVE CABINET ............_......_...............Mode 1 .... .............. .... 67 (FFl]-8-4-4-1-6 .. ......... .... .. . R-LOOPBACK, MASTER CABINET .......................... ... .... ... No .. .... ..... .............. ._..67 [FFl]-8-4-5- l-6 ......... .... .... . R-LQOPBACK, SIAVE CABINEI. .... ........................ .... ..... .. No ....... ... . ......... ..... .... 67 [FFlj-8-4-4-1-8 .......... ........ FLASH KEY OPERATION. MASTER CABINET ... ............. ... None .. .... .......... ...... ... 68 [FFl]-8-4-5- l-8 ....... .. ......... FLASH KEY OPERATION. SLAVE CABINET ........... ..... ... ... None .. . .. . . . .. . . . ... . .. .. . . .. 68 [FFl]-8-4-4-1-7 .......... ..... ... YELL ALARM SEND, MASTER CABINET .......... ..... ...... ... ... Yes . ... ..... .. ... ..... ...... ... 68 [FFl]-8-4-5- l-7 .... ........ ... ... YELL AIARM SEND. SLAVE CABINET .................. .... ..... ... Yes .......... ......... ..... .... 68 [FFl]-8-4-4-2- 1 .. ..... ... .. ...... RED ALARM DETECTION. MASTER CABINET . ... .. ..... ... .. .. 8 ........ ...... .... .... ..... .... 69 [FFl[-8-4-5-2- 1 ........ .. ....... . RED ALARM DETECTION, SLAVE CABINET ......._............. 8 ........ ..... .............. .... 69 [FFl]-8-4-4-2-2 ........ . .... .. ... YELLOW ALARM DETECTION. MASlER CABINET .... .... . .. 50 ms ...... .... .... ..... . ... 69 [FFl]-8-4-5-2-2 ............... ... YELLOW ALARM DE’IECTION, SIAVE CABINET ... ..... .... .. 50 ms ...... ... ..... ......... 69 [FFl]-8-4-4-2-3 ........ .. ........ YELLOW ALARM RECOVERY. MASTER CABINET’ . ..... ... . .. 10 ms ..... ......... ..... .... 70 [FFl]-8-4-5-2-3 ....... .. ......... YELLOW ALARM RECOVERY. SLAVE CABINET ........ ..... .. 10 ms ... .. . ........ ...... ... 70 [FFl]-8-4-4-2-4 ....... .... ....... OTHER ALARMS DETECTION. MASTER CABINET .... .... ... 250 ms .... ... .......... .... 70 [FFl]-8-4-5-2-4 ......... ......... OTHER AIARMS DETECTION. STAVE CABINET .............. 250 ms ... ..... ..... .... .... 70 [FFlj-8-4-4-2-5 ............... ... OTHER ALARMS RECOVERY. MASTER CABINET ...... ..... . 250 ms ... . .... ..... .... .... 7 1 [FFlj-8-4-5-2-5 ....... ... ..... ... OTHER ALARMS RECOVERY. SLAVE CABINET .............. . 250 ms ... .............. ..1.71 .’ [FFl]-8-4-4-3- 1 ......... ..I...... FRAMING LOSS COUNTER MASTER CABINET ......... .... .. 9000 . ..... .......... ... .. .... 71 [FFl]-8-4-5-3-1 .... ... .. ......... FRAMING LOSS COUNTER. SLAVE CABINET .. .......... .... .. 9000 .. . .... ..... .... ..... .... 71 [FFlj-8-4-4-3-2 .......... ........ SLIP COUNlER MASTER CABINET ........................... ... . .. 9000 .. .... ._... .............. 72 L [FFlj-8-4-5-3-2 ... ......... ... ... SLIP COUNTER. SLAVE CABINET .............................. ...... 9000 .. . ... ..... ..... ..... ... . 72 ’ (FFlj-8-4-4-3-3 .......... ... ..... RED ALARM COUNTER MASTER CABINET ......_.............. 9000 . ...... . ........ ..... .... 72 [FFl]-8-4-5-3-3 ............_.....RED ALARM COUNTER SLAVE CABINET .. ..... .. .... .... ..... .. 9000 .. . .... .. .. .......... . ... 72 [FFl]-8-4-4-3-4 ......... . .. ...... LOSS OF SIGNAL COUNTER MASTER CABINET . ...... ..... . 9000 ... ... . .............. . ... 73 [FFl]-8-4-5-3-4 ... .... ........... LOSS OF SIGNAL COUNTER. SLAVE CABINET .. ........ .... .. 9000 *........................ 73 [FFl]-8-4-4-3-5 ....... .. ......... SYNC LOSS COUNTER MASIER CABINET .... ............ .... .. 9000 .. . ... . .......... .... .. .. 73 [FFl]-8-4-5-3-5 ...... .... ........ SYNC LOSS COUNTER SIAVE CABINET .................. ..... .. 9000 ... .. ... ........ ...... ... 73 [FFl]-8-4-4-3-6 ....... .._........YELL ALARM COUNTER MASTER CABINET .......... ... ..... .. 9000 ... ... ..... ..... ...... ... 74 [FFlj-8-4-5-3-6 .. ....... .... ... .. YELL ALARM COUNlER SLAVE CABINET .. ........ .. .. ...... ... 9000 ... .... .............. .. .. 74 [FFl]-8-4-4-4- 1 ........ .. ....... . YELLOW ALARh4 RELAY, MASTER CABINET ...... ........ ... .. . Off . ...._.......................74 [FFlj-8-4-5-4-1 ..._..... ...... ... YELLOW ALARM RELAY, SIAVE CABINET ..........f............ off ..... ..... . ..... ..I.......... 74 [FFl]-8-4-4-4-2 ... ........ ....... RED AulRM RELAY. MASTER CABINn ... .._.................... Off . ...... .. .. .... ..... ..... .... 75 [FFlj-8-4-5-4-2 ... ........ ....... RED ALARM RELAY, SLAVE CABINET ......_...................... Off . ..... .... .. ........ . .... .... 75 [FFl]-8-4-4-4-3 .......... ........ SYNC LOSS RELAY, MASTER CABINET ........... ...... .... ..... .. Off ..... .... . .. ........ ..... .... 75 [FFl]-8-4-5-4-3 ..... ..... ... ..... SYNC LOSS RELAY. SLAVE CABINET ................ .... ..... .... . . off ...... .... . .... ....... ... . ... 75 [FFlj-8-4-4-4-4 ........ .......... FRAME LOSS REIAY. MASTER CABINET .......... ... ..... ..... .. Off . ..... . .. .. .... ..... .... ..... 76 [FFl]-8-4-5-4-4 ........ .....I.... FRAME LOSS RELAY, SLAVE CABINET ................. ..... ... . .. Off . .... ... .. ............... .... 76 [FFlJ-8-4-4-4-5 .... ..... . ... .. ... AIS RELAY. MASIER CABINET .......... ............... ..... .... ..... .. Off . .... ..... .. ... .... ....... ... 76 [FFl]-8-4-5-4-5 ....... .._... ..... AIS RJXAY. SLAVE CABINET ........ ............. ............ ... .._..... Off .. .... ... . ...... ... ....... ... 76 [FFlj-8-4-4-4-6 .. ..... ... ... ..... RELAY RESET, MASTER CABINET .. .......... ... ... ........... ... ... Auto ... ... .. ... ...... ..... .... 77 [FFlj-8-4-5-4-6 ... ...... .. . ...... RELAY RESET, SLAVE CABINET ............_.._......................Auto .. .. ... .. .. ...... ..... .... 77 .. ...... ... Tl TRUNK TYPE ... .. .. ........ .. ..... ................ .. ............... . ..... .. E&M .. . .. ... ... .... .. ........ 78 (FFlj-8-4-6-(1-64)-l [FFl]-8-4-6-( l-64)-2 ........... DID/DNIS . ........ ... . .. .. .. ... ... ... .............. ............... ... .. .... .... .. . Not provided .......... .. . 78 [FFl]-8-4-6-( l-64)-3 ... ........ OUTGOING TYPE .. .... .... ... .. .......... ....................... ...... ..... .. Immediate start .... .... 79 [FFl]-8-4-6-( l-64)-4 ... ........ INCOMING TYPE . .. ... ..... .... ............. ......._... ... ............ ...... .. Immediate start ......,. 79 [FFl]-8-4-6-( l-641-5 .. ..._. . . . . TRUNK MODE ... ... . ... ...... .... ... . .. .... ................... ....... ....... ... Bothway . . .... .... ....... ... 80 [FFl]-8-4-6-( l-641-6 .. .. ....... ROBBED BIT SET .. ... ..... ...... ... ........ .......... .............. ... .... . . . On . .... ..I._. . . . . .. . . . ... . . .. . 80 [FFl]-8-4-6-(l-64)-7 ... ........ INCOMING DIAL .. . .. ............ ..... .. ............. ......... ......... . ....... MT!@ . .... .. .... .... .....-..- 81 [FFl]-8-4-6-(l-64)-8 ._._.......DT SEND ....... ... .... .. .. ........ ... ... ... .. ..... ... .... ..... .................. .. Off ..... .. .. . ..... ..... ....--... 81 [FFl]-8-4-6-(1-64)-g .. ... ...... BTSEND .............. . .. . ........... ..... ..._........ ...... .... ....... ........ .._ Off ..... .. .. . .......... ..... .... 82 [FFl]-8-4-6-( l-64)- 10 . ........ IX- RECEIVE . ... ... .. .._........................................................ off ..... . ..... ......... .... . ... . 82 Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com 9 Section 400 FFl Issue 2 July 1993 DBS Rogmmmfng Instructions CPC-A / 3.0, CPGB / 2.0 / 3.0 / 4.0 (FFl)-8-4-S-(1-64)-11 ........ RBTSEND ..... .... .............. ........................ .............._..........Off ........ . .......... .. .._.... 83 [FFlj-8-4-6-( l-64)-(0000-9999)-(100-699) DNIS NUMBER SET .. ........ ..............._..........No Nos. Asstgned . .... 83 [FF2]-( l-64)- 1 .. ... .. ... .......... CENTRAL OFFICE LINE PORT OPERATlON ........... ..... ..... Ail lines tn service ..:. 84 [FF2]-(l-64)-2 .. ... .. ... ..... ..... TOUCH-TONE / PULSE DIALING ... ...... .... .............._...._..._ Touch tone .....-_.__.....84 (FF2]-(l-64)-3 .................... POOLED CO LINE GROUP 9 ACCESS.. .............................All lines accessible ... 85 (FF2]-(l-64)-(4-9) ............... POOLED CO LINE GROUPS 8 l-86 ACCESS ..................... No lines accessible ... 85 (FF2]-( l-64)- 10 .................. CENTRAL OFFICE LINE -IYPE ...........................................Cd’li&. .................... 86 87 (FF2]-(l-64)- 11 .................. DISA AUTO ANSWER ........................................................Disabled ................... [FF2]-(l-64)- 12 .................. PRIVATE CENTRAL OFFICE LINE ..................................... No private lines ........ 87 [FF2]-(l-64)- 13 .................. AUTO PAUSE FOR PBX LdIUE............................................Pause set ................. 88 (FF2]-( l-64)- 14 .................. DIAL-l-ONE DETEClION ...................................................Dial digits after dt .... 88 (FF2]-(l-64)- 15 .................. OUTBOUND M’MJ? SIGNAL DURATION.. .......................... 75 ms on/50 ms off . 88 (FF2]-(l-64)- 16 .................. UNSUPERVISED CO CONFERENCE ................................. Dkabled ................... 89 (FF2]-( l-64)- 17 .................. INBOUND RING SIGNAL PATIF;RN ................................... Synchronized ........... 89 (FF2]-( l-64)- 18 .................. CENIRAL OFFICE LINE DISCONNECT TIMER.. ............... Greater than 350 ms .. 90 [FF2]-(l-64)- 19 .................. DISA SIXFZT TIME ............................................................ Disabled ................... 90 (FF2]-(l-64)-20 .................. DISA END TIME ................................................................Disabled ................... 91 [FF21-(l-64)-21 .................. TRUNKlYPE ................................................................................ L4xp start .................. 91 (FF2]-(l-64)-21 .................. LOOP START/GROUND START LINE (Cl%-B 1.11) ............ Loop start.. ............... 92 (FF2]-(l-64)-21 .................. UxlP ZXm/CRND SIXRT/DlD LINE (CPC-B 20) ............... Loop start ................. 93 (FF2]-( l-64)-22 ................... DID START (CPC-B 2.0) ......................................................Immediate ................ 94 (FF2]-(1X%)-23.. ................. WINK START’flMER (CPC-B 2.0) ........................................200 ms. .................... 94 (FF2]-( l-64)-24 ................... ‘IYME OUT FOR DIALED m DIGl’IS (CFC-B 20) .................. 18 see ....................... 95 (CPC-B 20) ............................. 80 ms. ...................... 95 (FF2]-(l-64)-25 ................... DID lNTERDlGlTllMEOUT ................................................. By circuit type.. ........ 96 (FF2]-(l-643-26 ................... TlPORTCLASS-TRUNK FF2]-( l-64)-26 .................... Tl PORT CLASS - TRUNK (CPC 4.00) ............................... By drcuit type.. ........ 96 [FF3]-(l-144)-1 .................. EXTENSION NUMBERS .................................................... lOOto699(1Oto69). .97 [FF3]-(l-144)-2 .................. ‘IEFXMNAL -NPE ..............................................................Automaticallyset ..... 98 (FF3]-(l-144)-2 .................. TERMINAL TYPE (WC-B 3.0) ..........................................Aut~matkaUy set ..... 99 [FF3]-(l-144)-3 .................. EM/24 PORTASSIGNMENT ............................................. Extension port 0 ....... 100 (FF3]-( l- 144)-4 .................. FORCED LEAST COST ROUTING.. .................................... No forced LCR .......... 10 1 [FF3]-(l-144)-5 .................. FORCED ACCOUNT CODE ...............................................No code set. .............. 101 (FF3]-(l-144)-5 .................. VERIFIED FORCED ACCOUNT CODES (CPC-B 3.0) ........ No code set. .............. 102 (FF3]-(l-1441-6 .................. EXTENSION LOCKOUTCODE .......................................... No code set.. ............. 102 (FF3]-(l-144)-7 .................. OFF HOOK SIGNAL.. .........................................................Disabled ex 100,101 .. 103’ (FF3]-(l-144)-8 .................. CALL WAITING NOTIFICATION TONE / OHVA.. ................ Disabled ................... 103 (FF3]-(l-144)-9 .................. BUSY OVERRIDE SEND ................................................... Enabled.. .................. 104 (FF3]-(l-144)-10 ................ BUSY OVERRIDE RECEIVE .............................................. Enabled.. .................. 104 (FF3]-(l-144)-11 ................ PRIME LINE PICKUP.. .......................................................Disabled ................... 105 [FF3]-(l- 144)- 12 ................ AUTO PICKUP (RING LINE PREFERENCE) ........................ Enable.. .................... 105 (FF3]-(l-144)-13 ................ UNSUPERVISED CONFERENCE ....................................... Disabled ................... 106 106 (FF3]-( l-144)- 14 ................ SMDR REPORT.. ...............................................................Disabled ................... (FF3]-(l-144)-15 ................ OFF HOOK SIGNAL VOLUME ........................................... 2nd level .................. 107 [FF31-(l-1441-16 ................ OFF HOOK SIGNAL PATIGRN.. ......................................... Continuous .............. 107 (FF3]-(l-144)- 17 ................ PSD NAh4E DISPLAY.. ....................................................... 5 names ................... 108 None ........................ 108 [FF3]-(l- 144)-18-25 ........... EXIENSION PAGE GROUP ............................................... [FF3]-( l- 144)-26 ................ DISPLAY WHEN IDIE .......................................................No change ................ 109 (FF3]-( l- 144)-27 ................ DISPLAY DURING DBS DIAL TONE ...................................No change ................ 110 [FF3]-(l-144)-28 ................ DISPLAY WHEN CAluNG AN JXfENSlON ........................... No change.. .............. 110 (FF3]-( l- 144)-29 ................ DISPLAY WHEN ACCESSING CO DIAL TONE ................... No change ................ 111 [FF31-(l-144)-30 ................ DISPLAY WHEN CONVERSING ON A CO LINE .................. No change ................ 111 (FF3]-(l-1441-31 ................ DISPLAY WHEN RECEMNG A PAGE ................................ No change ................ 112 ................. No change.. .............. 112 (FF3]-(l-144)-32 ................ DISPIAYAFlERRECEIVINGACAILWAfI’TONE [FF3]-(l- 144)-33 ................ DISPLAY WHEN DIALlNG AN EXTENSION ........................ No change ................ 113 (FF3]-(l-144)-34 ................ EXIENSION DIRECTORY DISPLAY &XC-B 2.0) ..................... 5 name .................... 113 (FF3]-(l- 144)-35 ................ INBOUND DID DIAL NUMBER (CIX-B 2.0 to 3.0) .............. No numbers assigned .. 114 [FF3)-(l-1441-35 ................ EXlENSlON CLASS OF SERVICE (CPC-B 3.0) .................... Class 0 ..................... 114 [FF3]-(l-144)-36 ................ RINGBACK TONE FROM BUSY SIGNAL (CPC-B 2.0) .............. Enabled .................... 115 (Flq-( l- 1441-37.................. Tl POKI- CL4SS--STA’IlON (CPC-B 4.0) ................................ No setllqq ................ 115 [FF3]-(l- 144)-38 ................ SINGLE LINE TELEPHONE HOOK FJASH (CPC-B 3.0) ........ HeId Itne amss ......... 116 10 Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com DBS Programming Instructions WC-A/ 3.0, CPC-B / 2.0 / 3.0 / 4.0 section 400 FFl Issue 3July 1993 (FF3]-(l-144)-39 .. . . . . . . . . .. . .. . . EXTENSION RING PAl-l-ERN (CPC-6 3.0) .. . . .. . . . .. . . . . .. . . . . . . .. . . Emulates Line rtng..... 117 [FF3]-(l-144)-40 .._.............. DIGKALSLTRECEMNG VOLUME (CPC-B 3.0) . . . .. .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . Normal . . . .. . . ._..._.._...... 117 .. . . .. . . . . . . . .. . . AUTO SET RELOCATlON CODE (CPC-B 3.0) . . .. . . . . .. . . . . . .. . .. . None set . .. . . .. .. . ... . .. ... . 1 18 ]FF3]-(l-144)-41 [FF3]-(l-144)-42 .. . . . . . . . . .. .. . . . PERMANENTCALL FORWARD ‘IYPE (CFC-B 3.0) .. . . . . .. .. . .. . Not set . . . .. . . . ... . ... . . .... . 119 [FF3]-(l-144)-43 . .. . . . . .. . . . . .. . . PERMANJZN’I-CAU, FORWARD EXTENSION (CPC-B 3.0) . . . . .. . Not set . . . . .. . . ... . .. .. . .... . . 119 . . .. . . . .. . . .. . . . . . . ML/MC0 SEPARATION (CPC-B 4.0) . . . . . .. . .. .. . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . .. . . .. . .. . MC0 .. .. .. .. . . ... . . ... . ....__ 120 pF3]-(l-144)-44 . .. .. .. . . .. .. . . . .. . .. . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . LARGE DISPLAY SCREEN APPENDIX . . . . .. . . . . . . .. .. . . .. . . . .. .. . .. . . . .. . . ... . . .._....__...._.......... 121 [FF4]-l-(1-145)-(1-64) [FF4]-l-(151-158)-(1-64) ......... CO DAY RING ASSIGNMENTS ........................................... Msabled ex 100.101 . .126 .............. Disabled .................... 126 ..... CO DAYRINGFORPILOTNUMBERS(CFcB2.0) [FF4]-2-(l-145)-(1-64) [FF4]-2-(151-158)-(l-64) ......... CO NIGHT RING ASSIGNMENTS ....................................... DisabId ex 100.101 . .127 ..... CO NIGHT RJNG FOR PILOT NUMBERS (CPC-B 2.0) ........... Disabled .................... 127 [FF4]-3-(1-S)- 1 .................... ]FF4]-3-(1-S)- 1 .................... [FF4]-3-( l-8)-2 .................... [FF4]-3-(l-8)-(3- 10) ............. [FF4]-3-( l-8)-2-(O-23 ............ [FF4]-3-( l-8)-3 .................... .................... [FF4]-3-(l-8)-4 [FF4]-3-( l-8)-(5- 12) ............. TERMINAL / CIRCULAR HUNT GROUPS ........................... PILOT EXIENSION NUMBER (CPC-B 2.0) .......................... CALL NEXT HUNT GROUP ................................................ . GROUP MEMBER TABLE ........................................ HUNT GROUP SEARCH METHOD (CPC-B 2.0) ................... TRANSFER EXIENSION NUMBER (CPC-B 2.0) ................... TRANSFER lXvlER ............................................................ HUNT GROUP EXlENSION NUMBER.. .............................. ............... CALL COVERAGE p4]4(1-16)-(1-S) GROUP MEMBER TABLE .................... Terminal ................... None ......................... None ......................... None ......................... Terminal ................... None ......................... 2 set ......................... None ......................... 128 129 130 131 13 1 132 133 133 None ......................... 134 ........... CO DAY RING (DELAYED] @XC-B 1.07) ............................. Disabwex. FF41-5-(l-145)-(1-64) 100.101 . .134 (CPC-B 2.0) .......... Disabled.. ................... 135 lFF4]-5(151-158)-(l-64) ......... CO DAY RING (DEIAYED) FORHUNI’GRP. lFF4]-6-(l-145)-(1-64) ............ CO NIGHT RING (DELAYED) &XC-B 2.0) ........................... Disabled ac. 100.101 . .135 rFF4]-6(151-158)~(l-64) ......... CO NGI’. RING 0 FOR HUNl-GRP. (CFC-B 20) .......... DkabkxI ..................... 136 RING TABIE (CPC-B 2.0) .................................. lFF4]-7-(l-144)-(1-144) .......... IXlENSION FF4j-8(1-144)-(I-144) .......... EXIENSION DElAYED RING TABIE; (CPC-B 2.0) ................... Disabled ..................... 136 Disabled ..................... 137 .............. FF KEY ASSIGNMEN-IS FOR EXl-ENSION ........................ C&deys plq-(l-144)-(1-24) FOR DSS CONSOLES .................. coltnekeys ml-( 145- l&i)-( l-24)or(l-72J . FF KEY ASSIGNMEMS .......... coIinekeys m-(149-152)-(l-S)odl-32) ..AmNDANiFEKIURE KEYPACKAGEASSIGNMENIS [FF6]-l-(1-144) ................... EXIENSION pF6]-2-(I- 144)-(00-89) ......... SYSlEM IFFq-3(1- 1441-w-99) m]4-(5-9) SPEED DIAL NAMES.. .................................... MESSAGES.. .................................................... [FF6]-5-( l-64) ....................... CO LINE NAME ASSIGNMENT (CPC-B 2.0) ........................ (FF6]-6-( 1-8) ........................ HUNTGROUPPIWTNAMEASSIGNhQZ~(CPC-B [FF6]-7-( l-5) ....................... CALL WA.ITlNG/OHVA TEXT REPLY (CK-B .......................................... Ext (number). ............ 144 SPEED DIAL NAMES .......................................... .......... PERSONAL ........................ ABSENCE NAME ........................................................... l-48.. ...... 138 l-144 ...... 139 1-144 ...... 141 None ......................... 144 None ......................... 145 None ......................... 145 None ......................... 146 3.0) ......... None ......................... 147 4.0) ............... Default messages ...... 147 CO LINE TOLL RESTRICTlON OVERVIEW.. ......................................................... 149 [FF7]-1-I ............................ INTERNAl-lONAL CALL ~RE-SlRICIlON TYPES 3-6 .... [FF7]- 1-2 ............................ RESTRICIlON DURING INBOUND CALL ........................... [FF7]-1-3 ............................ MAXIMUM DIALED DIGITS FORTRSTYPES 3-6.. ............. 2-6.. .................... FORTRS’IYPES [FF7]- l-(4- 11) .................... .3 DIGlTRESlRICI’lON ................... SEVEN DIGIT TOLL RESlRICnON TYPES 2-6 .................. [FF7]-l-(12-16) [FF7]-2-(3-6) ....................... AREACODETAI3LEFOR-IOURESIRICIlONlYPES3-6 [FF7]-3-(3-6) ....................... OFFICECODETABLE FORTOLLRESIRlC’IlONlYPES Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com Restricted .................. Enabled .................... No hit ..................... Restricted.. ................ Restricted .................. 15 1 15 1 152 152 153 ...... No setting.. ................ 153 3-6 .. No setthg .................. 154 11 Section 400 FFl DBS Rogramming Instructions WC-A / 3.0, CPC-B / 2.0 / 3.0 / 4.0 1993 [FF7]-4-( l-4) ........ ... .........._.SPECIAL AREA CODE TABLE FOR TRS TYPES 3-6 ..... ..._.. No setting .. .... ............ 155 Issue 2 Jdy [FF7]-5-n-4) .. ......__... ....__.....SPECIAL OFFICE CODE TABLE FOR TYPES 3-6 ... ..... ... .... No set% [FF7]-6-(l-50) ......_..._..........SPECIAL7 DIGVTABlE FORlRS’IWES / ... .. .....~...._.. 156 2-6 . ..... .. .... ... ... ... . No setttng .. ......... ..... .. 157 (FF7j-7-(1-w&)-(1-64) ........... DAY TOLL RESTRICTION lYPES O-7 ................................. Type 7.. ..................... 157 [FF7J-7-(l-144)-65................ DAY TOLL RESTRICnON TYPES O-7 ................................. No setting.. ................ 158 7.. ..................... 158 FF7j-8-(1-b&4)-(1-64) ........... NIGHT TOLL RESIRIC’IION TYPES O-7 ............................. m O-7 ................................ No setting.. ................ 159 m-8-( l-144)-65 ................ NIGHTToILRESlRICIlON?ypEs ]FF7]-9-(1-4) ....................... AREACODETABLE FOR’IRSTYPES 3-6 (GWBALCOpy) .... ....................... OFFICE CODE TABIJZ FOR’lRS TYPES 3-6 (GLOBAL COPY) .. [m-9-(5-8) [FF7]-9-(9- 12) ..................... AREA&OmCECODETABIEFOR?IZS3_6(CU3BALCOPY) [FF7]-9-( 13- 16) ................... SPECIAL OFFICE CODE TRS 3-6 (GLQBAL COPY) ............. No set&-g.. ................ 159 No sett.Q .................. 160 Nosetting.. ................ 161 No settiM.. ................ 162 .......................................... LEAST COST ROUITNG OVERVIEW ..................................................................... 164 [FF8]-l-(1-15)-(000-999) ..... LEAST COST ROUnNG AREA CODE ................................ No settinff .................. 166 ..... LEAST COST ROUllNG OFFICE CODE ............................. No setting .................. 167 [FFS]-2-(l-15)-(000-999) [FFS]-S( l-4)-(000-999) ....... SPECIAL LEAST COST ROUl-lNG AREA CODES TABLES .. No setttq m-4-( .................. 168 l-4)-( l- 15)~(000-999). SPECIAL LEAST COST ROUllNG OFFICE CODE TABLES . No setting.. ................ 168 [FF8]-5-(l-15)-(1-48)-(1-8) ...TlM E PRIOlU-lYROUIETABLES ....................................... No settiq.. ................ 169 [FF8]-S-(1-8)-(1-8)-(1-64) ..... LEAST COST ROUllNG Cd LINE GROUP TABLES ............ No setttq .................. 170 TABLES.. .......... No setting.. ................ 171 [FF8]-7-(l-8) ....................... LEAST COST ROU-l-lNG DIGIT DELJZ-I-ION f [FF8]-8-(1-8) ....................... LEAST COST ROU’IlNG DIGIT ADD TABLES ..................... No setting .................. 172 ]FFQ]-l-(1-64)-(1-64) .......... . CENTRAL OFFICE LINE COPY ...... .. .. ... .... .........m........._.....No settirq .._............._.174 [FF9]-2-(l-144)-(1-144) ....... EXlENSION COPY.. .......................................................... No s&m.. (FF9]-3-( l- 144)-( l- 144) ....... FF KEY COW ................................................................... No set-. ................ 174 ................. 175 .................. 176 [FFlOJ-l-(00-89) ................. SYSTEM SPEED DIAL NUMBERS.. .................................... No set-. [FFlO]-2-(l-14%)-(90-99) ..... PERSONAL SPEED DIAL NUMBERS.. ................................ No settiq.. ................ 177 i 12 Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com Technical Section 400 FFl Issue 3 July 1993 DBS Programming Instructions CPC-A / 3.0, CPC-B / 2.0 / 3.0 / 4.0 3-l SYSTEM PROGRAM SETTINGS I To set the date to February25,1985, enter the Month, Day and Year as follows: FF1],1#,1#,022595# The correct day is automatically calculated from this information. To reset the dav/date to the default initialized value. Dress IFFll. l#. l#, JCONFl. ION/OFFl. Telephone conversation time with an outside line is normally displayed on telephones with an LCD. The DBS can be programmed so that the call duration time is not displayed. To set the DBS so that the call duration time is not displayed. enter: [IFIFl], 2#, 1w. I#, ow To set the DBS so that the call duration time is displayed, enter: The day and date are also printed on the Station Message Detail Recording Proper LCR (SMDR) printout. operation is dependent upon correct date settings. Peripheral equipment operation may depend on correct date settings. JFFll.2#. l#. l#. l# Proper LCRoperation is dependent upon co~~ecttimesettings.peripheralequipment operation may depend on correct time seuings. To set the time to 3:28 pm, enter the hour and minutes as follows: FFl], 1#,2#, 1528CA To reset the time to the default initialized value. Dress lFFl1. l#. 2#, ICONFl. ION/OFF1 . Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com 13 Section 400 FFl Issue 2 July 1993 Conversation time for central office calls will start to display 16 seconds after the completion of dialing the number, or 16 seconds after the initial ring tone of an inbound call. The start timer can be set to 16 seconds or 30 seconds. WC-A DBS Programming Instruct.io~~ / 3.0, WC-B / 2.0 / 3.0 / 4.0 All incoming calls will start timing 5 seconds after the initial ring tone, even if the call duration display is not activated. To set the SMDR/display timer for 5 seconds, enter: JFFll. 2w. I#.21. O# All incoming calls will start timing 16 seconds after the initial ring tone, even if the call duration display is not activated. To set the SMDR/display timer for 16 seconds. enter: To set the SMDR/display timer for 16 seconds, enter: [eel],2w, l#. 2w. 1w JFFll.2#.l#. 26. OU To set the SMDR / display timer for 30 seconds, enter: To set the SMDR/display timer for 30 seconds, enter: WFll, 2#, l#,2#, 28 [FFl], 2#, l#, 2#, 1W Conversation time for central office calls will start to display 5 seconds after the completion of dialing the number, or 16 seconds after the initial ring tone of an inbound call, or 30 seconds after the initial ring tone of an inbound call. The start timer can be set to 5 seconds. 16 seconds, or 30 seconds. The central office call duration display is set by address [FFl], 2#. l#, l#. WC-B software version 2.00 should be upgraded to version 2.03 to eliminate two intermittent potential SMDR defkiencies in recording field codes. See Technote 8 (March 1992). for complete information. CPC-B versions 3.00 or newer resolves this potential SMDR deficiency. 14 Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com ( DES Programming Instructions WC-A / 3.0, CPC-B / 2.0 / 3.0 / 4.0 Outbound calls can be automatically routed to special carriers when LCR is activated. To access a non LCR line for outbound calls, (when a “9” is dialed). enter: JFFll.2#. I#.39. 08 To automatically access a LCR line for outbound calls, (when a “9” is dialed), enter: /’ cFF1],2#,I#, 3#, l# Section 400 FFl Issue 3 July 1993 A group of SSD numbers or a single SSD number can be used, despite toll restriction (types 2-6) that may be in use for a specific area or offrce code. The speed dial number entry used in this program is the lowest entry number to be able to override toll restriction. All SSD numbers higher than the one entered will also override toll restriction that may be in use for a specific area or office code. To set a group of system speed dial numbers from 56 to 89, (for example), to bypass toll restriction types 2-6, enter: [FFl],26, 1#,4#, 568 All LCRoptions are set at address number W-1. The use of LCR requires cutting the jumper on the CPC card. See Section 300 for specific details on this hardware modification. Make certain to register the DBS with the FCC using the proper registration number when using LCR trunk access programming. To reset the overriding of toll restriction tvnes 2-6 of a grout of svstem sueed dial numbers to the default initialized value. Dress (FF11, 2#. l#. 4#. (CONFL jON/OFFI. If a SLT uses this feature to override toll restriction, there is a 15 second delay before audio is passed to the receiver. Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com 15 Section 400 FFl Issue 2 July 1993 ’ You have the option of displaying, on any LCD phone, the telephone number associated with SSD codes (80-89). This option also effects REDL&L and will display or not display accordingly when redialing one of these SSD codes. Telephone numbers associated with SSD codes (00-79). and all names associated with all SSD codes will always display. To display the telephone number associated with SSD codes 80-89, enter: DBS Programming Instructions CPC-A / 3.0, CPC-B / 2.0 / 3.0 / 4.0 Pressing the REDIAL key will redial the most recently dialed number. To deactivate the use of the redial feature, enter: ml], 21, l#, 6W. O# To enable the use of the redial feature, enter: JFFll. 2W. 1%. 6W. l# JFFll. 2#. I#. 5w. 06 To withhold display of the telephone number associated with SSD codes 8089, enter: FFl], 2#, 19, 5#, 19 Toll restriction for blocks of System speed dial numbers is set at address [FFl], 2#, l#. 4#. Display of 5 or 10 System speed dial numbers on a large display telephone is set at address ]FFl]. 2#. l#, 19#. System speed dial names are set at address [FF6], 2#. (00-89)#. System speed dial numbers are set at address [FFlO], l#, (00-89)#. 16 Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com If the DBS is installed behind a PBX, this feature must be disabled. The central office line flash and the redial flash features are controlled by the same timer. The PBX flash timer is set at address [FFl], 3#, 18#. Central office line type is set at address [FF2]. (l-64)#, lO#. DBS Progmxmning Instructions CPC-A / 3.0. CPC-B / 2.0 / 3.0 / 4.0 The one-touch call feature provides dialing to an extension by pressing a single programmable key, and is enabled by both settings. This feature cannot be deactivated. 8’ An incoming call can be automatically transferred to another extensionbyplacing thecallonhold,dialingan&ensionnumber . . and hanging up. To disable automatic transferring of a call, to an internal extension, enter: pm], 2#, l#* 8#, O# To enable automatic transferring of a call to an internal extension, enter: JFFll. 2#. 1n. 88. 1w ...“fii$&@$ ~~-I- Section 400 FFl Issue 3 July 1993 only central office line calls can be transferred to other extensions. Transfer recall time for attendant(s). is set at address [FFl], 3#, 4#. Transfer recall time for extensions other than the attendant(s), is set at address [FFl], 3#, 5#. Transfer recall time for intercom calls from the attendant(s), is set at address [FFl], 3#, 24#. This feature is found on WC-B ver. 2.00 or newer. so&ware. Transfer recall time for intercom calls from extensions, is set at address [FFlJ, 3#, 2%. This feature is found on WC-B ver. 2.00 or newer sofhvare. Calls transferred by an extension, that recall to the extension, and then are not answered, will transfer -toextension 100. In CPC-B ver. 2.00 and newer, up to 4 attendant positions can be designated. Addresses to be used to set these extensions are [FFl], 2#. l#, 24-27#. The time for this transfer procedure is set at address [FFl], 3#, 9#. If a Voice Announce Unit (VAU model VB-43708) is used, this address must be set to the default setting as follows: [FFl], 2#, I#, 8#, l#. To transfer a call with this feature disabled the [PROG] key must be pressed after dialing an extension, but before hanging up the handset. When this option is enabled in a CPC-B equipped system, intercom calls and central office line calls can be transferred. In systems equipped with a WC-A card, Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com 17 Section 400 FFl Issue 2 July 1993 Automatically places a central office-tie that is in use on system hold, when you press a ringing line key to answer a new inbound call. To disable the automatic hold feature for a call on an existing central oflIce line, when a new central office line call is ringing in, enter: WC-A DBS Pro@ammin. Instructions / 3.0, CPCB / 2.0 / 3.0 / 4.0 Central office line-calls to a telephone that does not have a dedicated key appearance. can be placed on either system hold or exclusive hold. Access to a second central office line while using this feature is not possible. To enable the exclusive hold fature for central of&e lines that do not appear on a telephone. enter: pFlL 2#.1#,9#.0# pFl],2#, l#,lO#,O# To automatically place an existing central office line call on system hold, and to answer a new inbound ringing central office call, enter: To enable the system hold feature for central office lines that do not appear on a telephone, enter: pFl],2#, 1#,9#,1# JFFll, 21. l#.low. l# This hold feature applies to Single-Line Telephones and/or digital telephonesthat do not have a dedicated keys for a central office line(s). 18 Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com Technical DBS Programming Instructions WC-A / 3.0, CPC-B / 2.0 / 3.0 / 4.0 To provide differing capabilities for SLT hookflash operation, this feature can be set to retrieve DBS dial tone, or to retrieve a central office line caller that has been placed on hold%-omthis telephone. To activate the DBS intercom dial tone as a result of a SLT hookflash, enter: section 400 FF1 Issue 3 July 1993 When installing more than 60 telenhones, you must use a 3-digit (100-699) extension number dialing plan. For sites using fewer than 60 telephones, Zdigit ( 1O-69).or 3digit extension numbers can be used. To set the DBS for 2 digit extension number lengths, enter: pFl], 2w, I#, ll#,O# lFFl],2#, lW, 12#,0## / To retrieve a central office line caller that has been previously placed on hold at this telephone (via a hookswitch flash), enter: To set the DBS for 3 digit extension number lengths, enter: JFFll.2w. l#. ll#. l# JFFll.29. I#. 12w. I## When this feature is set for DBS system dial tone, a caU placed on hold at another telephone can be retrieved by dialing 79 and the extension number that originally placed the call on hold. Thissettingcanadverse~~~ttyother DBS setting that is based on extension numbers. Examples of this are program entries for DSS/BLF keys and call forwarding. ThispmgmrnoptionreouiresaconCnning#, at the conclusion of the programming sequence. Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com 19 Section 400 FFl Issue 2 July 1993 DBS Ro@umning Instructions CPC-A / 3.0, CPC-B / 2.0 / 3.0 / 4.0 The alternate attendant extension wiII have attendant features and can receive overfknv intercom calls if the primary attendant extension is busy. To set attendant intercom calls to “tone” calling, enter: To enable an alternate extension, enter: To set attendant intercom calls to “voice” caIling. enter: [eel],2#, l#, 14W.06 pm], 2#, l#, 13#,0# JFFll.2#. lW.146. l# To have no provision for an alternate attendant, enter: An alert tone for voice calling is set at address [FFl], 2#. l#, 16#. In CPC-B software versions earlier than 2.00. ifaSLTtmnsfersacentraIoi3celine caI.Ito an extension set for call forward no answer, or calI forward busy, no answer, This feature is not available if the *AttendwdFeaturePack~"isusedwith the call wiII not transfer if addresses [FFl], 2#, l#, 14 & 15# are set for tone CPC-B 2.00 or later software. calling (O#). If this setting is required, CaIIs transferred by an extension, that tmnsfeninga~tmIofEcelinecaIIkoma recall to the extension. and then are not SLT to an extension set as such can be answered, wiIl transfer to the extension completed by dialing an “8” after the set as the attendant at this address. extensionnumbertowhichthecaIIeristobe ‘The time for this transfer procedure is set transferredis diakd. CR-B software verat address (FFl], 3#, 9#. sionsnewerthan2.05donotrequimthe%” tobediaIedafterthe&ensionnumberis diakd. SeeTechnotes 9 & 12 (March 1992) for completetionnation. Ifthis addressis set to IFFlIt 2#. l#, 14#,l# Pmicd'dir@, asopposedto ringtone, and aVoice AnnounceUnit (modelVB-43708)is connecfedto the DBS, the VAU wiII not Intercom calls from an attendant answeranintercomcaUtoitunlessthecaIIer telephone can be established with a ring diaIsa”1”akrtheVAU~ionnumber. tone, or directly by voice. After the See Technote 14 (March1992)for complete connectionisestablished,theattendantcan information. changeii-omonetotheotherbydiaIing”1”. pFll. 2w. l#. 13w. l# 20 Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com DBS Programming Instructions WC-A / 3.0, CPC-B / 2.0 / 3.0 / 4.0 Intercom calls from an extension (non attendant) telephone can be established with a ring tone or by voice. After the connection is established, the extension user can change from one to the other by dialing “1”. _. To set extension intercom caIls to “tone” calling, enter: Section 400 FFL Issue 3 July 1993 If this address is set to [FFl]. 2#, l#. 1%. l# rvoice” caIIing), as opposed to ring tone, and a Voice Announce Unit (model VB-43708) is connected to the DBS. the VAU will not answer an intercom calI to it unIess the caller dials a “1” after the VAU extension number. See Technote 14 (March 1992) for complete information. [eel], 2w, I#, 15#, on Tosetextensionintercomcallingto”voice” caII.ing,enter: / .. / Dll. 2#. l#. 1%. I# An alert tone for voice caUing is set at address [FFl], 2#, l#, 16#. In CPC-B software versions earlier than 2.00, if a SLT transfers a central office line calI to an extension set for caII forward no answer, or calI forward busy, no answer, the ca.II wiII not transfer if addresses [FFl], 2#, l#, 14 & 15# are set for tone calIing (0% If this setting is required, transferring a central office line calI from a SLT to an extension set as such can be completed by diaIing an “8” after the extension number to which the caller is to be transferred is dialed. CPC-B software versions newer than 2.05 do not require the “8” to be dialed after the extension number is dialed. c..S. T~cBL-r\t~~ 0 IzI 1 c) fA/l.-arr.k 1 aa fnr Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com An initial splash tone for “voice” intercom c&Is can be sounded for 0.5 second before the caller’s audio path is connected. Intercom caI.Iscan be set for no initiaI alert tone by entering: prlrll. 2#. 16. 16#. OW Intercomcallscanbesetforaninftialalert tone by entering: ml], 28, I#, 16#,1# Section 400 FFl Issue 2 July 1993 Ifan active central office caIl is interrupted by another caller. on an extension set for busy override, an alert tone can precede the interruption. To have no alert tone preceding an interruption of an active central office line call, enter: WC-A DBS Programming Instructions / 3.0, CPC-B / 2.0 / 3.0 / 4.0 When a “1” must be dialed preceding an areacode to make along distance call, this option must be set. If long distance dialing requires the dialing of a “1” prior to the area code, enter: [eelI, 2W, l#, 18#,0# JFFlL 2#. 1s. 17#.0# To provide an alert tone preceding an intenuption of an active central o&e line call, enter: If long distance diaIing does not require the dialingofa’1”priorto dialing an area code. enter: JFFll.2#. l#. 18W. l# pFl]* 2w, 18, 17#, 1w A conference call, or a conversation on a telephone which has off hook voice announce enabled, cannot be interrupted by the busy override feature. Extensions to be interrupted, are set at address [FITS], (1- 144)#, lO#. 22 This setting must be enabled when toll restriction and/or LCR is used. Toll restriction programming is set with [FM] addresses. Least cost routing programming is set with [FFB] addresses. Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com DBS Programming Instructions CPC-A / 3.0, CPC-B / 2.0 / 3.0 / 4.0 Section 400 FFl Issue 3 July 1993 Five or ten names can be displayed on the LCD telephone directory at once. When 10 are chosen, the maximum length for each of the names is limited to 7 characters. To set LCD. directories capability, enter: jFFll.an. for 5 name JPml. 2#. 1#.21#.0# l#. 19#.0# To set the DBS to send a busy tone at the conclusion of a voice mail call, enter: To set LCD directories for 10 name capability, enter: pFl],2#, The DBS can be set to send a busy tone or to send silence to a voice-mail port(s) at the conclusion of a call. To set the DBS to send silence at the conclusion of a voice mail call, enter: ~1],2#. 1#,21#, l# l#, 19#, 1n .. To restrict a certain block of system speed dial numbers, see address [FFl]. 2#, l#, 4#. To enable or disable the display of System speed dialnumbers seeaddress [FFl]. 2#. l#, 5#. To assign a name to a system speed dial number, see address [FFG]. 2#, (00-89)#. Toassignanumbertoasystemspeeddial bin, see address [FFlO], l#, (OO-89)#. To utilize variable ring patterns for a transferred call (specifically to amodem or SLT user requiring ID of a transferred call), this option must be used. To set the transfer ring pattern to .4 sec. on / 3.6 sec. off. enter: pm, 2#. 1#.22#.0# To set the transfer ring pattern to three .8 sec. on .2 sec. off bursts / 1.0 sec. off, enter: fml], Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com 2#, 1#,22#, 1w 23 Section 400 FFl Issue 2 July 1993 DBS Programming Instructions CPC-A / 3.0, CPGB / 2.0 / 3.0 / 4.0 f To set the transfer ring pattern to .8 sec. on burst / .2 sec. off, .8 sec. on / 2.2 sec. off enter: pm], 21, 1#,22#,2# To set the transfer ring pattern to .8 sec. on / 2.2 sec. off, enter:: pm]* 2#, 1#,22#,3# To set the transfer ring pattern to .8 sec. on / 3.2 sec. off, enter: Toplacealimitonthenumberofincoming calls that can be stacked to the first attendant, a value must be placed in this program. Calls exceedingthe set limit are automatically transferred to other extensions. The day and night delayed ring tables determine which extension(s) receive overflow calls. To set the attendant overflow feature to 8 calls, for example, enter: mm 2w. 1#,22#.8# [eel], 2w, 1#,22#,4# L... To set the transfer ring pattern to .8 sec. on / 5.2 sec. off, enter: (FF1].2#, 1#,22#,5# To set the transfer ring pattern to .8 sec. on / 3.2 sec. off / .8 sec. on / 7.2 sec. off, enter: ml). 2W, 1#,22#,6# Hold recalls, transferred recalls, and reversion calls are included in this number. Hold recalls are dependent on attendantandextensionholdtimersfound in addresses [FFl] 3#. 2# & 3#. Transfer recalls are dependent on attendant and extension transfer timers found in addresses [FFl] 3#, 4# & 5#. Hunt group recalls are dependent on attendant and extension hunt group timers found in addresses [FFl] 3#, 6# & 7#. Reversion recalls are dependent on attendant reversion timers found in program address (FFl] 3#, 2# & lO#. The attendant telephone is not included as an overflow position in the delayed ring table(s). 24 Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com DBS Programming I.nstnxtions WC-A / 3.0, CPC-B / 2.0 / 3.0 / 4.0 An alternate central pattern is assigned ringing tables. section 400 ITI Is6ue3July1993 office line ring in the delayed To disallow the use of delayed assignments..in the DBS. enter: ring To set any DBS extension number to be the second attendant position, this option must be used. To set extension number 103 to be attendant position 2, for example. enter: JFFll. 2W. 1#.23#.0# pFl],2#* ToaUowtheuseofdelayedringass@mrents in the DBS, enten To reset the second attendant no&ion to the default initialized value. Dress IFFlG 2#. l#. 24#. lOl#. ON/OFF. tFF1],2#, 1#,23#, 103w l# . .. Delayed address Delayed address 1#,24#, day ring programmmg [FF4], 5#. night ring programming [FF4], 6#. is set at is set at To clear the second attendant position from extension number 101, set the program address [FFl], 2#. l#. 24#, ICONFJ. IOWOFFI. The only way the second attendant positioncanbeclearedistohaveadisplay phone installed on the port. The extension number must number that is valid for the site. be a Installation of Attendant feature package so&ware involves the removal of EPROM chip 1 from the CPC-B card, and substitution of the chip with one specifically designed with the special Attendant features. Be sure the new EPROM is installed in the proper direction. See Technote 4 (September 1991). for complete information. Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com 25 Section 400 FFl Issue 2 July 1993 WC-A DBS Programming Instructions / 3.0, CPC-B / 2.0 /.3-O / 4.0 f To set any DBS extension number to be the third attendant, this option must be used. To set any DBS extension number to be the fourth attendant, this option must be used. To set extension 104 to be attendant position 3. for example, enter: To set extension 105 to be attendant position 4, for example. enter: pFl],2#, ml].2#, 1#,25#, 104# 1#,26#, 105W To reset the third attendant nosition to the default initialized value. press IFFll. 2#, l#. 25#. ICONFl. ION/OFFl. To reset the fourth extension nosition to the default initialized value. Dress 1FFlG 2#. l#. 26#. ICONFl. lON/OFFl. Installation of Attendant feature package software involves the removal of EPROM chip 1 from the CPC-B card, and substitution of the chip with one specifically designed with the special Attendant features. Be sure the new EPROM is installed in the proper direction. See Technote 4 (September 1991). for complete information. Installation of Attendant feature package software involves the removal of EPROM chip 1 from the CPC-B card, and substitution of the chip with one specifically designed with the special Attendant features. Be sure the new EPROM is installed in the proper direction. See Technote 4 (September 1991). for complete information. 26 Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com Section4OO FFl 3 July 1093 DBS Programming Instructiox~ WC-A / 3.0, CPC-B / 2.0 / 3.0 / 4.0 Iesue To set any extension number to be the overflow position to which calls will flow when the attendant(s) are all busy, this option must be used. To set any attendant to be able to override an existing conversation on a non attendant telephone, this option must be used. To set extension 106, for example, to be the overflow extension forthe attendant(s), enter: To disable all designated attendant positions to override existing conversations on non attendant telephones, enter: p1],2#, I#, 27#, 106# pFl],2#, To reset the attendant overflow extension position to the default iniUallzed val e, press IFFll. 2#. l#. 27#. WON:], ON/OFF. 1#,28#,0# To enable all designated attendant positions to override existing conversations on non attendant telephones. enter: JFFll. 2#. 1#.28#. l# This extension cannot be a pilot number. Installation ofAttendant feature package software involves the removal of EPROM chip 1 from the CPC-B card. and substitution of the chip with one specifkally designed with the special Attendant features. Be sure the new EPROM is installed in the proper direction. See Technote 4 (September 199 1). for complete in.Sonnation. Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com Busy override splash tone is set with / program address [FFl], 2#, l#. 17#. Installation of At&dam feature package tsofhm involves the removal of EPROM chip 1 from the CPC-B card, and substitution of the chip with one spedficalty designed with the special Attendant features. Be sure the new EPROM is installed in the proper direction. See Technote 4 (September 1991). for complete kknnation. 27 Section 400 Issue 2 July FFl 1993 DBS Programming Instructions CPC-A / 3.0. CPC-B / 2.0 /.3.0 / 4.0 To set an FF key that has been designated as an alarm key on an attendant(s) telephone to light, this option must be used. When a ringing extension is not answered, calls can be distributed to other extensions on the basis of extension delayed ring programming. To disable the alarm key(s) on attendant telephones from lighting, enter: To disable the extension delayed ring option, enter: pm], Fell. 2#, l#, 29#, on To enable the alarm key(s) on attendant telephones to light, enter: pml. 2#. 1w. 308. ow To enable the extension delayed ring option, enter: 2w. l#, 29#. I# Lnstallation of Attendant feature package software involves the removal of EPROM chip 1 from the CPC-B card. and substitution of the chip with one specifically designed with -the special Attendant features. Be sure the new EPROM is installed in the proper direction. See Technote 4 (September 199 1). for complete information. Thisfeatureisusedtosetthetmnsferxing to an signs pattern for devices connected analog extension port of the DBS. Any of 1 seven different ring pattern can be ’ chosen. M End of Attendant Feature Package ,5 Seconds ON / 3.5 M I# 3.0 Seconds ON/ I .O Second OFF 2# 2.0 ON / 2.0 Seconds :3t 1 .O Seccmd ON /2.0 41 1 .O Second ON / 3.0 Seconds OFF !i# 1 .O Seccmd ON / 5.0 Seconds OFF OptiOIlS Srconds Seconds 1.O Second ( )N I 7.0 Secmds 28 Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com OFF OFF OFF DBS Programming Instructiom~ CPC-A / 3.0, CPC-B / 2.0 / 3.0 / 4.0 Four digit Direct Inward Dial numbers can be set to ring at one extension port, or at multiple extension ports. To set DID numbers to only ring at one extension, enter: JFFll. 2W. 1#.32#.0# To set DID numbers to ring at multiple extensions, enter: ml],2#, 1#,32#, l# When this feature is set to ” 1”. all &e.nsion ports that have a DID number asigned will simultaneously ring on an inbound Central O&x call. Ifthe setting of thisfeatureis”O”,andaDIDnumberhas been assigned to multiple &en&on ports, only the lowest number extension portwill w. . Also, if this feature is set to “1”. and multiple extension ports have a DID number assigned, but some or all of them are call forwarded, ONLY the lowest extension port number will call forward after the call forward timer expires. The remaining extension ports will ring from the DID assignment until the call foxwarding has started. If this feature is set to ” 1”. and multiple extension ports have a DID number assigned. and one (not the lowest port number) is call forwarded. the remaining extension ports will ring ikom the DID assignment until the call forwarding has started. Section 400 FFl Issue 3 July 1993 This programming address controls two functions. Ifonlyanalogtrunksareused,aItums on multiple DID numbering. Multiple DID numbering allows the assignment of one DID number to multiple extensions. If one DID/DNIS number is assigned to multiple stations, the stations ring simultaneouslywhen the DID or DMS number is dialed. IfTl trunks are used, a I also turns on DNIS (Dialed Number Identiiication Service). DNISisavailableonlywithTltrunks. More than one DNIS number can be assigned to a single extension. o=off l=On The option to set the duration that the page circuit will be active can be set for a deiIned or unlimited time. Tosetthepageduraliontimetounknikd, en& jFF11, 2#. 1n. 33#.0# To limit the page duration time to 60 seconds, enter: pm], 2#, I#, 33#, 1w 29 Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com Section 400 Issue 2 July FFl 1993 WC-A The ring pattern to a device that is connected to a Panasonic ringer box, and receives an inbound DISA call can be set to mering patterns. The pattern can be set to a one second on, three second off ring burst, or it can follow any of the patterns found in the normal Central Oi&etransferringpattemsfoundin[FF1]. 2#, l#, 22#. DBS Programming Instructions / 3.0, WC-B / 2.0 / 3.0 / 4.0 This part of the communication parameters checks for errors in the tmnsmission of data for SMDR application products, and local/remote pro-g. To disable the parity check for all transmission of datathmugh the SMDR port enterI [eel], 2%,2#, lW, ow TosettheSLTDiSAringpattemto on / 3.0 set off, enter: Jmll. l.Osec, Tosettheparitycheckforalltransmission of data through the SMDR port, enter: 2R. 1#.34#.0# EFll. 21y.21. I#. l# To set the SLT DISA ring pattern to be the same as the Central Office transfer ring pattern setting, enter: pF1],2#, 30 1#,34#, l# Be Sure to properly set all axnmunication Programming dwfien modifjling any single addressvalue. Communication parametersaresetwithaddressesthatare found at [FFl], 2#, 2#, 1 through lO##. Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com DBS Programming Instructions WC-A / 3.0, CPC-B / 2.0 / 3.0 / 4.0 If the parity check has been set, this option determines whether the check is based on an even count or an odd count. To set the parity check for an odd value, enter: pm]* section 400 FFl Issue 3 July 1993 The data transmission speeds between the DBS SMDR port and peripheral equipment can be set in arange from 300 bits per second to 9600 bits per second. To set the data transmission speedto 300 bps, enter: 2#,2#, 2#,OW fFFl],2#,2#,3#, To set the parity check for an even value. enter: JFFll.2#.2#.2#. 1w To set the data transmission speed to 1200 bps, enter: l# pm], Be sure to pmpexiy set all axnmunication pmgmmming addresses when modifjing anysingleaddressvaiue. Communication parameters are set with addresses that are found at lFFl], 2#, 2#. 1 thmugh lo??. 2#,2#, 3#,2# To set the data transmission speed to 4800 bps, enter: pl], 2#, 2#, 3#,3# To set the data transmission speed to 9600 bps. enter: plw. 2#.2#. 3#.4# Be sure to proper@ set all communication programming addresses when modifying single address value. Communication parameters are setwith addresses that are found at [FFl), 2#, 2#. 1 through lO#. 31 Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com Section 400 FFl Issue 2 July 1993 WC-A DBS Programming Instructiona / 3.0, CPC-B / 2.0 / 3.0 / 4.0 f ‘This option sets the length of the stop-bit for transmitted data. Sets the length of *he transmitted data string at 5 to 8 bits. To set the length of the stop bit data to 1 bit. enter: To set the length of the data string at 5 bits, enter: ~ll.2#,2#.4#. CFFl], 2w, 2w. w, 1w l# To set the length of the stop bit data to 1.5 bits, enter: To set the length of the data string at 6 bits, enter: pFl],2#,2#,48,2# WFl],2#,2#. To set the length of the stop bit data to 2 bits, enter: To set the length of the data string at 7 bits, enter: [eel], 2#,2#,4#, ::......: ::.:..,: :)J::> :::>.. DJ&p&#@ IFFl],2#,2#,5#, 3# Be sure to properly set all communication addresses when modifying any single address value. Communication parameters are set with addresses that are found at [FFll, 2#, 2#, 1 through lO#. 5W, 2W 3% To set the length of the data string at 8 bits, enter: 11.2#.2#. 5#.4# ,*~ E3esure to properly set all communication addresses when modifying any single address value. Communication parameters are set with addresses that are found at (FFl], 2#, 2#. 1 through lO#. 32 Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com f- DBS Programming Instructions WC-A / 3.0, CPC-B / 2.0 / 3.0 / 4.0 Section 400 FFl Issue 3 July 1993 The SMDR printer can record data for outgoing calls only or both outbound and inbound calls. The SMDR printer can record data on long-distance calls only or on all types of outbound calls. To set the SMDR. to record only outbound call information, enter: To record call data only on long distance calls, enter: EFl], [IFFl], 2#, 2#, 6#, OW 2#, 28, 7#, O# To set the SMDR to record inbound and outbound call information, enter: To record call data on all types of outbound calls, enter: FFll. jFF11. 2#. 2W. 7#. l# 2#. 21. 6#. l# The system must be in the SMDR mode so that the printer can provide usable SMDR data. This is done by performing the following action from the attendant extension: [ON/OFF], #, 93, [ON/OFF]. Al communication settings between the printer and the DBS must be matched. [FFl], 2#, 2#, 1 through 5# addresses encompass these options. Be sure to properly set all communication addresses when modifying any single address value. Communication parameters are set with addresses that are found at [FFl], 2#, 2#, 1 through lO#. CPC-B software version 2.00 should be upgraded to version 2.05 to eliminate two intermittent potential SMDR deficiencies in recording field codes. See Technote 8 & 12 (March 1992). for complete information. Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com Be sure to properly set all communication programming addresses when modifying any single address value. Communication parameters are set with addresses that are found at [FFl], 2#, 2#, 1 through lO#. CPC-B software version 2.00 should be upgraded to version .2.05 to eliminate two intermittent potential SMDR deficiencies in recording field codes. SeeTechnotes 8 & 12 (March 1992). for complete information. 33 Section 400 FFl Issue 2 July 1993 WC-A DBS Programming h~~tn~ction~~ / 3.0, CPCB / 2.0 / 3.0 / 4.0 f Titles such as Time, Duration and CO# are printed every 60 lines if this feature is enabled. To disable the printing of a title line on every 60th line of the SMDR report, enter: JFFll. 2#.2#. 8#. 0# To set the printing of a title line on every 60th line of the SMDR report, enter: The X-On/X-Off feature of the DBS is a k&ware switch” to temporarily stop the DBS fkom sending data out the SMDR portiftheprinterbufferhasreceivedmore data than it can print. The ability to send a control code to the DBS can be enabled on most commercially available printers. To disable the X-On/X-Off feature of the DBS, so that SMDR data always flows from the SMDR port, enter: mm leel],2#,2#,8#. Be sure to properly set all communication addresses when modifying any single address value. Communication parameters are set with addresses that are found at [FF’l], 2#, 2#, 1 through lO#+. CRC-B software version 2.00 should be upgraded to version 2.05 to eliminate two intermittent potential SMDR deficiencies in recording field codes. SeeTechnotes 8 81 12 (March 1992). for complete information. 34 2#.2#.9#.0# 19 To enable the X-On/X-Off feature of the DBS, so that SMDR data will temporarily stop flowing when the printer bulk is fiAl, enter: rFFll,2#,2#, 9n, 1n Be sure to properly set all communication addresses when modifying any single address Communication value. parameters are set with addresses that are found at [FFl], 2#, 2#. 1 through lO#. CRC-B software version 2.00 should be upgraded to version 2.05 to eliminate two intermittent potential SMDR deficiencies in recording field codes. See Technotes 8 & 12 (March 1992). for complete information. Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com c- DBS Programming Inst~ctions / 3.0, CPC-B/ 2.0 / 3.0 / 4.0 Section 400 FFl Issue.3 July 1993 WC-A The baud rate that is used for remote programming capability can be set to 300 or 1200 baud. To set the baud rate for remote progmmmingcapabilityto 3OObaud. enter: fH@Fl],2#,2#, lO#,O# The DBS has the capability to dial 8 different PBX access codes. These codes can be one, two. or three digits in length. Thepurposeofthisfeatureissothatwhen the DBS is installed behind a PBX or Centrex, and toll restriction has been set on the DBS, the DBS will disregard the PBX access code digit(s) as part of the dialed number. To set the baud rate for remote programming capability to 1200 baud, enter: To store “9” as the Grst PBX access code (for example), enter: jmll. pFl],2#,3#,1#,9# 2#.2#. low. 1n To set the second PBX access code of “8” (for example), enter: When a remote administration “B” card is used, either baud rate setting can be utilized. However when a remote administration “B” card is used with a dual DBS having a voice mail system connected to an analog extension port, the baud rate must be set to 300 bps. See Technote 3 (April 1991) for complete information. When a remote administration “A” card is used, only the 300 baud rate setting can be used. Parity check, even or odd parity, and stop-bit length parameters are fixed on the WC-B card. The use of peripheral equipment with this card necessitateSthat the equipment communication pammeters must be able to be modified. Be sure to properiy set all communication addresses when modifying any single address value. Communication pammeters are set with addressesthat are found at [FFl), 2#, 2#, 1 though lO#. Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com To reset the PBX dial access code feature tothedefaukinitializedvalue.~ressfFFll, 2#. 3#. (l-8)#. ICONFl#. fON/OFFl. Use (FFl l] to store rr*nas awild card dialed digit. Central office line type is set with program address [FFZ?],(l-64)#. lO#. The first parameter of the program code (l-8). identies the number of the access code. The second parameter of the program code (O-999 or O*-99*), identifies the actual coderequired to access the PBX or Centrex. Section 400 FFl Issue 2 July 1993 To automatically insert a pause in the PBX access code dialing (and SSD. PSD codes), after the output of the first and/or second, and/or third code number, use this option. The purpose for the use of this pause is that it may take several seconds to connect with a central office telephone line. To set a pause after automatic outpuke of the first dialed digit, (which is assumed to be L(1” in this example), enter: pFl],2#,3#, 9#, l# To set a pause after automatic outpulse of the second dialed digit, (which is assumed to be “2” in this example), enter: DBS Programming Instructions CPC-A / 3.0, CPC-B / 2.0 / 3.0 / 4.0 To set a pause after automatic outpulse of the sixth dialed digit. (which is assumed to be “6” in this example), enter: leel],2#,3#, To set a pause after automatic outpulse of the seventh dialed digit, (which is assumed to be “7” in this example), enter: [FFl], 2#, 3W, 15#, 7W To set a pause after automatic outpulse of the eighth dialed digit, (which is assumed to be “8” in this example), enter: @Wl].2#,3#, pFl],2#,3#, To reset the automatic cause for PBX access code dialing to the default initialized value. Dress lFF11. 2#. 3#, ]CONFl#. lON/OFFI. 11#,3# To set a pause after automatic outpulse of the fourth dialed digit, (which is assumed to be “4” in this example), enter: [eel], 2w, 3#, 12#,4# lhe pause timer value is set with address [FFl], 3#. 12#. Central ofIke line flash timer options are set at address [FF2], (l-64)+!. 13#. To set a pause after automatic outpuke of the fifth dialed digit, (which is assumed to be “5” in this example), enter: pm], 36 16W.81 10#,2# To set apause after automatic outpuke of the third dialed digit. (whichis assumed to be “3” in this example), enter: rFFl], 2#,3#, 14#,6# 2#, 3#, 13#,5# Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com DBS Programming In8t~~ction.s WC-A / 3.0, CPC-B / 2.0 / 3.0 / 4.0 The ring pattern for the universal night answer (UNA) relay-terminals can be set foracontinuousorintermittent ringburst. section 400 FFl Issue 3 July 1993 To enableaccesstoextemalpaginggroups 0 through 7. the relay(s) must be activated. To set the ring pattern for a 1 second on/ 3 second off pattern, enter: JFFll. 2#.4#. l#.OW To set the ring pattern for a continuous ring burst, enter: c j pFl],2#,4#, ng@yJg$& .::.. .:..::.:I.::: lW, 1w To reset the external nage interface to the default initialized value Dress. IFFll. 2#, #. ICONFl. lON/OFFl. When using a non central office sound. source for the buzzer, select 1 second on/ 3 second off to simulate an incomingring. Seesection 300, Insta.Uation Instructions, for more information on UNA. To establish a central office line ring over external page speakers when the DBS is in the day mode, (and WC-A software is being used) see address (FF4], l#, 73#. To establish a central of&e line ring over external page speakers when the DBS is in the night mode, (and WC-A sofkvare is being used) see address ]FF4], 2#. 73#. To establish a central office line ring over external page speakers when the DBS is in the day mode, (and WC-B software is being used) see address fFF4], l#, 145#. To establish a central office line ring over external page speakers when the DBS is in the night mode, (and WC-B softwareis being used) see address [FF4], l#. 145#. Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com Extension class of service provides a method to set defined groups of extension features to a class of senrice. This class of service is then assigned to an extension or group of extensions, as desired. The 20 extension features can be assigned in any order and in any amount to any of the 8 classes of service. 37 section 400 Issue 2 July FFl 1993 DBS Pro@amd.n~ hstnrctions CPC-A / 3.0, CPC-B / 2.0 / 3.0 / 4.0 The 20 allowable features that can be classified into grouping are: any class of service There are 100 verified forced account codes available for use. A four digit account code ranging from 0001 to 9999 is checked against a list of up to 100 preset values. If the value of the code matches one of the preset values, Central Office line access is granted. Fa8tum / 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 Dial Tone On/Off 1#50) Head/Handset Exchange (#51) BGM On/Off (#53) (Absence Message Set/Reset (71) Call Forward Set/Reset (72) Do Not Disturb (73) Station Lockout (74) Park Access (75) Park Pick Up (76) Meet Me Answer (771 IUNA Pickuo (78) IDirect pick Up (79) /Group Pick Up (70) (Tone/Voice Mode (1) /Message Waiting Set (2) IBusy Override (4) Icall waitin&? (3) Single Une Telephone Transfer For example, to set verified forced account code 1 to a value of 8888, enter: [eel], I 2#, 6#, l#, 8888W For example, to set verified forced account code 56 to a value of 5656, enter: CFFl],2#, 6#,56#, 5656# To reset the ve&ed forced account code parameter to the default initial&d value, press IFFll. 2#. 6#t. (l-lOO)#. lCOm . ~ON/OFFl. (8) To set the extension class of sewice to the default initialized value. press IFFll. 2#, 5#. (l-8)#. (l-20)#. O#. iON/OFFl. The default value of this feature sets full restriction on all classes of service. The extension programmmg for this feature, [FF3], (OOl-144)#, 35#, provides for all features to be available on all extension ports. When the DBS is in the default condition, the extension programming of this feature takes precedence. Forced Account codes found in earlier versions of software have been replaced by this feature. The account code feature (non forced) remains. A veiled forced account code of 0000 is invalid. When viewing an SMDR report, the verified forced account that was used to access a Central Office line will appear starting in position 70 of the call record line. 38 Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com Technical DBS Programming Instructions CPC-A / 3.0, CPC-B / 2.0 / 3.0 / 4.0 Verified forced account codes can have a toll restriction class of service assigned to them. A caller that uses a particular account codewith atoll restriction class of service assigned to it would then be allowed to dial any telephone number allowed under the toll restriction class of service for the verified forced account code.Theextensiontollrestrictionclassof service in this case would be overridden. Section 400 FFl Issue 3 July 1993 To set verified account code number 100, for example, to have a toll restriction class of “type 3”. enter: IFFll, 2#, 6#, lOO#, 2#,3# To set verified account code number 63, for example, to have a toll restriction class of “type 4”. enter: [eel], 29,6#, 63#, 2#, 4W To set verified account code number 5, for example, to have a toll restriction class of “type 0”. enter: To set vetied account code number 36. for example, to have a toll restriction class of “type 5”. enter: Wl], 2#, 6#, 36#, 2W.58 To set verified account code number 40, for example, to have a toll restriction class of “type 1”. enter: ml], 2#,6#,40#,2#, To set verified account code number 44, for example, to have a toll restriction class of “type 6’. enter: 1W ml], To set vetied account code number 22, for example, to have a toll restriction class of “type 2”. enter: 2#,6#, 44#, 2#, 6U To set verified account code number 61, for example, to have a toll restriction class of “Iypc 7”. enter: [eel], 2#,6#,22#,2#,2# Bl], Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com 2#,6#,61#,2#,7# 39 Section4OOFFl Issue2JuIylQQS ‘This option sets a time for the DBS to automatically switch from day to night mode. DBSPro@amm~~~ctions WC-A/ S.O.CPCB / 2.0 / 3.0 / 4.0 A central office line that has been placed on hold at the attendant extension, will recall that attendant extension in the amount of time set in this feature. To set a night mode start time of 8:02 pm, (for example) enter: pwl],3#, 1#,2002# cm To set anight mode start time of midnight, (for example) enter: pF1],3#,1#,oooo# To disable the automatic m&t mode start time. and reset it to the default initialized value Dress. IFFll. 3#. l#. ICONFl. ION/ OFFl. Automatic night start time is dependent on the accuracy of the DBS clock. See address (FFl], l#, 2#, HHMM. 40 Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com NoRed 7t4 14OsecOnds DBS Programming Instructions WC-A / 3.0, CPC-B / 2.0 / 3.0 / 4.0 section 400 FFl Issue 3 July 1993 A central of&e line call transferred to an extension by the attendant, that is left unanswered, will recall to the attendant extensionintheamountofUmesetinthis feature. A central oflice line that has been placed on hold by a non-attendant extension, will recall that extension in the amount of time set in this feature. o# No Recall 7# 14ofL?econds I& 20Secoods a# 160 seconds # 80!3ecmh ll# 220 5# loo 12# 24oisecmds SeaRIds !5iecalds . ._ When a central office line call is placed on hold at an extension. and the call is not answered, the call will recall the extension. If the call is not answered at the original holding extension, the call will transfer to the attendant extension(s). Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com 41 Section 400 FFl Issue 2 July 1993 WC-A A central office line call transferred to another extension that is left unanswered, will recall to the transferring extension in the amount of time set in this feature. o/t NolhA 7# 14osfxmds When a central office line call is transferred to an extension, and the call is not answered, the call will recall to the transferring extension. If the call is not answered at the original transferring extension, the call will transfer to the attendant extension(s). 42Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com Technical DBS ProgrammingInstnmtions / 3.0. CPC-B / 2.0 / 3.0 / 4.0 A central office line call transferred to a hunt group by the attendant, that is left unanswered, will recall to the attendant extension in the amount of time set in this feature. on No Recall fry 14OSeCOtldS lit - 8ft 160 seconds 2# 4oz3ecods w 180 seamds 3# 6oseaKKis IOU -2m.?eaJn&~ # Bosemnds 111 22oseconds 5# 1OOZkCOdS 12# 24oseculA 6# 120 secunds A central o&e line call transferred to a hunt group by a non attendant &ension that is left unanswered, will recall to the extension in the amount of time set in this feature. T&!l ‘. DBS Programming I.nstructions CPC-A / 3.0. CPCB / 2.0 / 3.0 / 4.0 Section 400 FFl hmue 3 July 1993 A central of&e line call that is parked by the attendant in any of the 10 park orbits, will recall to the attendant in the amount of time set in this feature. This timer determines how long a recalling hold call will re-ring the attendant(s). I 3# I 6ot3camds I *o#I 2ooseoDnds I 11 A central of&e line call that is parked by a non attendant extension in any of the 10 park orbits, will recall to the extension in the amount of time set in this feature. Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com ExtensionrecallswUlringattheextension for the length of time set in this option before reverting to the attendant. This feature is not available when the DBS is in the night settjng. Section 400 Issue 2 July FFl 1993 The length of time a conference call can continue between 2 central office lines, after a DBS extension drops out is set with this program. At the conclusion of the timer, the conferenced central office lineswill automatically disconnect. This timer also applies to outbound central office line calls made through the DISA line. To allow specific central of&e lines to be used for unsupervised conference calls, set program address [FF2], (l-64)#, 16#. To allow specific extensions to be used for unsupervised conference calls, set address [FF3], (l- 144)#, 13#. 44 Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com WC-A DBS Programming Instructions / 3.0. CPC-B / 2.0 / 3.0 / 4.0 This feature is used to set the length of the pause that is automatically inserted during the dialing of the PBX access code. Each time the [REDIAL] key is pressed during the entry of PBX access code numbers, one pause time is stored. This timer also sets the pause time when a pause is inserted in a personal or system speed dial number. Section 400 FFl lssuti 3 July 1993 DBS Programming Instructions WC-A / 3.0. CPC-B / 2.0 / 3.0 / 4.0 This feature sets the time to release an active central office line when pressing the [FLASH] or (REDIAL] key. ! F&h al B.-mllds .2 Seconds lO# .9 .3 .secorKl.s 11# (For future use.) 12# (For future use.) No Seconds Seconds 1.5 seconds 2.0 seconds 3# .4 4# .5 scconcls 13# 2.5 Seconds (For uure use.) 5# .6 Seconds 14# (For future use.) 8# .7 Seconds 15# 3.5 seconds (For f&u-e use.1 ’ To set the central office line flash on a SLT to flash or disconnect when the hook switch is pressed, use this feature. 3.0 seconcls Single line telephones must press the hookswitch and dial “87 to activate this feature. Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com ms 1 200-500 ms 1 >500 ms l# 4200 ms 200-750 ms >750 ms 2# 4200 ms 200- 1000 ms > 1000 ms 3# 4200 ms 200- 1200 ms >1200 ms 4# 400 ms 200- 1500 ms >1500 ms 5# 4200 ms NONE >200 ms 6# 4200 ms 30- 140 ms 9dCl ms O# 1 400 After setting this timer, the D&3 must be turned off to set the option. 45 section 400 Issue 2 July FFl 1993 WC-A For the DBS to detect the length of time it takes for the central office to complete a fiAl ring cycle, this detection timer must be set. Ifthe central office has a ring cycle of 1 on and 4 off. for example, the DBS setting should be placed at 6 to account for two rings and one silent period of four second duration. OI UL 4 seaonds 2t 8 SeoDnds 31) 10 fsccmds DBS Ro@amming / 3.0. CPGB / Ixistructions 3.0 / 4.0 2.0 / This timer expands the ring cycle to compensate for the time the DBS initcally requires to detect the ring source. OI Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com a* .40 seconds 3# .5 sannds 90 .45 seconds 2# .lO Sccoado 101 so 31 .lS secon& 11a .55 Eiecmds 4# -2o- 12* 60 51 .25seauMl¶ 13# 61 .30- 14n IurI.35 If this timer is set for to short of a time period, the systemwUnotrecognizevalid centml ofke ring signals. kurpansloo I 151 ’ seconds seconds .6!5 seconds .70 seconds I .75 seconds Setting this timer for longer or shorter periods oftimewill cause the first audible ring cycle to be different from the source ring cycle. DBS Programming InstrUctions WC-A / 3.0, CPC-B / 2.0 / 3.0 / 4.0 To set a pause before the outpulse of digits after access of a central office line, use this feature. Time Section 400 FFl Issue 3 July 1993 Ifan extension that has been set with call forward/no answer, a call to that extension will ring for the period of time set in this feature. If the call is unanswered at the end of the timed period, the call will automatically transfer to an extension that has been designated in setting up the call forward option. The PBX flash timer sets the amount of preprogrammed time that is assigned to the [FLASH] key, for the release of a FBX line. OI No Flash 61 .7 tckmnds II .2 .su%Jds ztt 21 3 .sccorKls 81 .9 slxonds 31 .4 slxods 91 1.0 seconds 4r 5 t3econds 101 1.1 slxonds 5# .6 Samnds .,......*?. a.jq@$p&$ When the DBS is behind a PBX, the flash feature can be used to place a call on hold. Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com 47 Section 400 Issue 2 July FFl 1993 DBS Pro#ammin~ I.nstructions CPC-A / 3.0, CPGB / 2.0 / 3.0 / 4.0 When ground start lines are used, the DBS sends a ground signal to the centml of&e and waits for a return signal. When a return signal is detected, the DBS starts the line connection process. If a return signal is not detected within the sped&d time set in this feature, the system regards the trunk as not available and sends a busy tone to the caller. 3w 4s 3sealfKl 71 7 8umnis 8# 8 SXONIS This feature is only available with the use of a CFC-B card. A ground-start trunk card (W-43531) is required for ground start trunk connections. Central office line ports on this card can be conElgured as loop or ground start ports. This timer determines how long aground signal from the central office must be present in order to start the connection process. When the ground signal is detected, the line LED will turn red indicating that the trunk is in use, even though the call has not been processed. To activate the ground detection timer, . set the parameters for the loop-start/ ground-start type to ground-start in [FF2], 21# address. Install ground-start trunk card (VB 43531) according to the instructions in section 300. Setting this timer for less then 3 seconds can cause false incoming calls. This is due to the possibility of the ground not being removed quickly at the end of a call. , Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com 423’ DBS Programming Instructions CPC-A / 3.0. CPC-B / 2.0 / 3.0 / 4.0 CaJls made by an attendant(s) to another extension, that have subsequently been placed on hold by the attendant, will recall the attendant in the time designated by this timer. Time Ttule I O# No Recall 7r 140 seamds 21 40 Seconds 91 180 seconds 31 60 seconds 101 200 seoonds 4x 60 sesonds 11r 220 seconds 5w loo 12s 240 Seconds 6X I seconds section 400 FFl lssui 3 July 1993 A call transferred to an extension by an attendant, that has not been answered by the extension will recall the attendant in the time designated by this timer. O# No F&call lit 7w 140 SeaJnds 8X 160 seomds 3# 60 .semnds lO# 200 .semnds 41 60 seconds 111 220 sesonds 5w 6W I 100 SeaJrKls 11201 24osecmd-1 120 seconds 120 Eieaxlds Calls made by an extension to another extension, #at have subsequently been placed on hold by the calling extension, will recall the calling extension in the time designated by this timer. Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com A call transferred to an extension by another extension, that has not been answered will recall the calling extension in the time designated by this timer. DBSRogramm~Instructiom WC-A/ 3.0,CPC-B / 2.0 J 3.0 / 4.0 Section 400 FFl Issue 2 July 1993 If a Central Office line has been set to ring on an extension(s), and the call is not picked up, this timer determines the amount of time it will ring there until extensions that have been set for delayed ringing on a Central Oflice line will begin to ring. If an -ension call is ringing at another extension, and the call is not picked up, this timer determines the amount of time it will ring there until extensions that have been set for delayed ringing for extension callswillbegintoring. If a call has entered a hunt group, and an idle extension in the group starts to ring, but the call is not picked up, this timer determines the time that the extension will ring before the next idle extension in the hunt group starts to ring. 2ii - 31 After 16 Seumds 7W ( Afta 32 6eamds 1 104 Afta44seamda ll# Ana46second8 15U 1 A&r 64 6axmds 1 AutomaticDayModeallowstheDBStogo into day mode automatically. Automatic Night Mode (FFl, 3#, l#) allows the DBS to go into night mode automatically. To turn automatic day mode off, enter: FF13# 29# CONF key ON/OFF key# 1. If only one of the auto modes is turned on, the NIGHT key is used to turn off the auto mode. For instance, if night mode Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com DBS Programming Instructions CPC-A / 3.0, CPC-B / 2.0 / 3.0 / 4.0 Section 400 FFl Issue 3 July 1993 has been activated automatically, the attendant must press the NIGHT key to go into day mode. 2. Knowledge of the 4-digit DISA ID code. (See-[FFl], l# through 5# program 2. If both auto day and auto might modes are turned on, the attendant NIGHT key cannot be used. 3. After the DBS automatically answers your inbound call on the preset DISA line with the intercom dialing tone, remote programmingcanbeginbydialing#6and the 4-digit remote-programming ID code. 3. Ifboth auto-modes are set, the starting times must differ by at least one hour. 4. When one auto mode is turned on, the mode cannot be reset by the NIGHT key until 3 minutes after the auto mode is activated. (Whenbothautomodesareset, the NIGHT key cannot be used.] addresses]. 4. An attendant or extension user can manuaily transfer the remote programmer into programming by putting the remote programmer on hold, dialing #6. and the 4 digit remote programming lD code. 5. The following remote operations are . possible: al Remote programming: If a remote programming ID code is set, a dumb terminal or PC can be used to program the DBS from a remote site or on site, by connecting to the RS232C interface. Remotely setting any DBS parameter, just as would be done with on site P~gramming~ b) Bus monitor data: To set the remote programming ID code to 0001, for example, enter: [eel], 4#, ooo1n To reset the remote nro~ramrning ID code to the default initialized value, press IFFll. 4#. lCONF1. ION/OFFl. Remotelyviewbusmon.itordata..whichis commonly used to troubleshoot operational problems. This may be possible in real time. depending on the buffer of the device being used. Remote programming of the DBS requires the foIlowing: 1. A central o&e line that is set with DISA CapZlbility. Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com 51 Section 400 issue 2 July FFI 1993 WC-A DBS Programming Instructions / 3.0. WC-B / 2.0 / 3.0 / 4.0 The DISAID code provides direct access to a DBS intercom dial tone, on an inbound central ofIke Iine that is preprogrammed as a DISA Iine. To provide an inbound DBS caller with access to “fresh” outbound central office dial tone, a four digit access code is required. To set the DISA ID code to 0001, for example, enter: To set the first DISA outgoing call ID code to 0001, for example, enter: pFl1, St, OoolW IFFlI,6#, To reset the DISA ID code to the default initiaIized value. Dress IFFll. 5#. ICONfl ION/OFFl. To reset the first DISA outgoiw calI ID code to the default initiaked value, press IFFll. 6#. l#. ICONFl. ION/OFFl. The default setting of the DBS supplies intercom dial tone to a Iine defined as a DISA line. If a DISA ID code is stored in place of the default setting (via remote programming) an intercom dial tone wiII not be heard, but rather a DISA dial tone (fast busy tone). The DISA dial tone is a signal to proceed with your caII until you enter the stored DISA ID code. After the DISA ID code is entered, the intercom dial tone is presented. This provides the opportunity to make a DBS extension caII. To provide an inbound DBS caller with access to “fresh” outbound central office dial tone, a four digit access code is required. To set the second DISA outgoing caII ID code to 0002, for example, enter: WF1],6#, To make an outbound central office Iine call. enter #7, dial 9 or 81-86 (to access a central ofke line), then dial the 4-digit DISA ID code. See (FFl], 6#, l# and 2# addresses. 52 lW, OOOl# 2W, 0002# To reset the second DISA outgoing caII ID code to the default initiahzed value,. press IFFll. 6#. 2% ICONFl. ION/OFFl. Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com DBS Programming Instructions WC-A / 3.0. CPC-B / 2.0 / 3.0 / 4.0 To perform DBS programming ikom an extension other than the attendant position, this option must be set. The 4-digit ID code set in this option must be used as part of the access attempt to program the DBS. when a non attendant position is used in this manner. To set the ID code for system programming to 000 1, for example, enter: Section 400 FFl Issue 3 July 1993 Direct Inward Dial numbers that have been set up as a part of WC-B ver. 2.11 or older software, need to be defaulted with the use of this program after upgrading a DBS to ver. 3.00 software. Also, at any time that a default of ALL assigned DID numbers is desired. this program must be used. To choose not to reset existing DID number assignments, enter: pFll.8#. c- / To reset the ID code for svstem promamming to the default initialized value. Dress IFFll. 7#. ICONFl. ION/OFFl. l#.O# At any time a reset of all assigned DID numbers to the default value (no DID numbers assigned) is desired, enter: DrIrl], 8#. I#, 1n Only one non attendant extension can be a programming extension at a particular time. To set a different non attendant position as the programming &en&on. cancel the capability of the first extension by reentering the 4digit ID code at the original non attendant extension, then enter the same ID code at the second extension. DID settings have to be manually configured if the DBS has a software version older than 3.00, that is being upgraded to version 3.00 or newer. Before this manual reconfigurafion can be done however, the DID reset program ([FFl], 8#, l#), must be done. On CPC-A software versions later than 3.2 1, and WC-B versions later than 2.00, entering the ID code for system programming at a second extension, will automatically cancel the programming capabiltty that may have been previously set but not canceled at a different extension. The maximum amount of DID number assignments that a DBS can have is 500. Multiple DID number assignments canbe assigned to any extension port, and/or the same DID number can be assigned to multiple extension ports. Each DID assignment uses one of the 500 that are available. Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com 53 Section 400 Issue 2 July FFl 1993 DBS Programming Instructi01~1 CPC-A / 3.0,CPC-B / 2.0 / 3.0 /4.0 c This is a cor&rmation program for the resetting of DID numher assignments that can be accomplished with the use of program number [FFl], 8#, l#. To not reset the assignments, enter: DID number DID number j?'Fll. 8#.2#.0# To reset all of the assignments, enter: ml), Resets program settings stored in SAM (Static Random Access Memory). The reset must be performed before upgrading from one software version to another. For example. if you are upsadirq from Version 3.00 toVersion4.00, you need to perform the reset. However, if you are upgradiq to a point release (4.10 to 4.11). you do not need to perform the reset. CkNo (retain settinfls1 l=Yes (clear settings) BW,2#, 1W DID&tingshavet&emaWlllycO~ ifthe DBS has a software version older than 3.00, that is being upgraded to version 3.00 or newer. Before this manual reco&gumtion can be done however. the DID reset program ([FFl]. 8#, l#), must be done. The maximum amount of DID number assignments that a DES can have is 500. Multiple DID number assignments can be assigned to any extension port, and/or the same DID number can he assigned to multiple extension ports. Each DID assignment uses one of the 500 that are available. Technical 54 Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com c. DBS Programming Instructions CPC-A / 3.0, CPC-B / 2.0 / 3.0 / 4.0 The purpose of this display is to make sure you want to reset the data Enter “0” or ” 1,” depending on whether you want to complete or cancel the reset. ::‘“‘~~~~~. ~~~ O=Do not reset l=Reset 1. If you enter a “1,” the following display appears: CONFmM 0: NO 1: YES 2. This command erases a.UTl and DID programming. Section 400 FFl issue 3 July 1993 Direct inward dialed numtws that have been dialed by a cakr need to be assigned to extension ports, so that the number dialed will ring on all extensions they are supposed to appear on. A DID number can be set to ring on muhiple extensions, or only one extension. To set DID number 4444 to ring on extension number 120, for example, enter: Wll, 8#, 3#, 4Q44#, 120# To set DID number 6358 to ring on extension number- 500, for example, -LT. enter: @WI], 8#,3#,6358#, 5oon To reset DID numbers that have been assigned to extensions to the default initialized value. Dress lFF1’. 8#. 3#, didWCXX#. lCONFl#. ION/OFF. Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com 55 Section 400 FFl Issue 2 July 1993 I Tl DBS Programming @iWuctions CPC-A / 3.0. CPC-B / 2.0 / 3.0 / 4.0 PROGRAMMZN cwcKsETTnvGs I G OPTlONS Allpcmmekm inthissectionreferbCPC-B, Vet-son4.00 or newer. The following information describes programming parameters for the Tl Interface. The descriptions of each parameter include alist of available options and the associated programming address. Default options are shown underlined. Tl SYSTEM SFXTINGS The Sync Card (installed on the WC-B) providesamethod ofsynchronizingtheDBS with the public network. This parameter determines the first clocking source for network synchronizmon. If the first source kils, the system will switch to the second source. The system will attempt to go back to the first source based on thevalue entered under the Network Re-sync Timer. The system considers a clock source to have failed when the slip rate error counter is exceededwithin a 24-hour period. In most cases, the 1st sync source is set to “1.” Idenmes the system size. Optlons M 4p 1 =DB!5 72 2=DBS 3=DBS must cabinet.) 96 40 be 4=DBS IS S=DBS must cabinet.) For changes to this parameter to take effect, the system must be powered down, then back up again. + DES the 40 slave + DBS supportrd.) 40 in 72 not 72 be + DEB the 72 slave tn 6=DE3s 96 + DBS 40 7=DL3S 96 + DEE 72 R=DL3S 96 + DEE 96 Cl-1 VI VT1 To apply changes to this parameter, power the system down, then back up. 56Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com Technical DBS Programming Inst~ctions WC-A / 3.0. CPC-B / 2.0 / 3.0 / 4.0 Determines the source of clocking for the second sync source. The system will attempt to switch from the second source back to the first source based on the value entered under “Network Re-sync Tfmer.” lfthe second source fails and the first source is not working, the system will switch to the third source.. ln most cases, a system with one Tl has the 2nd sync source set to “3.” Systems with two Tls normally have the 2nd sync source set to “2.” One of the three sync sources should be set to “3” (free run). A free-run setting is needed, so the DBS Tl can provide its own clocking if the network clock fails. Options Section 400 FFl Issue 3 July 1993 Deterrnines the source of clocking for the third sync source. The third sync source is used ifboth the first and second source fail. The system will attempt to switch from the third source back to the first source based on the value entered under “Network Re_._ sync Timer.” In most cases, a system with one Tl has the 3rd sync source set to “0.” Systems with two Tl s normally have the 3rd sync source set to “3.” One of the three sync sources should be set to “3” (free run). A free-run setting is needed, so the DBSTl can provide its own clocking if the network clock fails. O=None l=Tl of the master 2=Tl of the slave cabinet 3=Free run (internal cabinet clocking) For changes to this parameter to take effect, the system must be powered down, then back up. For changes to this paraxneter to take effect, the system must be powered down, then back up again. Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com 57 Section 400 FFl Issue 2 July 1993 WC-A DBS Programming Instnictions / 3.0, CPC-B / 2.0 / 3.0 / 4.0 I f lf one clock source falls, the system will switch to another clock source. The re-sync timer determines how often the system attempts to return to the original clock source. For example, if the first clock source (1st sync) f&, the system switches to the second source. However, the system will try to return to the fxst source based on the resync timer. Ifthesecondsourcefailsandthefirstsource continues to be out-of service, the system switches to the third source. Again, the resync timer determines how often the system will attempt to return to the first source. 3ptions Determines how long the DBS waits before sending a disconnect signal from the Tl to the CO. (II&e CO Disconnect Timer (FF2 (l64)# 18# (0-15#)] determines how long the system waits to receive a disconnect signal from the CO.) 3ptions o-15 (1) rralues 0= 15Oms 1=200ms 2=25Oms 3=3ooms O-25 O=lmmechatc the first clock (DBS returns tmmedlately.) 4=4ooms to !XiOOms I-24=hours (Determines how often the DBS attempts to return to the first clock) I f- 25=no reties (DBS attemDt to PO hack clock.1 does not to the tlrst 6= 1OOOms 7=15ooms 8=2oooms ( 9=25OOms I 10=3000ms 11=35OOms 12=Off (DES does not automatically send a disconnect signal.) When the system attempts to go back to the fI.rst clock source, existing calls will be disconnected. For changes to this pammeter the system must back up. Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com to take effect, be powered down, then ‘- Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com Sectfon Issue 400 FFl 1993 WC-A 2 July DBS Programming Instructions / 3.0, CPC-B / 2.0 / 3.0 / 4.0 / .. Determines how long the system waits before outpulsing dialed digits to the network. 3ptions o-15 Values O=lOO Ins 1=300 ms 2=500 Ins 3=700 ms Whenwink-start signaling is used, the DBS waits for a wink-start signal fi-om the CO when a user goes ofbok. Once the DBS receives a wink start, the DBS sends a CO dial tone to the extension. This timer determines how long the DBS waits for a wink signal once an extension goes ofbook. lptions o-15 Ialues 0=150 ms ms 1=250 In.5 6=1500 ms 2=5ooms 7=1700 ms 3=7!50 ms 8=2000 ms Jklooo 4=1000 ms 5=1200 ms 5=12!TJo Ins 60 Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com Technical 6=1500 rns 7=1750 Ins 8=2ooo ms 9=2!500 Ins 1o=sooo Ins 11=3500 ms 12-4Qoo ms 13=4500 ms 14=5ooo ms 15=5500 ms DBS Programming Instructions CPC-A / 3.0, CPC-B / 2.0 / 3.0 / 4.0 Section 400 FF, Issue 3 July 1993 Once anincomingcallseizes aT1 trunk+ this timer determines how long the DBS waits before recognizing the seizure as an incomingcall. This parameter only applies when E&M signaling isused. When the DBS generates a call over the Tl, answer supervision is provided to determine if the call is actually answered. This timer determines how long the oflhook signal Tom the called party must last before the DBS treats the oilhook signal as an answer. oplions o-8 v*es lo=..=.. ms I l=loo I ms I 12=200 ms I 3=6ooms c I5=70 7 ms 4=1ooo ms l5=2ooo ms I 12= 140 ms I l For changes to this parameter to take effect, the system must be powered down. then back up. Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com 61 Section 400 Issue 2 July FFl 1993 WC-A Aglare is a conflict between an incoming call and an outgoing call. When immediate-start signaling is used, this timer detennines how long the system searches for an incoming call before connecting a station user to a trunk channel. The timer begins when the station goes offhook. If this parameter is set to “0” (non glare), the DBS does not check for glare. Therefore, if a trunk call is coming into a station that is going oi3hook. the station does not ring but is connected to the incoming call automati* 3ptions o-15 iralues O=The DBS does not check for glare. DBS Ro@ammiq Instructions / 3.0, CPC-B / 2.0 / 3.0 / 4.0 Aglareisaconflictbetweenaninconringcall and an outgoing call. Whenwink-startsignalingis used, the timer determines how long the system.searches for an incoming call before connecting a station user to a trunk channel. The timer begins when the a wink is received. lf this parameter is set to 0 (non glare) and a trunk call is coming into a station that is going o@ook, the station does not ring but is connected to the incoming call automatim c Iptions ~ IO-15 Jalues ETlMdoesnotcheckforI I 1=20 ms 2=40 ms 3=60 ms I2=40 ms I 14=80 ms I 15=100 ms I I I 1 16=120 ms ~7=140 ms Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com I 11=250 I 12=300 ms I13=350 ms ms 14=400 ms IS=450 ms I I I DBS Programming WC-A section Instructions Issue / 3.0, CPC-B / 2.0 / 3.0 / 4.0 400 FFl 3 July1993 Adjusts the volume of connections made via Figure 2 shows the default values for the the Tl. In this parameter. the first “(l- 12)” most common Tl connections. represents the receiving circuit type. The second “l-12” represents the sending circuit type. “0-30” represents the pad numFire 2. Default pad values ber. The volume settings are controlled by (Tl #1 = master, T1#2 = slave) changing a pad number, which in turn changes the loss or gain of the connection. In most cases, the default pad settings do not need to be changed. If the volume level of a connection is unsatisfactory, include Tl #l SLT 16 -2 dB thereceivingandsendfngcircuittypes inthe T1#2 SLT 16 -2 ClB command, then adjust the volume by asK-TEL Tl #l 16 -2 ClEt signing a new pad number. Figure 1 shows the numbers used to identify each circuit type. 1Figure 1. Circuit-type Numbers CircuitTypes No. K-TEL 1 SLT 2 DATA# 3 Analog CO Trk 4 Tl Master 5 Tl Slave 6 OP-l-lON l* 7 OPTlON 2* 8 DTMF# 9 CONF (SCW 10 TONE1 (MFRlW 11 TONE2 (MFR2)# 12 K-TEL T1#2 16 -2 dF3 SLT Tl #l 16 -2 dB SLT T1#2 16 -2 dE3 1 Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com #Circuit Types 3 and 9-12 are reserved for future use. *Options 1 and 2 can be used to assign unique PAD levels to circuits that require special volume levels. For example, if an OPX station needs a higher volume level than other SLTs, the OPX station could be defined as an Option 1 circuit type. The following table lists the adjustments provided by each pad number. 63 Section 400 Issue 2 July FFl 1993 Figure Pad No. WC-A 3. Pad Nos. I Level I 0 dB +2 dB I . 14 +28 dB dB I 15 I +30 I . I 16 I -2 -4 from the master Tl to all SLTs is 16. You can also tell by Figure 2 that the default pad value for setting 16 is -2 dB. To raise the volume by 2 dB, you can change the pad value to 0. (As you can see fkom Figure 3, the dB level for value 0 isOdl3.) The following example shows the prorg required to change the value to .. I FF18##3#2#5#0# dB I dB I Circuit type number for SLTs (Figure 1). 5=Circuit type number for the Tl in the master cabinet (Figure 1). O=Pad number for 0 dB loss/gain (Figure 3). I I 29 30 I I DBS Programming Instructions / 3.0. CPC-B / 2.0 / 3.0 / 4.0 -28 dB -30 dB I I If calls to SLTs via a master Tl have low volume levels, the PAD level for connections fi-om the master Tl to all SLTs can be changed. By referring to Figure 2, you can see that the default pad setting for connections 64 Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com section 400 FF Insue3 July 1993 DBS Programming In.structiona CPC-A / 3.0, CPC-B / 2.0 / 3.0 / 4.0 thermore, the number of analog &unks that canbeusedisahvaysdecrementedinquantities of 8. For instance, if you’re installing a Tl in a DBS 96 and you only want to use 12 Tl channels, the logical: number of analog trunks thatwould be available is 20 (32 - 12 = 20). However, because the number of analog Specifies the trunk combinations used in trunks must be decremented in quantities of 8, the actual number of analog trunks the DBS. that can be used is 16: (32 total trunks - 16 (two 8-trunk increments) = 16.) For changes to this parameter to take effect, See Installation &rfion 3001 for a list of the system must be powered down, then possible Tl and analog trunk channel combinations. back up. o=Analoa only l=Tl and analog trunks For changes to this parameter to take effect, the system must be powered down, then back up. O-24 (0) Determines how many Tl channels are used. Though each Tl Interface provides 24 trunk channels, Tl trunks do not increase the overall trunk capadty of the DBS. Each Tl channel subtracts from the total number of analog trunks that can be installed. FurTechnical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com Section 400 Issue 2 July FFl 1993 WC-A DBS Ro@ammiqf Imtnactionn / 3.0, CF’GB / 2.0 / 3.0 / 4.0 l TZWlVKSIG-G i Selects the clear channel format used by the Tl. The clear chan.neI format must match what is offered by the CO. Selects the framing format used by the Tl . The framing format must match what is offered by the CO. &AIM1 @MI standsforaltematemarkinversion.) l=B8ZS (B8ZS stands for Binary 8-Zeroes Suppression. O=SF (Superti-ame, which is also known as D4. The superframe consists of 12 frames, with each frame incIuding 193 bits. Each For changes to this parameter to take effect, frame is separated by a fi-aming bit.) the system must be powered down, then l=ESF (Extended Super Frame. An extended super kame consists of 24 ti-ames, back up again. thereby doubling the length of the super fi-ame (SF)format. ESF also supports monitoring and maintenance capabiIities that are not available with the SF format.) For changes to this parameter to take effect, the system must be powered down, then back up. i 66 Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com Technical DBS Ro@ammhg I.nat~ctiox.u3 WC-A / 3.0. CPGB / 2.0 / 3.0 / 4.0 section 4OOFFl IssneBJdyl993 This parameter only applies to a DBS within a private network. kZ&XIllS. If the remote loopback parameter is turned on, the DBS can receive a loopback command from another DBS. Forexample,forDBS”A”toreceivealoopback O=Mode 1 vl stays in operation even if command i?om DBS ‘73,” this parameter errors are detected.) l=Mode 2 (II’1 shuts down if errors are must be turned on at DBS “A.” DBS 73” would initiate the loopback by entering the detected.) “Remote tiopback” command. Determines the way the system responds to For changes to this parameter to take effect, the system must be powered down, then O=No (llxe system does not respond to loopback si@Mls.) back up. l=Yes (Ihesystemdoesrespondtoloopback signals.) Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com 67 section 400 Issue 2 July FFl 1993 WC-A DBS Programming Instructions / 3.0, CPC-B / 2.0 / 3.0 / 4.0 In the current version of DES Tl, a “switchhook flash“ releases and resizes theT1 line. Determines whether the DES sends a yellow alarm signal to the CO. O=Releaseand reseize O=No l=Yes 68 Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com Technical DBS Programming Instructions CPC-A / 3.0. CPC-B / 2.0 / 3.0 / 4.0 Section 400 FF1 Issue 3 July1993 The default value for this parameter is determined by network spec&ations. it should not be changed. Determines how long a yellow alarm signal Lfared alarmoccurs. theCFALEDontheT1 must be on before the system detects a card lights. Also, if the ‘Bed Alm Relay’ yellow alarm. When a yellow alarm occurs, parameter is turned on, the alann relay on the YEL LED on the Tl card lights. Also, if the Tl MDF card closes. the ‘Yel Alm Relay’ parameter is turned on, the alarm relay on the Tl MDF card closes. 3ptions O-5 Values 0=4 >ptiOllS 1=6 o-15 o=oIIls t34ooms 2=8 orDmedhte1 3=10 1-30 945orm 2=100 ms 10=5OOnzS 3=1!50 ITS 11=5!5oms 4=200 nB 12=600ITlS 25=25oms (?+.?+.> %&xpg 13=65OIIlS 14=700 6=3oom!3 j:: I 7=350 I l-m I 15=75OmS Ins I For changes to this parameter to take effect, the system must be powered down, then For changes to this parameter to take effect, the system must be powered down. then back up. Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com ’ 69 Section 400 FFl Issue 2 July 1993 CPGA Determines how long the DBS tries to recover from a yellow alarm before it re-syncs the Tl trunk. Options lo-15 Values 1O=Oms (immediate) I8=80 ms I 1 DBS RolErpmmipg hdxuctions / 3.0, CPGB / 2.0 / 3.0 / 4.0 Detennineshowlonganoutoffixne(OOF), loss of signal. sync loss. 0rAiS signal must be on before the system generates an alarm. lfan OOF, sync loss, or AIS alaxm occurs, a corresponding LED on the Tl card lights. (Sync loss alarms light the SLIP LED.) ‘IhealarmrelayontheTlMDFcardwillalso closeifthe corresponding relay parameter is turned on. JElshls !%I0 ms 2=2oms lO=llOms 3=30 ms 11=120 ms 315 44oms Lb130 ms a=oms 8=mms s=50 ms 13=140 ms l=w) 9=25ooms 6=6oms 14=150 ms 2=5ahs 10=3000~ 7=70 ms 15=160 ms 3=7soms 11=35ooms 4=1ooOmS l2=4omlns s=l2soms l3=45ooms 6=15alms 14==mS 7=1750 ms l5=5sahns For changes to this parameter to take effect, the system must be powered down. then back up. For changes to this parameter to take effect, the system must be powered down. then back 70 UD. Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com Section400 DBS Programming Insl~~ctions WC-A / 3.0, CPC-B / 2.0 / 3.0 / 4.0 bsue 3 July FFl 1993 ERRORCOUVTERSMIRT1AIARM The following counters determine when FF alarm keys light. FF alarm keys light when an error counter exceedsthe spectied number within 24 hours. FF alarm keys can indicate the following types of alarms: Red alarms Determines how long the DBS tries to re- Loss of signal abmx3 cover from an out-of-frame (OOF), Loss of sync loss alarms Signal, Sync Loss, or AIS alarm before it Yellow alarms slip alarms resyncs the Tl trunk. Fl-arne loss alarms Options lo-15 values lo=o~ I 18=3cxIoms I 1=250 ms 9=4oooms 2=500 ms lO=SCCIO ms 13=7SOms 111=6OOOms 1 14=1OOOms ~12=7OOOms I I5=1500 ms I 13=8000 ms I 6=2000 ms 14=9000 ms 7=2500 ms lS=loooO ms For changes to this parameter to take effect, the system must be powered down, then hack up. Thealaxmkeyscanbeassignedtoanykey telephone. However, the keys onlywork on a non-attendant phone that has the programming authorization code (#98 9999) activated. With attendant phones, the keys work whether or not the programming authorization code is activati. Determines how many fi-ame losses occur beforeaFbmeLossAlarrnkeyislit. Thekeylightswhenthecountxxexceedsthe spedfied number within a 24hour period. 0-9CXM/24 hours Jm Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com 71 section 400 Issue 2 July FFl 1993 Determines how many slips occur befonz a Slip Loss Alarm key is lit. ‘Ihe key lights when the counter exceedsthe specified number within a 24-hour period. This parameter also determines the number of slips that can occur before the system switches to the next clock source. When the system switches to the next clock source, the slip en-or counter for the first clock source is reset. Slips are losses of data bits due to fixming errors. CPGA DBS Pro@amming Intstruction~ / 3.0, CPC-B / 2.0 / 3.0 / 4.0 Determines how many red alarms occw before a Red Alarm key is lit. The key lights when the counter exceedsthe specified number within a 24-hour period. O-9000/24 hours I90001 Technical 72 Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com DBS Programming Instructions WC-A / 3.0, CPC-B / 2.0 / 3.0 / 4.0 Section 400 FFl Issue 3 July 1993 Determines how many instances of signal Determines how many instances of sync loss occur before a Signal Loss Alarm key is 1ossoccurbeforeaSyncLmsAkmnkeyislit. lit. The keylightswhenthecounterexceedsthe The key lights when the counter exceeds the specified number within a 24hou.r period. specitM number within a 24-hour period. Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com 73 Section 400 Issue 2 July FFl 1993 WC-A DBS Ro#ammlqj / 3.0, CPGB Instn~ctions / 2.0 / 3.0 / 4.0 Determines how many yellow alarm indications occur before a Yellow Alarm key is lit. The key lights when the counter exceedsthe specified number within a 24-hour period. (Seeinstructions on programmingT1 alarm Determines whether the system closes the keys.) -alarmrelay&th&TlMDFcardinthee&nt of yellow alarms. like ah-m rday can be connected to an tztemalalaxmdevicesuchasabuzzer. The external alarm device must be purchased separate& it is noit provided with the DBS Tl. f- ‘~~ ~ O=OfT@he alarm relay does not close.) i 74 Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com Technical DBS Programming Instructions CPC-A / 3.0, CPC-B / 2.0 / 3.0 / 4.0 Determines whether the system closes the alarm relay on the Tl MDF card in the event of red alarms. The alarm relay can be connected to an extemalalarmdevicesuchasabuzzer. The external alarm device must be purchased separately; it is not provided with the DBS Tl. A red alarm indicates a loss of fi-ame @OF) or loss of signal has continued for over 2.5 seconds. O=OB (The alarm relay does not close: the alarm is not reported.) l=On (The alarm relay closes, so the alarm is reported.) Section 400 FFl Issue 3 July 1993 Determines whether the system closes the alarm relay on the T MDF card in the event of sync loss alalms. The akmn relay can be connected to an externalalanndevice suchas abuzzer. ‘Ihe external alarm device must be purchased separately; it is not provided with the DBS Tl. O=Off (the alarm relay does not close: the alann is not reported.) l=On (Ihe alarm relay closes, so the alarm is reported.) Sync-loss alarms result from clocking errors. Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com 75 Section 400 Issue 2 July FFl 1993 DBS Programming Instructions CPC-A / 3.0. CPC-B / 2.0 i 3.0 / 4.0 Determines whether the system closes the Determines whether the system closes the alannrelayontheT1MDFcardintheevent alannrelayontheT1 MDFcardin theevent of fi-ame loss alarms. of alarm indication signals. The alarm relay can be connected to an An alann indication signal is comprised of external alarm device such as a buzzer. The all l’s and is unfi-amed. external alarm device must be purchased The alarm relay can be connected to an separately; it is not provided with the DBS extemalalarmdevicesuchasabuzwr. The Tl. cxtemal alarm device must be purchased separateb it is not provided with the DBS Tl. O=Off CIhe alarm relay does not close: the alarm is not reported.) l=On me alarm relay closes, so the alarms is reported.) O=OB flhe alarm relay does not close; the alarm is not reported.) l=On me alarm relay closes, so the alarm is reported.) 76 Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com Technical DBS Programming Instructions WC-A / 3.0, CPC-B / 2.0 / 3.0 / 4.0 Section 400 FFI bsire 3 July 1993 Determines what trunk type each Tl channel emulates. Determines whether the Tl alarm relay is cleared (opened)automatically or manuaJly. If cleared automatically, the relay is opened approximately one second after the alarm o=LQop start condition ceases. l=Ground start 1 Ifcleared manually, the relay can be opened 2=Gmund start 2 by entering the Alarm Relay Clear code. 3=E&M To enter the Alarm Relay Clear code, first enter the programming authorization code (#98 9999). . For changes to this parameter to take effect, the system must be powered down, then back up. O=Auto l=Manual Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com Section 400 FFl Issue 2 July 1993 Deterrnines the type of trunk signaling that each Tl channel emulates. O=Loop start I=Ground start 1 2=Ground start 2 3=Ex!zM For changes to this parameter to take effect, the system must be powered down, then back up. DBS Programming Instruct.io~ CPC-A / 3.0, CPC-B / 2.0 / 3.0 / 4.0 Determines if DID and/or DNIS is provided for a trunk. DNIS is available only with Tl . If DID is selected, the system uses a DID Numbers Table, which supplies 500 DID numbers. If DNIS is selected, the system uses aDNISNumbersTable, which supplies 500 DNIS numbers. The DID NumbersTable canbe used for DID or DNIS. Therefore, ifall the numbers in the DNISNumbersTableareused, aT1 channel can be set to DID, and DIVE service can still be used. O=Not nrovided l=DID 2=DNIS 1. The DBSonlysupports 4-digit DID/DNIS numbers. 2. For changes to this parameter to take effect, the system must be powered down, then back up. 3. When the central oI3ce sends a DID/ DNIScalltotheDBS.itfi.rstrece.ivesawInk from the DEB before sending the digits. Once the wink is received, the central of&e should wait at least 200 ms before sending the digits. It is the installer’s responsibility to request the delay from the central office. i 78 Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com Technical section 400 FFl bsue 3 July 1993 DBS Programming Inst~ctions WC-A / 3.0, CPC-B / 2.0 / 3.0 / 4.0 Determines the signaling cbs channels on outgoing calls. used by T1 O=Immediate start l=Wink start 2=Dial-tone start ~~~@ggzpJg;:; i' ~ For changes to this parameter to take effect, the system must be powered down, then back up. Determines the signaling class used by Tl channels on incoming calls. O=Immediate start l=Wink start c?z!ym!J ..ij~~~ For changes to this parameter to take effect. the system must be powered down, then back up. Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com 79 Section 400 FFl Issue 2 July 1993 DBS Programming Instructions CPC-A / 3.0. CPC-B / 2.0 / 3.0 / 4.0 f Determines whether Tl channels are used The robbed bit setting determines lfAJ3CD as outgoing only, or bothway. signaling is used. ABCD signaling robs bits from the Tl channels and uses those bits to ..:“.$;, transmit signaling information. ~ O=Bothwav l=Outgoing only .:‘i~~~~~~ ~~~ cw3 --::~~ O=Off (ABCD signaling is not used.) l=On @BCD signaling is used.) ~~~ #@ggy$:: ~ For changes to this parameter to take effect, the system must be powered down, then For changes to this parameterto take effect, back up. the system must be powered down, then back up. 80 Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com f-- DBS Programming Instn~ctions WC-A / 3.0, CPC-B / 2.0 / 3.0 / 4.0 Section 400 FFl Issue 3 July 1993 Determines whether the system expects DP ‘hnsmits dial tone hm the Tl channel to or DTMF digits for incoming DID or DNIS another DBS within a private network. calls. If YXIVIF” is selected, the DBS must be equipped with an MFR card. c- ) Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com 81 Section 400 FFl Issue 2 July 1993 WC-A DBS Programming Instructions / 3.0, CPC-B / 2.0 / 3.0 / 4.0 lbrmn.its busy tone from theT1 channel to lhnsmits dial tone from the Tl channel to DBS stations. another DBS within a private network. o=off l=On o=m l=On c 82 Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com Technical DBS Programming Instructiona WC-A / 3.0, CPC-B / 2.0 / 3.0 / 4.0 Transmits ringback tone f?om theT1 channel to the central office or another DBS within a private network. o=off section 400 FFl Issut% 3 July 1993 Associates a dialed number with a station. Associatesafour-digitdialednumberwitha station number. DNIS is available onlywith theT1 Interface. l=On Stations are numbered using one of two patterns: 10-69 or 100-699. Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com 83 Section 400 Issue 3 July FF2 1993 WC-A DBS Programming Instructions / 3.0. CPC-B / 2.0 / 3.0 / 4.0 To set a central o&e line in service, or to remove it from service, this option must be used. To set a central office line for touch-tone or pulse dialing. (10 pulses per second), this option must be used. To set any central office line in service. enter: To set any central office line for touch tone dialing, enter: ,lDBSl.ine~ort numbed#.l#.OW 1. rDBs Iine Dolt mmbex~#. To remove any central ofllce line from service, enter: To set any centml o&e dialing, enter: [FF2l,@BSlineportnumber)#,1#,1# CPllrZ),@BSlineportnumber)#,2#, 2#. on line for pulse l# / A steady, red LED on any FF key programmed as a line key, indicates an out-of-service line. If a central office line is removed from service, a new caller to that line will hear a ring, but the DBS user will never be aware of the caller because ring assignments for the line will not function. If a central oflice line port is used for a door-box adapter sensor, set the port for pulse dialing. If the central office line port is designated as a ground start line (FF2]-(1-64-21)1 it is imperative that the 48 volt external power supply be properly connected to the terminals on the DBS backplane. Misconnection of this power supply can result in serious damage to the DBS main cabinet. See DBS In&all&on Instructions manual (section 300). and Technote 1 (March 1991). for further information. The j-lash and redial features will not operate if a line has been designated as “ground start*. See technote 13 (March 1992) for further information. Technical 84 Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com DBS Programming CPC-A / 3.0 WC-B Instructions / 2.0 / 3.0 / 4.0 Section 400 FF2 Issue 3 July 1993 I / \ \ To place a central office line in a group so that it can be one of many that can be automatically chosen for outbound dialing, this option must be used. When dialing a “9” from an SLT or digital extension, or pressing an FF key that is set as a pooled trunk key, any available line in the group will be accessed. To not include a central office line to be a member of the “9” access group, enter: .- .:\ ,i ~),@BSIlneportnumber)#,3#,0# To place a central office line in a group so that it can be one of many that can be automatically chosen for outbound dialing, this option must be used. When dialing an “81, 82.83, 84, 85 or 86” from ‘an SLT or digital extension. or pressing an FF key that is set as a multiple central office (MCO) line key, any available line in the group wilI be accessed. To set any central office line to be a member of the “81” access group, enter:-: ~],@BSIlneportnumber)#,4#,1# To set any central office line to be ‘a member ofthe “9” access group, enter: .IDBSline~ort -To ‘set- any central office line to be a member of the ?82” access group, enter: number)#.3#.1# n. @gJgg’i :..-.i.,.i,.,., ...e Set FFl option “LCR Access” for “Pooled Trunk Access” cdl. If this option is set for “LCRAccess”, central o&e line selection will default to pooled central office line access group 9, if all lines that could be used for “ICR Access” are busy. The line selection is made from the highest line number in the group, to the lowest line number in the group. To set any central office line to be a member of the 333” access group, enter: To set any central office line to be a member of the “84” access group, enter: To set any central office line to be a member of the “85” access group. enter: @FZJ,(DBSlineport Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com number)#,8#,1# 85 Section 400 Issue 3 July FF2 1993 DBS Programxdq WC-A To set any central office line to be a member of the “86” access group, enter: [eez], (DBS line port number)#, Ix~tructiona / 3.0, CPC-B / 2.0 / 3.0 / 4.0 Each central of&e line port must be identified as a regular central o!IIce line, or PBX line. 9#, l# To remove any central office line &om any access group (81 through 86), enter: To set the central of&e line type to central offke, enter: 1.KBSl.ineportnumber)#. 1. (DBS line Mlrt numberld. 1OW. l# (49lW, 06 The same trunks may appear in more than one line access group and include access group 9. The line selection in a particular group is madef+omthehighestavailablelinenumber to the lowest availableline number. To set the central of&e line type to PBX, enter: Toll restriction settings can be affected by this setting. lf a central o&e line port is used for a door-box adapter sensor, set the port for pulse dialing. Ifthe central office line port is designated as a ground start line [FF2]-21#. it is imperative that the 48 volt external power supply be properly connected to the terminals on the DBS backplane. of this power nnection aznmsuZtinsedusdamagetothe DBsmainctlbheL supply SeeDBSlnstallation Instructions manual (section 300). and Technote 1 (March 1991). for further i.nformation. Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com DBS Programming Inst.ructions WC-A / 3.0 CPC-B / 2.0 / 3.0 / 4.0 Section 400 FF2 Issue 3 July 1993 i To set acentral officeIine(s)to automaticaRy provide DiSAtone upon connection with an inbound cakr. this option must be set To set any central office line to provide a DISA tone when connected to a new inbound caller, enter: ~],@BSlinep0rtnumher)#, ll#, l# To ‘setany central of& I&e so that it does not provide a DISA tone when connected to a new inbound caller, enter: l.lDBSline~ortnumberM. ll#.O# To set automatic DISA start and end times, see [FIG?] 19#. and 20# program addresses, and the DISA code program address at [FFl], 6#. Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com Any extension can be set with a private centml ofIke line(s). A number of private lines can belong to one extension, but the same private line cannot be set on multiple extensions. To set extension port 15 for central office Iine 12 to be a private central of&e I.i.ne(s), enter: pF2], lS#, 12#, 12# To reset anv extension to the default initialized ~rh&e he value. Dress IFI%?L @BS line oort number)#. 12#. ICONFZ, JON/OFl?l. Anincom.ingcalIonaprivateIinewiIlonIy ring on one extension. Once the private line option is set, other. extensions cannot make outbound calls or receive inbound caIls on that line. Ifthe private Iine setting is disabled, caIIs cannot be made or received on that line(s) without manualIy reprogrammingthe toil restriction options of an extension(s) to which the line should now appear. In DBS instaIlations using the WC-A card, the highest extension port number that can be used is 72. 87 Section 400 FF2 Issue 3 July 1993 WC-A To set an automatic pause during dialing on a central of&e line defined as PBX this option must be used. To set the automatic pause on line 15 for example, (once line 15 is defined as a PBX). enter: pm. lfthis option is not set, the dialed number is outpulsed according to the system dial pause time. SW. 13w. 19 To disable the automatic pause on line 12 for example. (once line 12 is defI.txd as a PBX), enter: pF2], DBS Programming Instructions / 3.0, CPC-B / 2.0 / 3.0 / 4.0 To increase the duration of the MMF signal when making an outbound call, use this feature. 128, 136, ow c To set the on/off duration of an outbound IXMF signal to 75 ms. on and sd’ms.‘tAT. enter: See [FFl], 3.# 12# program option, for the timer used for this pause. 1.nlBSliDeDortllDmber~#. 15#.1# To set the on,!off duration of an outbound M’MF signal to 125 ms. on and 125 ms. off. enter: To define whether dialed digits will be outpulsed after dial tone has been detected, or not, this option is used. To outpulse dialed digits only after dial tone is detected, enter: 1,fDB!3liDeDOrtnumber~u. PW2],(DBSlineportnumber)#, To set the on/off duration of an outbound MMF signal to 250 111s.on and 250 ms. off, enter: lFF2], (DBSlineportnumber)#, 141y.on To outpulse dialed digits according to the system dial pause timer, enter: fFF2],@ESlineportnumber)#, 15#,2# 14#, 111 Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com 88 15#, 3W . DBS Programming WC-A / 3.0 WC-B Section 400 FF2 Issue 3 July 1993 Instructions / 2.0 / 3.0 / 4.0 To allow a central ofike line(s) to be able to be used in an unsupervised conference call, this feature is used. The ring pattem of each central oflice line can be set in one of nine patterns to provide easy recognition of different lines. To disable line 22, for (xample, so that it cannot be used in aline to line conference, enter: JFKBl. 22#. 16W. OW To set line 22 to be able to be used as one of the lines in a line to he conference. enter:. c ‘> m], 22W. 16#, l# See [FF3], 13# program address to start a conference call. A conferenced call will be disconnected if the call go& beyond the time set in unsupervised conference timer. Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com - I 1# I I 2#I I YI I 4#I 3on/loff 2on/2off MI lon/3off 1 I 6# I 5 I 1 ?I# OKl/.5Off 5 on I.5 off 1.5onf2J I Off I lon/lon I 8# I 5 onl3.5off I 1 on/2off I 9# I lon/7off I There is no change in the ring pattern for transferred calls. 89 DBS Programming Instructions CPC-A / 3.0, CPC-B / 2.0 / 3.0 / 4.0 Section 400 FF2 Issue 3 July 1993 WhenaazntmIoi3keIinecaIIisdisconnected, theaxdralofficeSendSadiScoMectSignal. TheDESneedstoint.erpretaIIvaIidsi@aIs, so that the central office line can be disco~ected fbm it This feature provides this function. I . -Ins I zQ5oms. I I l# I >5OIllS I 2# I >loOlllS I 1o#I >5OORlSI I 3ff I >15oms 9350 I7# 235oms 1 14 1 I15# 11% I 1 >75oms ms I / Any centraI of&e Iine that is set as a DISA line, can be set to start DISAoperation at a speciBed time. To set a central of&e I.ine that has DISA capability to start DISA operation at a certain time, enter: FW, @BS tie HHMBM. port number)#, 19#, To reset DISA start time czmbiIitv to the default initiakedvalue. mess lFF21.(DB!3 mrt numberl#, 19#. ICONFl. ION/ The start time is set in a 24hour format without punctuation or a space between the hour and minute. 90 Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com Technical f- DBS Programming Inst~ctione WC-A / 2.0 / 3.0 / 4.0 / 3.0 WC-B AI-IYcentral oflke line that is set as a DISA line. can be set to stop DISA operation at a speclfied time. Section4OOFF2 3JulJr 1993 hue Determines whether the trunk circuit is ananaIogloopstart, analogground start, analog DID, or Tl. To set a central oflEe Iine that has DISA capability to stop DISA operation at a certain time, enter: o=bOD fFF2], (DBS line port number)#, 20#, HH.MM#. ,f “\ \ To reset DISA ston time canabiI.itv to the default i.nitializedvaIue. Dress IFF21.(DF3S rmrt numberlt 20##. lCONFl. iON/ %I. Start l=Ground start 2=DID 3=Tl For changes to this parameter to take eBect,thesystemmustbepowereddown, then back up. ‘Ihe stop time is set in a 24-hour format without a space between the hour and minute. Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com 91 Section 400 Issue 3 July FF2 1993 WC-A Any central office line position in the DBS can be set as either a loop-start or ground-start circuit. To set central office line position 3, for example, as a loop start line, enter: ml. SeeDBS installation Instructions manual (section 300). and Technote 1 (March 199 1). for further information. The j7mh and mdiaf features will not operate if a line has been designated as ground start”. See technote 13 (March 1992) for further tiormalion. : 3#.21#.0# To set central o&e line position 7. for example, as a ground start line, enter: pF2],7#,21#, DBS Rogramming Instructions / 3.0, CPC-B / 2.0 / 3.0 / 4.0 l# Ground. start line capability is available only with CFC-B configurations. lfaground-starttrunk is enabled, FFl], 3#. %I##and 21# progmm addressesmust beset Trunk card VB 43531 is also required. The DBS must be turned off, then turned on to set any change that is made in this program option. lf a central of&e line port is used for a door-box adapter sensor, set the port for pulse dialing. If the central of3ce line port is designated as a ground start line in this program address, it is imperative that the 48 volt external power supply be properly connected to the terminals on the DBS backplane. Miinnection of this power suppZy can result in serious damage to the DBS main cabinet. Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com DBS Programming CPC-A / 3.0 WC-B Instructions / 2.0 / 3.0 / 4.0 AnycentmlofficelinepositionintheDBScan be set as either aloop-start, ground-start or DIDcimuit..Loopstartlinesarethemost common @peof centml office line. Ground start lines pi&on-n similaj, except they provide the” most reliable connection between the Central office and DBS, in terms of positive disconnect signals and no possibility of line crashes or ‘glare”. DiIrctInwaKlDiaJinglin~arebeneficialin that the centml oilice can place multiple inbound calls,with different numbers, over thesamecircuit.Also, thesenumberscan be .programmed to appear on multiple DBS extensions. DID circuts can only be used for inbound calls. To set central office line position 3, for example, as a loop start line. enter: JFlm 3#.21#.0# Section 400 FF2 Issue 3 July 1993 If a ground start line(s) is enabled. [FFl] 3#. 20# & 21# adresses must be set. When a ground start card is in use, the ports on that card can be configured as either ground or loop start lines. Trunk card VB 43531 is also required. ‘Ihe DBS must be turned off. then turned on to set any change that is made in this program option. If a central office line p0i-t is used for a door-box adapter sensor, set the port for pulse dialing. Ifthecentxalofficeliieportis~iii&akdas a ground start line in this program address, it is imperative that the 48 volt external power supply be properly .connected to the terminals on the -. DBS backplane. IfDIDis chosen. checkthe [FE!] 22#, 23#. 24# & 25# adresses. DID circuits involve the use of a dedicated DID card. To set central office line position 7, for example, as a ground start Iine, enter: pT2],7#,21#, I# To set central office line position 14, for example, as a Direct Inward Dial line, enter: p=m]*14#,21#,2# nnection of this pozoer supply am result in serious damage to the DBS main cabinet. SeeDBS Installation Instructions manual (section 300). and Technote 1 (March 199 1). for fixther information. ‘The J&I and red&I features will not operate if a line has been designated as “ground start”. See technote 13 (March 1992) for further information. Ground start line capability is available only with WC-B configurations. Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com 93 Section 400 FF2 Issue 3 July 1993 WC-A After connecting with a Central office, the DBS will wait 65 milliseconds before accepting the digits of a dialed number, or can be set to wait for a “wink” signal from a central office before accepting the digits of a dialed number. If “wink” signalling is used for the operation of Direct Inward Dialing line, a timer is required to be set. This timer sets the maximum time the DBS will wait before accepting the dialed digits from the central office. numbed%, To set the DID line to wait for the central office wink signal before accepting the dialed number f&m the central of.Ilce, enter: 14oms.~ lw 3ooms. l# 16OmS 9# 32om 2# 18OmS lo# 34oms. 26oms. I 14# I 42orIK Id 7# FW, PBS 22#, l# . ...^-me..y llun3 .~. To set the DID line to immediately accept the dialed number Tom the central oflice. enter: . CDBS DID line sort 22w. on DBS Ro@ammin~ Ins~ctions / 3.0, CPC-B / 2.0 / 3.0 / 4.0 DID line port number)%, 94 Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com Technical 28oms 44oms I DBS Programming Section400 FF2 Issue 3July1993 Instructions CPC-A / 3.0 WC-B / 2.0 / 3.0 / 4.0 Once the central office starts to send the dialed digits to the DBS over a DID line, it is necessary to be able to disconnect the line in the case of a transmission disruption.-The maximum amount of time that is allowed for the transmission of the digits is set with this feature. Tinle Time o# No Time Out 8# I l# I 15 seconds I w L Oncethedigitsbegintobeoutpulsedii-om thecentralofEiceonaDIDline,itisnecessary to define the maximum allowable time between digits. This -feature sets the maximum allowable time between the outpulsing of digits from the central office, before a central office time out is assumed. 22Second.5 I 23Second.s 2# 16Seconds lo# 24 Seconds 3# 17Seconds ll# 25 Seconds 48 18 Seconds 12# 26SecorKis S# 19 Seconds 13# 27Seconds 6# 20 Seconds 14# 28Seconds 7# 21Seconds 1% 29Secods I Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com 95 Section 400 Issue 3 July FF2 1993 WC-A Assigns a port class to each trunk port that will access the Tl. Port classes are used to assign pad levels to connections made via the Tl. (Pad levels control volume.) Figure 1shows circuit-typenumbers. Circuit Apes 4-6 are used to assign port classes to tlunks. Figure 1. Circuit-type circuit Types Numbers No. K-TEL 1 SLT 2 DATA# 3 Analog CO Trk 4 Tl Master 5 Tl Slave 6 OPTION l* 7 OPTION 2* 8 DTMF# CONF TONE1 9 (SCC)# (MFRl)# TONE2 (MFR2)# 10 11 12 DBS Programming Instructions / 3.0, CPC-B / 2.0 / 3.0 / 4.0 DBS trunks are assigned a default circuit type. based on whether they are analog or Tl. The circuit type is used with digital pad settings to determine the loss/gain settings for connections to the Tl (See ‘Digital Pad Setting.“). The Tl Port Class parameter is provided in case a specific trunk or group of trunks needs a unique pad level. For example, aT1 in a slave cabinet may be assigned as a ‘circuit type 6.” However, the circuit type for the Tl bunk port could be changed to 8 (Option 2). Once the port number is changed to circuit type 8, the pad levels for circuit type 8 could be changed to provide the correct volume setting. Circuit types are also provided for station ports. See Figure 1 for a definition of circuit types. This programming parameter allows youtoassigncircuittypes l-12toa trunk port. However, the default circuit type for a trunk port should only be changed to circuit type 7 or 8 (Options 1 or 2). Technical 96 Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com c DBS Romanming Instructions WC-A / 3.0 CPC-B / 2.0 / 3.0 / 4.0 Section 400 FF3 Issue 3 July 1993 3-3 EXTENSION PROGRAM SETTINGS The choice of 2-digit or 3-digit extension numbers are assigned in this feature. To set extension port 3 to extension number 333, for example, enter: The default DBS extension numbers are 1OOatpor-t 1,101 atport2.102atport3, _ etc. Extension 100 cannot be assigned to a different port. pF3], 3#, I#, 333w To set extension port 4 to extension number 222, for example, enter: FF31,4#, ,’ i I#, 222% To clear a DBS extension nor-t number, press lFF31. (DBS extension nort number)#, l#. lCONF1. If extension 10 1 or 11 is deleted, the alternate attendant is canceled. __. ClearingtheextensionportnumberDOES NOT retrun it to its default value. Once an extension port number is cleared. the port is inoperative until an extension number is reassigned to it. &&)$gⅈ; Cl> 3-digit extension numbers must be used with 60 or more extensions. See the [FFl], 12# program address to check the digit length that has been set in the DBS . If an alternate attendant position is set, the extension numbers are as follows: Attendant telephone 1: Extension 100 or 10. Attendant telephone 2: Extension 101 or 11. Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com 97 Section4OOFF3 Issue 3July1993 Some DBS extension ports are automatically configured as to the type of equipment, when the hardware is physically installed on the port. Terminal type designations are assigned to extension hardware as follows: l#: Single-line telephone devices will automaticallyconfiguretheextensionport 28: 16 key telephone devices will automatically configure the extension port 3#: 22 key telephone devices will automaticallyconQuretheextensionport 48: 34 key telephone devices will automaticallyconfQuretheextensionport 58: Future option 6W: Future option 7W: EM/24 device will automatically configure on the extension port 8W: OPX pulse device needs to be manually configured on the extension pod 9W: OPX touch tone’ device needs to be manually configured on the extension Poe lO#: Voice mail (non proprietary) devices that are corrected to an analog extension port need to be manually configured on the extension port ll#:DSSl (forextension lOOor 10)needs to be manually configured on the extension port 12#: DSS2 (for extension lOOor 10)needs to be manually configured on the extension port 13W:DSS3 (for extension 10 1or 11) needs to be manually configured on the extension port DBS Rogramming lnstn~ctions CPGA/ 3.0, WC-B /;r.O / 3.0 /4.0 14#: DSS4 (for extension 10 1 or 11)needs to be manually configured on the extension port 15#: Voice mail (non proprietary with OPX) needs to be manually configured on the extension port 168 to lQ#: DSS consoles l-4 need to be manually confIgured on the extension port.. The Attendant feature package is available with the use of CPC-B, ver. 2.00 or newer, as a special EPROM set. 206: Future option 21W to 286: Proprietary ACD channels willautomaticaUy configure the extension PO* 29U: Future option 39U: Futureoption . 31# to 38#: Proprietary Automated Attendant channels will automatically co*m the extension ports 396 to 46#: Proprietary Voice Mail channels will automatically configure the extension ports I lfDSS1istobeinstalledonextensionport 2, for example, enter: pF3].2#,2#,11# ‘lhedefaultinitia&edvalueofaoarticular extension nor-t is based on the tvne of extension card that is installed in the DBS cabinet. After manually setting types 1 l- 14, or 16- 19, disconnect the modularjacks from the devices and then reconnect them. Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com ’ : DBS Programming I.nstructionf~ CPGA/ 3.0 CPGB / 2.0 / 3.0 / 4.0 Some DBS extension ports are automatically configured as to the type of when the hardware is equipment, physically installed on the port. Terminal type designations are assigned to extension hardware as follows: OW:No assignment l#: Single-line telephone devices will automaticallyconfiguretheextensionport 2#: 16 key telephone devices will automaticallyconfrgurethe extensionport 3#: 22 key telephone devices will automatically configure the extension port 4C: 34 key telephone devices will automaticallycotiguretheextensionport 5#: Future option 6W: Digital SLT telephone 7W: EM/24 device will automatically configure the extension port SW: OPX pulse device needs to be manually configured on the extension pod 9#: OPX touch tone device needs to be manually confIgured on the extension PO* lO#: Voice mail (non proprietary) devices that are connected to an analog extension port need to be manually configured on the extension port 11%: DSS 1 (for extension 100 or 10)needs to be manually configured on the extension port 12#: DSS2 (for extension 1OOor 10)needs to be manually configured on the extension port Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com Section4OOFF3 Issue 3July1993 13d: DSS3 (for extension 10 1or 11)needs to be manually configured on the &ension port 14W:DSS4 (for extension 10 1or 11)needs to be manually configured on the &ension port SW: Voice mail (non- proprietary with OPX) needs to be manually configured on the extension port 16# to-19%: DSS consoles l-4 need to be manually configured on the extension port. The Attendant feature package is available with the use of WC-B, ver. 2.00 or newer, as a special EPROM set. lfDSS 1 is tobeinstalledonextensionport 2, for example, enter-z W],2#, 2#, 11w The default initializedvalue of anariicular extension nort is based on the tyne of extension card that is installed in the DBS cabinet. Aftermanuallysettingtypes 11-14, or 1619, disconnect the modular jacks from the devices and then reconnect #em. 99 Scction4-OOFF3 DBSRo@ammin~Ins~ctions CF'GA/ 3.0, CPGB /2.0 / 3.0 / 4.0 Issue3JulylS93 Define the EM/24 extension module hardware port number, then assign an extension port number that will be used with it. The first program entry relates to the EM/24 port number, the second program entry refers to the extension port that the EM/24 works with. To set a po& for the EM/24 to work with extension port 30, for example, enter: pF3], 55#, 31c;3ow To reset the use of an EM/24 on anv extension sort to the default initialized value. Dress (FF31. (DBS extension DOI% number). 3#. lCONF1. ION/OFF1 a. set the port that the EM/24 is on [FF3], (l- 144)#, 2#. b. Reset the EM/24 by unplugging it and reconnecting it. c. Proceed with key programming [FF5], (l-144)#, (l-24)#. via When programming an EM/24 with CPC-B software versions newer than 2.11. this programming order is not required. SeeTechnote 15 (August 1992) for complete information. After manually reprogramming an EM/24 when any version of CPC software is used, disconnect the modular jack from the device and then reconnect it. When a change to the default key assignments is required on an EM/24, and CPC-B 2.0X series software prior to version 2.05 is being used, the program procedure must be done in the following order: 100 Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com Technical DBS Programming Inst~~ctlons CPGA / 3.0 CF’C-B / 2.0 / 3.0 / 4.0 If an extension is set for Least Cost Routing, the user must dial “9”. or press an FF key that is set for the LCR h&ion, in order to gain access to a central office line. To set an extension port so that the dialing of a “9”. or the necessity to press an LCR key is not needed. enter: [FF3], (DBS eit&on 46, on Section 400 FF3 Issue 3 July 1993 DBS extensions can be set so that central office-line calls can only be made after entering an account code. “I. To set an extension so that an account code is not needed to make a central office line call, enter: 1. IDBS extension sort number)%, 5#.0# port number)#, Tosetanextensionportsothatthedialing of a “9”. or the necessity to press an LCR key is needed, enter: . To set an extension so that an account codeis neededto make a central of&e line call, enter: WI. @BS extension port number)#, 5#, I# 1, lDBs extension sort numb&#, 4#.1# Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com 101 Scction4OOFF3 Issue3 July1993 DBS I’m@ammiq DBS extensions can be set so that central office-line calls can only be made after entering a forced account code that is verified. Verification is enabled or disabled on an extension basis. To set an extension so that a verified forced account code is not needed to make a central of&e line call, enter: 1. lDB6 exte!nsion Iustructions CF'GA/ 3.0, CPGB /2.0 / 3.0 / 4.0 DOIt numberI%, 5#. on To set an extension so that a verified forced account code is needed to make a central office line call, enter: A 4-digit lockout code can be set on an extension to prevent unauthorized people from making central office line calls from the extension. To set extension 100, with lockout code 452 1, for example, enter: PF3],11y,6#,4521# To reset anreviouslvlocked out extension to the default inttialtzed value. DRSS lFF3l IDBS extension sort number)#. 6#, jCONFi. lON/OFFI, D31, @Bs extension port number)#, 5#, 1# WC-B versions 3.00 and newer, do not have the forced account code capability of earlier versions. All forced account codes have to be verified. The use of non forced, non verified account codes is still an option if stringent access to Central Office lines is not required. 102 Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com DBS Pro@ammh~ I.nstructions CPGA/ 3.0 CPGB / 2.0 / 3.0 / 4.0 To be notified by a tone. when a new central o&e line call has anived at an extension that is currently engaged in a conversation, this option must be set. To disable extension 100, for example. for off hook signaling, enter: ml, ,' \ ./' Section 400 FF3 Issue 3 July 1993 To send a tone from acaJling extension to an extension that is in use, this option must be set. A tone is not sent however, when off hookvoice announce is enabled. ln the case of OHVA being used, the calling party to an extension in use can verbally override the existing conversation. I#* 7#,0# To enable extension 100, for example, for off hook signaling, enter: To disable the call waiting notitication tone or the OHVA capability on extension 100, for example, enter: JFF3L I.#. 7#. l# pFe31. 1#,8#,0# To reset anv extension DORIS to the default initialized value, Dress IFF31. uort.#. 7#, conf#. ION/OFFl. To enable the callwaitingnot&alion tone or the OHVA capability on extension 100. for example, enter: pm. This tone will not be sent during a conference call, while the called extension is on hold, or during a &l on m central office line for which there is no kne key on the telephone. The off-hook signal volume and the off-hook signal pattern are separate settings. See program addresses [FF3], 15#, & lf3. When an off-hook tone is enabled on an extension. the extension will be excluded Tom any hunt group setting that may be enabled for it. I#. 8#. l# The call waiting noti&ation tone cannot be sent to an extension set with an absence message, or that is on hold, or that is receiving another call or that is involved in a conference call. IfaVoiceAnnoun~ Unit (modelVB-43708) is co~ected to the DEB off hook signalkng @ES], (l-144)#, 7#, l#) must be enabledon all&ensions.SeeTecbnote 14(March 1992) for complete tiormation. Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com 103 Section DB3RogmmmhnInstructions WC-A / 3.0, CPGB /2-O / 3.0 / 4.0 400 FF3 Issue3July1993 To be able to “barge into” an extension that is currently in use from another extension, this option must be enabled on the baruinq extension. To allow an extension to be able to be “barged into” from another extension, this option must be enabled on the barged extension. To disable the use of the busy override option from extension 100, for example, enter: To disable extension 101, for example, from being barged into by another extension enter: plea. fFF3],2#,10#,0# l#. 9#,0# To enable the use of the busy override option from extension 100, for example. enter: To enable extension 101, for example, to be able to be barged into by another extension enter: pF31, lW, 9#, l# jFF31.2#.10#:1# The busy override option cannot be disabled on the attendant telephones in all WC-A software versions, and CPC-B softwareversi0nsearlierthanversi0n2.00. The override tone can be set to sound during an ongoing central office call, to indicate a new call arrival. The busy override option can be disabled on the attendant telephones in CPC-B software. newer than ver. 2.00 Busy override is not possible to an extension: that is not set to accept it, or is involved in a conference call. To be able to override a busy extension, the calling extension must be in the same page group. Page group 00 is not included in this exception. 104 Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com Technical l DBS Pro@ammin~ Instmctions CPCA / 3.0 CPGB / 2.0 / 3.0 / 4.0 Section 400 FF3 Issue 3 July 1993 Access to an available central office line assigned to the FFl key can be automatic by picking up the receiver. If the FFl key is a pooled trunk key, an available central office line is accessed in numerical order from the highest line number assigned to the key, to the lowest. Picking up the receiver at extension connects the central office line call, hold transferred call, if this enabled. .. To disable auto pickup at 100. for example, enter: a ringing incoming recall, or option is extension p3],1#,12%,0# To disable prime line pickup extension 100, for example, enter: pF31. on To enable auto pickup at extension 100. for example, enter: l#. ll#.O# @F31. l#. lb. To enable prime line pickup extension 100, for example, enter: l# on fm3],1#,11#,1# Intercom calls cannot be made with this option enabled, unless an intercom call key is assigned to another FF key. Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com 105 Section 400 FF3 Issue3 July1993 DBS~ogmumiq~ Instructiona WC-A / 3.0. CPC-B /2.0 /-3.0 / 4.0 c To enable a DBS user to initiate a three party conference between 2 central office lines and his extension, this option must be set. Once the conference is initialized, the DBS msion user can drop out of the callbypmssingeitherofthecentralofficeline keysusedtocalltheoth~parties. To disable extension 100, for example, to not be able to initiate a three party conference, enter: mm 1#.13#.0# Any extension can be removed from the SMDR report, so that call activity from that port will not be recorded. To not include extension 100. for example, in the SMDR report, enter: ml, lW, 14#, ow To include extension 100, for example, in the SMDR report, enter: ml. I#. 14#. l# To enable extension 100, for example to be abletoWiateathreepartyconfen3rce,enten pF31, 1n,131Y, l# TheDBSusercanreentertheconferenceby pressing either of the two centml office line keys used to initiate the conferenaz. The conferencewillautornaticallyexpireafterthe period of time set in the Unsupervised conference l7me.r. set by the Wl], 3#, 1l# address. Seeauto pause for PBX line address (FF2], 13#. Auto pause cannot be used ifthe mnfmce feature is desiredwhen the DBS isusedbehindaPBX Check the SMDR start timer feature found at program address [FFl], 2#, l#, 2#. Communication program options that need to be checked when this option is set include all options found under [FFl], 2#, 2#, l-lO#. I CPC-B software version 2.00 should be upgraded to version 2.05 to eliminate two intermittent potential SMDR deficiencies in recording Aeld codes. See Technotes 8 & 12 (March 1992). for complete information. The Central Office line program for conferencing, [FF2], 16# must also be set when conferences are allowed. 106 Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com DBS Ro@ammin~ Instructions CPGA / 3.0 CPGB / 2.0 / 3.0 / 4.0 Off-hook signaling volume can be set to either of four different levels. To set the off hook signal volume to the minimum level on extension 100, for example, enter: Section 400 FF3 Issue 3 July 1993 When off hook signaling is set on an extension, the tone pattern can be sent continuously or only once. To send a continuous tone pattern for an off hook signal to extension 100, for example, enter: wF3], 19, 15#, l# LFF31. 1#.16#.0# To set the off hook signal volume to the next level on extension 100. for example, enter: To send a single tone pattern for an off hook signal to extension 100, for example, enter: jFF31. l#. 15#.2# lep3], l#, 166. 1W To set the off hook signal volume to the third level on extension 100, for example, enter: (pLIp3], lW, 15#,3# To set the off hook signal volume to the maximum level on extension 100, foi example, enter: See alert tone for busy override at address [FFl], 2 #, l#, 17#. See off hook signal address [FF3], 7#. Seeoffhook signal volume address [FF3], 15#. (FF3],1#,15#,4# See alert tone for busy override at address [FFl], 2 #, l#, 17#. See off hook signal address ]FF3]. 7#. See off hook signal pattern address [FF3], 16#. Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com 107 Section4OOFF3 Issue3July1993 DBS Ro@ammin~ Instructions WC-A/ 3.0, WC-B /2.0 13.0 / 4.0 The large screen telephone can show either 5 or 10 personal speed dial names when this feature is chosen. If an extension is to be included in one or more of the eight hunt groups, this option needs to be set. To choose to display 5 names on a large display telephone that is at extension 100, for example, enter: To exclude extension 100 from page group 0, for example, enter: m3],1#,18#,0# JFF31.1#.17#.0# To choose to display 10 names on a large display telephone that is at extension 100, for example, enter: wF31, l#, 17W, l# To include extension 100 in page group 1. for example, enter: rFF31, 18, 19#, l# To exclude extension 100 from page group 2, for example, enter: . pw3],1#,20#,0# When the 10 name option is used, the maximum length of a name is 7 characters. To include extension 100 in page group 3, for example, enter: pm], See address [FFG], 3#, to assign personal speed dial names to personal speed dial numbers. See address (FFlO], 2#, l-14# to assign personal speed dial. numbers to an extension. 1#,21#, 1w To exclude extension 100 from page group 4. for example, enter: ml. 1#,22#,0# To include extension 100 in page group 5, for example, enter: lFF3],1#,23#,1# To exclude extension 100 from page group 6. for example, enter: tFF3],1#,24#,0# 10s Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com /- DBS Pro@mmhg CFGA/ 3.0 CPGB Section Inb-uctions Issue3 / 2.0 / 3.0 / 4.0 400 FF3 July1993 ThejXowing program options apply toI~dispZayte&phonesonZy. To include extension 100 in page group 7. for example, enter: p3], c\ I#, 25#, I# To display soft key options on the large display telephone (VB-43225). when the phone is in the idle mode, this option must be set. To reset Dagle IlrOuD inclusion to the default initialized value. Dress lFF3L IDBS extension Dart number)#, j18-25)#. O#. lON/OFFl: To review the screen prompts associated with the options of this program, see the appendix following this section. I . -I Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com 109 Section 400 FF3 Issue 3 July 1993 DB3 Programming Instructtons WC-A / 3.0. CPGB /2.0 / 3.0 / 4.0 To display soft key options on the large display telephone (VB-43225). during the time DBS dial tone is heard, this option must be set. To display soft key options on the large display telephone (VB-43225). when calling another extension, this option must be set. o# No Change 12# Function Saeen 2 o# No Change 12# Function Screen2 1# Main Menu lut Function Saeen 3 l# Main Menu 13# Function Screen3 2# Personal Speed Dial 14# Function Screen4 2# PersonalSpeedDial 14# Function Saeen 4 3# System Speed Dial 15# Function Saeen 5 3# system speed Dial 15# Function Screen5 4# Extension Index 16# Function Screen6 4# Extension Index 16# Function Screen 6 5# Guidance Menu 1 17# Function Screen 7 6# Guidance Menu 2 1% Function Screen8 1 7# 1 Guidance Menu 3 I-># 8# Attendant Menu 1 20# Function Screen 10 y# Attendant Menu 2 21# Function Screen 11 1 lo# 1 Attendant~ Menu ---22# 3 1l# Function Screen 1 2ut Function Screen 13 2# Function Screen 14 To review the screen prompts associated with the options of this program, see the appendix following this section. 110 1Function Screen 9 I 11# Function Screen 1 [~Function Saeenl2 23# Function Screen 13 2# Function Saeen 14 I To review the screen prompts associated with the options of this program, see the appendix following this section. Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com DBSPro@-~Instructions WC-A/ 3.0 CPGB / 2.0 / 3.0 / 4.0 Scction4OOFF3 July1993 Issue3 To display soft key options on the large display telephone m-43225). when accessing a central office line, this option must be set. No Change (1#)nMen u ::..i .pb9 LCD Menu LCD Menu o# To display soft key options on the large display telephone W-43225). when in conversation on central office line, this option must be set. 12# 1 Function Screen 2 : ...I ~~eQll a# No Change 12# Function Screen 2 1 13# 1 Function Screen 3 1 2# .PersonalSpeed Dial 14# Function Screen 4 3# System Speed Dial 15# Function Screen 5 4# Extension Index 16# Function Screen 6 4# Extension Index 16#I Function Screen6 5# Guidance Menu 1 17# Function Screen7 5# Guidance Menu 1 17# Function Saeen 7 6# Guidance Menu 2 18# Function Screen 8 7# Guidance Menu 3 19# Function Screen 9 ll# Function Screen 1 23# Function Screen 13 24## Function Screen 14 rir- Guidance Menu 2 I 1~ I Function Screen8 I 1 D -:#@J!$$p .... .::. : .. ..*:‘. To review the screen prompts associated with the options of this program, see the appendix following this section. Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com To review the screen prompts associated with the options of this program, see the appendix following this section. 111 Section 400 FF3 Issue 3 July 1993 DBS Pro@ammiqf InsIndions CPGA / 3.0, WC-B /2.0 / 3.0 / 4.0 To display soft key options on the large display telephone (V&43225), when receiving a page, this option must be set. To display soft key options on the large display telephone (VB-43225). when a receiving a call waiting tone, this option must be set. LCJI Main Function Saeen 2 I 1# I I I I 2# 1 13# 1 Function Screen 3 I Main Menu I Personat Sueed Dial I 1~ I Function Screen4 I I OH No Change !2# Function Screen 2 l# Main Menu 13# Function Saeen 3 2# I PersonaiStreed Fiat I 14# I Function Screen 47 3## System Speed Dial 15# Function Saeen 5 3# System Speed Dial 1% Function Screen 5 4# Extension kdex 16# Function Screen 6 4# Extension Index 16# Function Saeen 6 H I GuidanceMenu 1 I 17# I Function Saeen 7 I 6# Guidance Menu 2 18# Function Saeen 8 7# Guidance Menu 3 I# Function Saeen 9 8# ~1Attendant Menu 1 I 20# I Function Screen 10 I I 8# I Attendant Menu 1 --I 20# I Function Screen 10 I 9#i Attendant Menu 2 21# Function Screen 11 9# Attendant Menu 2 21# Function Screen 11 1W Attendant Menu 3 22# Function Screen 12 10# Attendant Menu 3 22# Function Screen 12 I Id Function Saeen 1 ll# Function Screen 1 23# Function Screen 13 24# Function Screen 14 I 23# I Function Screen 13 I 24# Function Screen 14 To review the screen prompts associated with the options of this program, see the appendix following this section. 112 To review the screen prompts associated with the options of this program, see the appendix following this section. Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com DBS Pro@ammin~ Instructions CPGA / 3.0 CF’C-B / 2.0 / 3.0 / 4.0 Section 400 FF3 Issue 3 July 1993 The large display telephone (W-43225) can be set to display 5 or 10 extension names after the extension menu hasbeen displayed. To display soft key options on the large display telephone W-43225). when dialing an extension, this option must be set. UJDMUIU No Change 12# 1 FunctionScreen Main Menu 1 13# 1 FunctionScreen o# I 1# I I rxD h4eau LCDMHUI I I 1# I LcDMe4ltt No Change 12# I Function keen 2 Main Menu I 13# I Function Screen3 1 2# I Personal speed Dial I 1~ I Function Screen4 I 3# System Speed Dial 1% Function Screen 5 3# System Speed Dial lS# FunctionSaeen5 16# Function Screen 6 4# Extension Index 16# Function Saecn 6 5# 6# # Extension Index I 2# I krson~ Speed Dial I 14# I Function Screen4 I Guidance Menu 1 c Guidance Menu 2 7# Guidance Menu 3 8#t Attendant Menu 1 9f# E I Id Attendant Menu 2 lO# Attendant Menu 3 ~Functton :- Screen 1 Guidance Menu 3. Function Sacen 9 Function Screen 10 ll# Function Screen 1 23# Function Screen 13 24# Function Screen 14 To set an extension port to display 5 extension names. enter To review the screen prompts associated with the options of this program, see the appendix following this section. 1. fD= 341. extt%MiOXl DOti Xlumber)#, on To set extension port 22 for example, to display 10 extension names, enter: FF3],22#, Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com 341, 1w 113 Section 400 FF3 Issue3July1993 Direct inward dialed numbers that have been dialed by a caller need to be assigned to extension ports, so that the number dialed will ring on all extensions they are supposed to appear on. A DID number can be set to ring on one extension port only. To set DID number 0000 to ring on a DBS extension port number, enter: 1. (Dm C?XtC!DSiOllDOrt llUIDk~~#, 35#.oooo#. To set DID number 4444 to ring on extension port 50. for example, enter: DBSRograrmPaingI.n&ructions CPGA/ 3.0, WC-B /2.0 / 3.0 / 4.0 Once extension features have been put into one of 8 possible classes of service in address [FFl], 2#, 5#, aparticularclass of service has to be assigned to an extension. To assign all extension features to a DBS extension for exxnple, enter: 1. tDBS extension port numberl#, 35#.0# To assign class of service 4 to extension port 54, for example. enter: ml* 54#,35#,4# ~ :_... :*: :. *FF See programming at the (FFl]. 2#, 5# address for the list of features that can be applied to a class of service. This feature has been moved to address [FFl], 8#, 3# in UC-B software versions 3.00 and newer. This changes provides greater flexibility in the assignment of DID numbers. 114 Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com Technical DB!3F'rogrammh.g~~ctio~ WC-A/ 3.0 CPGB / 2.0 / 3.0 / 4.0 The ringback tone a caller hears when arriving at an extension that is busy because the same multi line key is in use bythecalledparty,canbesetintbis address. To give the calling party a ringback and busy tone, enter: 1. (DBS extension Port number)#, 36#.0# To give the calling party a busy signal, enter: fFF3], (DBS extension port xwmber)#, 36#,1# To give the calling party a ringback tone, enter: [FF3), (DBS extension port number)#, 36#,2# Section4OOFF3 iseue 3July1993 Assigns a port class to each station port that will access the Tl. Port classes are used to assign pad levels to connections made via the Tl. (Pad levels control volume.) By default, DEB phones are assigned a circuit type, based on whether they are lCEI.s or SLTs. The circuit type is used with digital pad settings to determine the loss/gain settings for connections to the Tl. (See “Digital Pad Setting.” The Tl port Class parameter is provided in case a specific phone or group of phones needs a unique pad level. For example, an SLT is assigned by default as “circuit type 2.” However, if an SLT in a remote warehouse has inadeQi2.e volume levels, the circuit type for the SLT could be changed to 7 (Option 1). Once the SLT is changed to drcuft type 7, the pad levels for circuit type 7 could be changed to provide the correct volume setting. Circuit types are also provided for trunk ports. See Figure 1 for a definition of drcLlit types. This programming parameter will allow youtoassigncircuittypes l-12toastation port. However, it should only be changed to circuit type 7 or 8 (Option 1 or 2). Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com 115 Section 400 FF3 Issue 3 July 1993 DBS programming Instructions WC-A / 3.0. CFGB /2.0 / 3.0 / 4.0 f Figure 1 shows circuit-type numbers. Cir- To determine what type of action will occur cuit ‘Apes 1.2.7, and 8 are used to assign when an SLT user hook flashes while in ~nversationwithacallerwithanothercaIler port classes to stations. already on hold, this feature must be set. The two possible types of action are alternately tog@ng between the party on hold and the party being talked Figure 1. Circuit-type Numbers to, or, conferencing the two parties together with the SLT user. circuit Types 1 K-TEL SLT No. _ To toggle between the two parties connected to an SLT user, enter: 2 DATA# 3 Analog CO Trk 4 Tl Master 5 Tl Slave 6 OPTlONl* 7 &llON 8 2* DTMF## 9 CON-F (SCC)# 10 TONE1 (MFRl)# 11 TONE2 (MFR2)# 12 . mBs extension DOrt number)#. 38w. O# -.- .. c To conferencetwopartieswiththe enter: P31, 38#, Technical 116 Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com @BS extension l# SLTuser, port number)#, Section 400 FFS issue 3 July 1993 DBS Rogramminx instructions CF’GA / 3.0 CPGB / 2.0 / 3.0 / 4.0 To set a distinctive extension ring pattern for central office calls that are set to ring at an extension, this feature must be set. The ring patterns for proprietary DBS phones are different than those of SLT or OPX phones. Either of ten different patterns can be set for an extension. The handset receive volume of the digital single line telephone can be set to a normal or louder than normal volume. The louder than normal setting gives a +fSdBgain over the normal setting, which results in a volume level approximately twice that of the normal setting. To set the digitial SLT handset receiving volume to the normal level, enter: 40#. .fDBs ow extensionDOrt numberl#. To set the digitial SLT handset receiving volume to louder than normal, enter: W], (DBS extension port number)#, 40#,1# Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com 117 Section4OOFF3 Issue3July1993 DBSRo@ammin~Instructions CPGA/ 3.0, CPGB /2.0 / 3.0 / 4.0 Digital Ring Pattan lSecondOnl3 Sceonds OFF .5 Second ON/ .5 Second OFF 7# .5 Second ON/ .5 Second OFF. .5 Second ON/ .5 SecondsOFF, .5 Second ON t3.5 SecondsOFF 2# 2 SecondsON/ 2SecondsOFF 3# 1 Second ON/ 1 Second Off .5 Second ON/ 3.5 Seconds OFF 4#l 1 Second ON/ 2 SecondsOFF 1 Second ON/7 Seconds Off This feature enables an extension to be physically moved from one position to another, and to take all features that have been applied to the extension in it’s origInal position, to the new position without doing manual program changes. By applying an auto set relocation code to a phone, and using this code when an extension is moved, extension moving is eflkient and quick. To apply no auto set relocation code to an extension port, enter: 1. mBs extension Dolt number)#, 4lklCONFl SLT&X?XRing F%ttan . w DeDendsOn SLT Transfer Ring Settine l# 3 SecondsON/ 1 Second OFF I I 2# 2 SecondsON/ 2Seconds OFF I 3#I 1 Second ON/2 Second OFF 4## 1 Second ON/ 3 SecondsOff SLT/ovxRia~. Pattan . . . 5# 1 Second On/ 5 Sctxnds OFF 1 Second ON/7 Second Off 7# .5 Second ONn.5 Second OFF, I 8# .5 Second ON/ 3.5 Seconds OFF I I I I .5 Second ON/ 3.5 SecondsOFF To apply an auto set relocation code of 7777 to extension port 45, for example, enter: rFF3]*45%*41#,7777# ~ :..::.:...:::,..:.. _,... * The auto set relocation code is applied to the original extension being moved. After the extension is plugged into the new port position, press ON/OFF. #lo. (original DBS port number)#, then the (4 digit auto set relocation code number). After the process is complete, reset the phone on the new port by disconnecting the modular plug, and reconnecting it. The origlnal port position converts to a “0” type. The transfer of phones between digital and analog ports cannot be done. The transfer of phones between analog ports, or between digital ports can be done. 118 Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com Technical DBS Rogrammin~ hstructions CE’GA/ 3.0 CPC-B / 2.0 / 3.0 / 4.0 An extension can be set in a permanent call forward setting. This fatunz is mainly forusewithperipheralequipment(s~~ voicemail applications)),where it is desiredto haveanexknsionring for a period oftime, and then always forward to the same extension port. To not have an extension permanently call forwarded for all calls, enter: l rDBs extension Dort If permanent call forwarding is applied, an extension number must be set as the target of forwarded calls. This address sets the call forward target. If permanent call forwarding is not enabled, no call forwarding extension is required. The default initialized value of this adddress would then be: jFF31. (DBS extension 43w. ICONFL DO& number)#, numberl#, 42W. On To turn permanent enter: Section 400 FF3 Issue3 July1993 call forwarding off, FF3], (DBS extension port number)#, .-. 42#, 1W To set extension number 333 as the target extension of calls from source extension number 105, enter: (FF3],105#. 438.333% To have an extension permanently call forwardedwhenanextensionuserisbusy, enter: (FF3], (DBS extension 42#, 26 port number)#, To have an extension permanently call forwarded when an extension user does not answer, enter: (FF3]. (DBS extension 426.36 port number)#, Permanent call forwarding can be overridden by call forwarding set at the extension level. Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com 119 Section 400 FF3 issue 3 July 1993 DBS Rogmmmin~ WC-A As of CPC-B Version 4, extensions can have MC0 or ML keys. In previous versions, the keys were avaiIable on a system-wide basis. The type of key available ditTered with the software release. In this parameter, “(00 1- 144)” represents the extension port number. In “0 or 1,” ” 0” represents the MC0 keys and ” 1” represents the ML keys. The following table shows MCL/ML availability. 1. The initial setting for all extensions (except the first attendant phone) is MCO. 2. The initial setting for the first attendant phone (port 1) is ML. CPC Version 1 I 1 TypeofKey CPC-A I MC0 only I CPC-B 1.0 I MC0 only I ML only 1 1 CPC-B 2.0 - 3.1 1 I I I 120 1 I CPC-B 4.0 and above I I MC0 or ML I Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com / 3.0, WC-B Instructions /2.0 /. 3.0 / 4.0 DBS Pro@mming CPC-A / 3.0 WC-B Large display Instructions / 2.0 / 3.0 / 4.0 %‘%tion Issue 400 FF3 1993 3 July screen APPElVDlX The fotlowing are the possible screen appearances of the large display telephone (‘VB-43225), when any of the 25 screen selections are chosenfor a particular telephone condition, Some screens can not be set to display during certain telephone conditions if the prompts are not reteuant to the conditions of the phone. ‘No Change” (/ \ T%sonaz speed Did” rnJ, CDBSext port rlum&+, 09:51 Thu (26-33)#, 2# APR 02 ‘system speed Dial” PT3J,(Dss set pat ruunkd#. @6-3333)#, 3# 09:Sl Thu APR.02. CH 6 0 4 RICH > - PSDSO -PSD95 SSD > -PSDOl -PSD96 ABC MN0 < > - PSD92 -PSD97 DEF PQRS c > - PSD93 -PSD96 GH I TUV < > -PSD94 -PSD99 JKL RI ‘!&tension 0 9 2.5 1 R 1.C .EXT. H Thu APR 02 4 0 4 DIRECTO‘RY < R.ECTORY WXYZ 0 9 : 5 .1 < DEF PQRS TUV WXY2 r, T h: u: &i?:@+O :..- ‘.. 2 ,.[a R I CH Absence MN0 JKL DI “Guidance Menu I ” Index” ABC GH I 804 ACCT Code 0 4 y 1HQ -,.i ye E.n tti-- < < S.t a t I o n ;..L-o c k 0 u:.t < Reminder < T I me FF-Key Sett lnQ < 121 Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com Section 400 DBS Prorpammins Instructions CPGA / 3.0, CPC-B /2.0 / 3.0 / 4.0 FF3 Issue 3 July 1993 “Guidance Menu 2” ml, ms ext. port numbaf#, c26-331#, is ‘Guidance Menu 3” ml, DE3 at pt rtumbe#* cxxE#k < -2 < * * ml, ‘IAttendant Menu 2” D~ex?Qofinumber)#, tz?6-33..#* 9?Y Attendant 0nl.g < < < f < < ‘Attendant Em, DBssctport-. At&U&&J& 00 :Si,. Thu RI CR’ > PI og’t a-mm > Ou tgolng‘.Amount Menu 3” 1,1m l%3--33)# A-PR 02 0 0 I In g Y o d-e 122 Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com Tunction Screen 1 *V DBS F’ro@ammin~ hst~ctions hAion 400 FF3 Issue 3 July 1993 CPGA / 3.0 CPGB / 2.0 / 3.0 / 4.0 ‘Function pl?3], DBS exL pat Screen lllm&ed#, I 0 9 .: F :I .. 1 ‘I! ‘U (2&33M, 1% ( APR Thu CH Set C6 set Y 0,s set co 6 I I 13# 0 .*.-. ‘!Function Screen 6” f-31, Iz>Bsfzxt port number3#,(26-331#,16# RI 3” WJ, DES ed pat rurmber)#, Wz)#, rnL 09:51 Screen A P R -‘,o’-a RICH I ‘Function 2” W8I ‘Function ml. DB O-9 02 0 ‘Function Screen 5” DB-Qxldnumber)#, (26-33Pt,15# 9 a g 0 : 5 t numberf#, .;r 7” (B33)#, 17# h-u RICH 4 tlng act pat Screen - > A c c 1 ,Yc 0 d 0 > L.C d ‘:.,c @ i’ I -Queu!ng Busy--0vrrrIdo R e I e a’s e 123 Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com Sectton 400 FF3 Issue 3 July 1993 DBS Rogrammtng Instructions / 3.0, WC-B /2.0 / 3.0 / 4.0 CPGA ‘Function Screen 8” m3L 03s ext p-t number3#,t26-331#.18# > > > > > ‘Z%mction Screen 2 l)( P-J Ri r e-as-a. Function z > > > > toti* c- 0 8’ ‘f .e c 0 n c 0 Park Screen 12” ‘Function P Screen 13” m 3h 09 Thu :Sl APR RICH s a 'V 6 e SSD-DIR 0.2 0 uu r 09:Sl 4 RI t 4 RBlars4 PSD-DIR Transfer Rdrirrn’dar coit ^. -. cc..: E a. i: r y . ‘, A C-C,.T,‘.- 6 0. d .; 124 iz?ix.BM* 21# Thu cm , Plge> Itlordaet . > T 0. n 0 > > Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com APR 6 Answer 02 6 4 Mute UNA_ , < .c DBS Pro@mmiqj WC-A/ /\ 3.0 CPGB / 2.0 / 3.0 /CO ‘!hnction Screen LFF31,DES ext p-t nuJnM#, 0 9 :51 R I CH Thu 14” c=331#, APiI 09 02 DND < > Conference < > Transf.er < > < > > Release > > :, 5 1 RI 0 0.4 > Telkback Tunction Screen 15” DBsct port number)#, c26-33)#, 2!3# ml, 24# < > > Section 400 FF3 Issue 3 July 1993 Instructions Park Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com T h u; _. CH :A:.P .” p.. ::,iJ .,.I ? 8 0.4 HOLDING N 0 1 II‘ .i N- i TRF’-TO WAI T: 0 0 125 Section 400 FF4 Issue 3 July I 1993 WC-A DBS Rogramming I~tructions / 3.0, WC-B / 2.0 / 3.0 / 4.0 3-4 RING8tHUNTGROUP PROGRAMMING P Central office line “day mode” ring assignments for all extensions are set with this option. Central office line “day mode” ring assignments for all hunt group pilot numbers are set with this option. To set extension 120 not to ring on central office line 19 when the DBS is in the “day mode”, for example, enter: To set pilot number 600 (which has been assigned as. the pilot number for hunt group 3, in this example) not to ring on central office line 14 when the DBS is in the uday mode”, for example, enter: JFF41. l#. l#. 19W. OW To set extension 120 to ring on central office line 50 when the DBS is in the “day mode”, for example, enter: _ P'F41, lW, lW, 50#, 1X DefhIt initialized mIues for DBS extension port 1 is: EF41. l#. l#. (1-64I#. l#. ION/ OFFI. and for extension rxxt 2 is: IFF41.l#, 2#. fl-W#. l#. ION/OFFl. jFF41. To set pilot number 500 (which has been assigned as the pilot number for hunt group 1, in this example) to ring on central office line 10 when the DBS is in the @daymode”, for example, enter: pF4], If an outbound central office call is made from an extension that is not set to ring on for any inbound cent.ra.I ofice line calls. the automatic answer option wiII not function. To answer inbound central office Iine caIls, press the &&.ing green Iine key. To pick up a central office linecallthatisrin&ingatanothertelephone, use the Dimcted caIl pickup or Group caII pickup options. Port number 145 is used to assign ringing to the extemaI page / UNA interface. Ail unassigned ringing trunks wilI be directed to the attendant. 126 1W. 153W. 14Q. O# Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com I#, 151#, lO#, l# DBS F’ro@amming CPC-A / 3.0 WC-B hStruC~onS / 2.0 Central office line “night mode” ring assignments for all extensions are set with this option. To set extension 120 not to ring on central ot&e line 19 when the DBS is in the “night mode”. for example. enter: JFF41.2#. 218. lQ#.O# To set extension 120 to ring on central offke line 50 when the DBS is in “night mode”, for example, enter: ~F4].2#,21#,50#, 1n Defiult initialized values for DBS extension port 1 is: lFF41. 2#. l#. (1-64M l#. ION.+! OFFI. and for &ension uort 2 is: 1FF41.2#, 2#. 11-641#.l#. ION/OFFl. Section 400 FFQ issue 2 June 1993 Central office line “night mode” ring assignments for all hunt group pilot numbers are set with this option. The address numbers 15 1- 158 refer to hunt group numbers l-8. To set pilot number 300 (which has been assigned as the pilot number for hunt group 2, in this example) to ring on central ofiice line 13 when the DBS is in the “night mode”, for example, enter: @'F4].2#, 152#, 13#, l# To set pilot number 350 (which has been assigned as the pilot number for.. hunt group 4, in this example] not to ring on central of&e line 17 when the DBS is in the %ight mode”, for example, enter: JFF41.2#. 154w. 17%.0# Ifanoulboundcentmlofficecallismade~m an&ensionthatisnotsettoringonforany inbound central office line calls, the automatic answer option wiIl not function. To answer inbound central office line calls, pressthefkhinggreenlineky. Topickup a central office line call that is ringing at another telephone, use the Directed call pickup or Group call pickup options. Port number 145 is used to assign ringing to the external page / UNA interface. Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com Toresetcentiof3ceni&Wingass&nments for nilot numbers to the default fnitialized value. mess lFF41.2#. 151-KM. kentral offie sort numberl#. CM.ION/OFFl. 127 Section 400 Issue 3 July FF4 1993 A maximum of 8 extensions can be put in each of 8 hunt groups. Each hunt group can be designated as a “terminal type”, or “circular type”. Terminal Hunt Group Operation The call must be transferred or a central office line set to ring at the first extension in the grout in order for the terminal hunt feature to work. If the first extension of the hunt group is busy, an incoming call will automatically access the next extension of the group. If all the extensions in the group are busy, an internal caller will hear a busy tone, a non transferred central office line caller will hear ring tone. If additional feature options are chosen, the search will continue with an additional hunt group,(s). To use the first extension position (analog) as a pilot position, place a 2 watt 450 ohm resistor across the tip and ring. This will busytheport,andallowittobeusedasa “pilot numb& for the remaining &f!nsions inthegroup. Directcallstomembersofthe hunt group will not hunt to other members of the group ifthe called extension is busy. CPC-A DBS Programming Instructions / 3.0. CPC-B / 2.0 / 3.0 / 4.0 Circular Hunt Group Operation Circular Hunting is performed when any extension in the group is ringing and left unanswered. The ringing can originate from tranferred, or extensions assigned to ring for outside lines. No pilot number is provided for this type of hunting. The hunting will follow the next member in the hunt group until the end ofthe hunt group is reached. When the end of the hunt group is reached the call will then be directed back to the first member until one full circle has been completed. At this point of time the call will overflow to the next hunt group assigned. If all the extensions in the group are busy, an internal. caller will hear a busy tone, a non transferred central office line caller will hear ring tone. If additional feature options are chosen, the search will continue with an additional hunt group(s). To set hunt group 5. for terminal type, enter: example, to JFF41. 3w. 5n. l#.O# To set hunt group 4, for example to circular type, enter: Iee41, 3#, 4W, l#, l# 128 Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com Technical /- DBS Programming Instructions WC-A / 3.0 CPC-B / 2.0 6 If all extensions are busy, an incoming call will wait for an available extension. If an extension within either type of hunt group: is set with an absence message, with a call forward feature, or to DND, the hunt feature will skip that extension, and procede to the next extension within the group. If the fast extension within either type of hunt group is set with an absence message, with a call forward feature, or to DND, the hunt feature will not work. ” If a SLT hunt group member takes a central office line call, puts it on hold, and replaces the handset, additional central office line calls will not hunt to idle extensions. Previously searched hunt groups cannot be searched again. If all members of all searched groups are busy, the call will be parked for the frst group searched only. Central of&e lines that are set to ring at extensions set to call forward to a hunt group will not call forward to extension types 10 and 15. An extension that is a member of a hunt group cannot be a member of another hunt group, nor a member of a call coverage group. The off hook signaling [FF3]- 16 address should be removed from members in a hunt group. Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com Section 400 FF4 Issue 2 June 1993 A maximum of 8 extension numbers can be assigned to work as one of a maximum of 8 pilot numbers. One pilot number can be,used as the lead number for each of the 8 hunt groups. To assign extension number 255, for example, as a pilot number for the frost hunt group, enter: WF4], 3W;l#, lW.2558 To assign no extension number (and .. therefore no pilot number), for example,.’ ., ..:. for the first hunt group, enter: ,. ..I pF4], 3W, lW, lW, conf,# To assign extension number 110, for example, as a pilot number for the second hunt group, enter: cIpIp4).3#, 2W, l#, 1lOW To assign extension:.number 300. for example, as a pilot number for the third hunt group. enter: IFF4],3#,3#, l#, 3006 To assign extension number 699, for example, as a pilot number for the fourth hunt group, enter: WF4], 3#,4#, lW.6996 To assign extension number 600. for example, as a pilot number for the fifth hunt group, enter: 129 Section 400 Issue 3 July FF4 1993 FF4],3#,5#, CI’GA 1#,600# To assign extension number 199, for example, as a pilot number for the sixth hunt group, enter: [FF4],3#,6#, l#, 199# To assign extension nuqber 400, for example, as a pilot number for the seventh hunt group, enter: lFF41.35 DBS Ro@amrnin~ Inst~ctiom~ / 3.0, CPGB / 2.0 / 3.0 / 4.0 If all the extensions in a particular hunt group are busy, the calI can be automatically transferred to another hunt group. A call to hunt group 3 could be made to overflow to hunt group 5, if all the extensions in group 3 are busy. If all extensions in the overflow group are also busy, the call will rem-t back to group 3, and con&me to search extensions until one becomes available. 7C, 1#,400# To assign extension number 255,. for example, as a pilot number for the eighth hunt group, enter: [FF4], 3#, 8#;1#, 255W To reset the uilot extension number assignment for anv hunt Q~OUD.Dress jFF41 3#. (hunt groun number l-81#, l#. ICONFl. fON/OFFl. To set hunt group 3 to overflow to hunt group 5, for example. enter: [FF41, 3w, 3#, 21, 51 To set hunt group 4 not to overflow to any other hunt group, for example, enter: rFF41, 3#, 48, 26, [CONF] To reset hunt particuku hunt initialized value. gr-ou~numberl#. 130 Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com Technical grout overflow for a PROUDto the default Dress lFF41.3#. (hunt 2#. ICONFI. lON/OFFl. DBS Programming Inst.ructions WC-A / 3.0 WC-B / 2.0 Section 400 FF4 Issue 2 June 1993 Use this option to insert an extension in a specific position of one of the eight hunt groups. A maximum of 8 extensions can be put into a hunt group. To place extension number 500 in the first hunt group’s first position, enter: pF4],3#. The type of extension search that is used once the call is connected to a hunt group can be set to terminal, distributed, or longest idle. .-..TenninuZ Hunt Group~Operation The call must be transferred or a central office line must be set to ring at the nilot number of the hunt groun in order for the terminal hunt feature to work. lW, 31.5001 (FF41. 3t. (l-SW. (3)t. (IOO-699H 1st member for hunt groups ( l-8) ?OCorXXX.# (FF41, 3U. (l-8lrt. (4)#, (loo-699M 2nd member for hunt groups (I-81 xx0rxxx.n (FF41, 3#, (l-81#. (5)#, (loo-6991# 3rd member for hunt groups (l-8) xx0rxxx.t (FF41. 3#. (1-8l#. (6)#. (IOO-6991# 4th member for hunt groups (l-81 xxorxxx.% IFF4). 3t. (I-8)t. (7’J#. (loo-699)# 5th member for hunt groups (l-81 xxorxxx,# (FF41. 3#. (l-8)#. (8)#, (lOO-699)t 6th member for hunt groups (1-B) xx0rxxx.U (FF41. 3#. (l-8)+!, (9)#. (IOO-699)# 7th member for hunt groups (l-8) xxorxxx.# (FF41. 3#, (l-8,!+. (lOl#. (lOO-699M 8th member for hunt groups (l-81 I xx0rxxx.U To reset an extension to it’s default initialized hunt $30~~ value. press: IFF41. 3# (DBS hunt grow numberl#. (DBS hunt grout nositionI#. fCONFl#. fON/OFFl. An extension that is a member of a hunt group cannot be a member of another hunt group, nor a member of a call coverage group. The off hook signaling [FF3]- 16 address should be removed from members in a hunt group. Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com The hunt begins with the pilot number, and sequentially moves through the eight extensions. If all the extensions in the group are busy. the hunt for a free extension W-III terminate. If the pilot number of another hunt group, or same hunt group. is specified, the search will continue with an additional hunt group(s). If not, the caller will receive a busy tone. Distributed Hunt Group Operatim The call must be transferred or a central ofke line must be set to ring at the Dilot number of the hunt croup in order for the distributed hunt feature to work. The hunt begins at the extension after the last one to pick up the previous caller, and continues in a circular manner for successive calls. If the pilot number of another hunt group is specified, the search will continue with an additional hunt group(s). If not, the caller will receive a busy tone. 131 section 400 FF4 hue 3 July 1993 Longest Idle Hunt Group Operation The call can be transferred or a central of&e line must be set to ring at the pilot number of the hunt a-OUD in order for the longest idle hunt group feature to work. The hunt begins at the extension in the group that has been idle for the longest period ofTtime, and progresses through the other extensions in the same manner. lfthe pilot number of another hunt group is spedfled, the search will continue with an additional hunt group(s). If not, the caller will receive a busy tone. .. To set hunt group .l, to the termin& search method, for example, enter: JFF41. 34. I#. 2W. O# WC-A Once all extensions in a hunt group have been searched, the caller can be transferred to the pilot number of a different hunt group, an individual extension, the attendant, or an SLT device. This option sets the extension numberthatthecallwillbetransferredto, in the event of an overflow Tom the hunt group. To set extension number 600 as the ~owMensionafteracallhasoverflowed hunt group 3, for example, enter: [FF4),3#,3#,3#,600# To set the overflow extension from anv hunt BOUD to the default initialized value. Dress (FF41.3#. (DBS hunt Proun numberHI. 3#. O#. ION/OFFi. To set hunt group 2, to,,the distributed search method, enter: WF4], 3#, 21, 2#, l# To set hunt group 3, to the longest idle search method, enter: rFF4].3#, DBS Rogrammixag In#ructi~ns / 3.0, WC-B / 2.0 / 3.0 / 4.0 3#,2#.2# 132 Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com Technical P DBS Programming In!kructiox.w WC-A / 3.0 CPGB / 2.0 section 4c90 FF4 Issue 2 June 1993 To set the maximum amount of time before the caller overflows to an extension or additional huntgroup, this option must be set. To assign an exkMon to an exact position within a hunt group, this option must be used. To place extension 3OO.inhunt group 1, in the tist position, for example, enter: pF4], 3w, 1#,5#y,300# To reset an extension to the default initialized DBS hunt groun setting. Dress jFF41.3#. lDBS hunt LOUD numberl#, JPositionwithin hunt grounj#. ICONFl#, JON’OFF’* 111 11 seconds 271 27 Seconds 121 12 seamcls 281 28 semnds 13u 13 seconds 291 29 seconds 141) 14 seamds 301 30 tseamds 15# 15 seconds 31 # 31 SeoJnds 16# 16 Sea&s 32 I 32 !Seamds To set the transfer timer for hunt group 1 to 10 seconds, for example, enter: [FF4], 3W,lW, 4#,10# .:. ._ :.. IFF41. 3#. (1-81s. (51#. (100-6991# 1st member for hunt grows (l-8) I (FF41, 3#. (I-8lU. (8H. (IOO-699M 4th member for hunt groups (l-8) I I (FF41. 31. (l-8)#, (9)#, (100-6991X 5th member for hunt gmuns (l-81 I I (FF41..3#. (I-811. [lOl#, (100-6991# 6th member for hunt gmuns (l-81 I I IFF4J. 3W. (l-8)ff. (1 IIN. (loo-6991# 7th member for hunt gmuos I1 -81 I I (FF41. 3U. (l-8)#, (121X. (lOO-6991# 8th member for hunt grows (l-81 I I XX0rDCX.U _ I xx0rxxx.l xx0rxxx.W I xx0rxxx.t xxorxxx.# I xx0rxxx.n Versions older than 2.11 do not have program settings 0 or 1. Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com 133 Section 400 Issue 3 July FF4 1993 -C-A/ An extension can be assigned to any position within any one of the 16 call coverage groups in the system. Each group has a maximum of 8 extensions, comprising 6 member extensions and 2 secretarial covering extensions. To set extension 100 as the first secretary caIl coverage member of call coverage group 1, for example, enter: DBS Ro@ammiq Inst~ctions 3.0, WC-B / 2.0 / 3.0 / 4.0 Central o!3ce Iine “day mode” delayed ring assignments for all extensions are set with this option. When inbound centml o&e line cab are not answered in the time set in the Call-Forward/ No-Answer/Delayed-RingUmer,thedelayed ring assignments are utilized. To set port 115 for no delayed ring in the day mode on line 6, for example, enter: [FF4], 48, I#, l#, lOO# W41. ;&&; iFF41. 41. coverage ‘1-1611. group # I~41. 4#. cavenge (1-16)X.: @-up# ‘1)X. Fiea-etaly ‘.A & k , # x2 xxorxn.# pF4], IFF41. -eraBe 41. tFF41. 4X. Q=rage I IFF41. 4#. covcra&?e (l-16)1. ID-UP # ‘6)#. Member #4 (I-16)#. group # (7)#. Member #5 I ‘l-16)#. SOUP t ‘8M Member #6 I COVeraf!e aOUD)#. 5#, 110#,22%, l# xx0raa.t XXW?ZX.# xxorxxx I .# I To reset call cover= ~OUDS to the default initialized settings. Dress IFF4L 4#. lcall coveraee groun)#. (oosition within 5#. 1151y. 6#.0# To set extension 110 to delayed ring in the day mode on line 22, for example, enter: xxorxxx.# I1 (211. .’ secretary ,t :,. iCONF1. Inclusion of the first-attendant position in the delayed-ring tables. wiIl disable the attendant-overflow feature. If the delayed ring function is enabled and no extensions are assigned, or capable of ringing (DND, unpluged. etc...), the ringing line will automatically ring the attendant. An extension can not be a member of a hunt group, as well as a member of any other call coverage group. The second covering extension becomes active only when the first covering extension is set for Do-Not-Disturb. 134 Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com Technical DBS Pro@amming hdruCti0~ WC-A / 3.0 WC-B / 2.0 Central office line “day mode” delayed ring assignments for pilot numbers of hunt groups are set with this option. When inbound central office line calls are not answered in the time set in the Call-Forward/No-Answer/Delayed-Ring timer, the delayed ring assignments are unlized. To set the pilot number for hunt group 1 for no delayed ringin the day mode on line 22, for example. enter: ( 3eCtion4OOFF4 Issue 2 June 1993 Central office line “night mode” delayed ring assignments for all extensions are set with this option., When inbound central office line callsare not answered in the time set in the, Call-Forward/ No-Answer/Delayed-Ring timer, the delayed ring assignments are utilized. To set extension 120 for no delayed ring in the night mode on line 3, for example, enter: JFF41. 6#. 120#. 3W. O# JFF41. 5#. 151#. 22#.0# To set the pilot number for hunt group 2 for delayed ring in the day mode on line 15, for example, enter: WF4]. 5#, 152#, To set extension 400 to delayed ring in the night mode on line 20, for example, enter: [FF4], 66, 120#, 3#, l# 15W. l# Inclusion of the first-attendant position in the delayed-ring tables, will disable the attendant-overflow feature. If the delayed ring function is enabled and no extensions are assigned, or capable of ringing (DND, unpluged. line will etc...). the ringing automatically ring the attendant. Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com ,135 Section4OOFF4 Issue3July1993 Central of&e line “night mode” delayed ring assignments for pilot numbers of hunt groups are set with this option. When inbound central office line calls are not answered dn the time set in the CallForward/No-Answer/Delayedelayed-Wngtimer, the delayed ring assignments are utilized. To set the pilot number for hunt group 4 for delayed ring in the night mode on line 28, for example, enter: JFF4l. 6W. 154#.26i/.O# To set the pilot number for hunt group 1 for no delayed ring in the night mode on line 10, for example, enter: DBSRo@ammfngInstructions WC-A / 3.0. WC-B / 2.0 / 3.0 / 4.0 Extensions th at have a DSS/BLF key assignment for other DBS extensions can be set to ring on those keys for any type of call that is directed to the other extensions. This feature allows a second extension user to answer a ringing call to an absent extension position(s) by accessing the DSS/BLF key on their phone that represents the other extension position(s). The first extension enumerated in the address is the target extension; and the second is the source extension. To set extension port 15 not to ring for calli directed to ‘extension port 44, enter: JFF41. 7w. 44w. 15W.06 [FF4], 6#, 151#, 106, l# To set extension port 1 to ring for calls directed to extension port 60. enter: tFF41, 76,6O#,l# Technical 136 Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com 1n DBS ROM WC-A / 3.0 WC-B Inntnwtions / 2.0 section 400 FF4 Isane 2 June 1993 Extensions that ham a DSS/BLF key assignment for other DBS extensions can besettodelayedringonthosekeysforany type of caU-*t is directed to the other &ensions.‘cs feature allows a second extension user to answer a ringing call on a delayed basis to an absent extension position(s) by accessingthe DSS/BLFkey on their phone that represents the other extension position(s).?he Brst extension enumerated in the address is the target extension. and the second is the source extension. To set extension port 13 not to delay ring for calls directed to extension port 44, enter: JFF41. wt. 44u. 13#. ow To set extension port 5 to delay ring calls directed to extension port 40, enter: W4], su, 4ow, 5# l# Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com 137 Section Isrue 400 FFS July 1993 CPCA DBS Ro@ammin~ I~tructio~~ / 3.0, CPGB / 2.0 / 3.0 / 4.0 f Each flexible feature key on the telephones and EM24 consoles can be programmed with a code so that pressing it wiU perform the function associated with the code assigned to the key. To set extension port 120. FF key number 5, to be an Alarm key, for example, enter: PF5], 12OW. 5#, pF12], 4# To set extension port 55, FF key number 10, to be a call forward/all calls key, for example, enter: EF5], 55#,10#,720# To reset the FF extension kevs to an unassigned value. [which must be done before a feature can be aDDlied to a defaulted CO line kevl. Dress lFF51. (l1441#. (l-24I#. ICONFI. IONIOFFI. To reset FF Extension kevs to the default initialized value. Dress fFF5L jl-1441#. 11-241#. (DBSCOlinenumber that is the same as the kev number on the nhoneI#. When using CPC-B software later than ver. 2.00. the default values for all kevs on the attendant nositions default to Pooled Trunk 89 kevs. 71# [FFl2]. 7# [FF12], 4# IFFll], l# IFF121,53# Absence Msg Accountant Code Alarm Answer Key BGM 720# C-F/AU CaIls 721# C-F/Busy .NA 722# C-F/Busy 723# C-F/CO Line 724# C-F/NAWGB~~.~~ Qm 79# DkCtCdlpfckup 70# Group call pllckup Ol-64# CO Lines 73# DND [PROGI, lo-69# 2 dQgi~~ensions IPROGI, lOO-699# 3 dglt F57di&ions (FF121,51# Headset 1FF121,8# Intercom Key lFF121,50# Internal Dial Tone 89# Stop LCR 77# . Meet Me Answer [FFl lj,[FF12]# Mute ” IFF121,52# Night Mode IFF121,00-07# Page 75# Park Hold 81-86,89# MC0 Access [FFll]. 2# Release 74# -onLockcnlt SSD Key [AUTOI. 00-89# IAUTOI, 90-99# PSD Key IFFlll, 3# Talk Back 78# UNA Pickup IPROGI,[FRGGI,xzawcx -Y Key [AuToI, [REDIAL] Auto Redial to Ext. 81-86, 89 MuIUpleIzop (United to3pereKtfnsi~ 12 per attendan m-2 138 Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com (- i section 400 FFS Issue 3 July 1093 DBS Promming Inst~ctio~u CPC-A / 3.0 CPGB / 2.0 / 3.0 / 4.0 ‘lhedef&knumbenngschemeonextension FFke@AayedoutstarUngfmmbottoml& andendingattopright.AUFFkeys default to LCR/MCO keys. Only the first 24 FF keys will light for CO lines that are assigned to them, the remaining keys on anyextensionhaving thatmanyFFkeyswillnotlightifCOhne assignments have been given to them. Sincethe~and#keysonthedialpadare used for entering data, when the use of these symbols are required for feature codes, (FFll] provides the 0 and (FF12) provides the #. When entering these symbols by using the FF keys, the display will not indicate that any data was entered. To program several telephones with the same key layout, see [FF9] progmmming. Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com Each flexfble feature key on the DSS console can be programmed with a code so that pressing it will perform the functionassodaWwiththecodeassigned tothekey. To set DSS console 1, FF key number 25. to be a BGM key, for example, enter: lFF51, 145w, 251, [FF12].53# TosetDSSconsole 2, FFkeynumber44, to be a call forwarded all call key, for example, enter: @'F5],148#,44#,720# To reset DSS Console 1 & 2 kevs to the default initialized val e. Dress fFF51, J145-148w fl-721#. YDBS extension number~#. DSS Consoles 3 814 have no default values set, To reset the DSS Console kevs to an unassigned value. Dress fFF51, J145-1481#. fl-144N. ICONM. IONI OFFI. 139 Section 400 FFS luue SJuly1993 WC-A DBSRo~rammin~Instructio~ / 3.0, CPC-B / 2.0 / 3.0 / 4.0 KEYQDE- 71# [FFlZ], [FF121, [FFll]. [FF12], 720# 721# 722# 723# 7248 7# 4# l# 53# Absence Msg Accountant Code Alarm Answer Key BGM C-F/Au calls C-F/BusyNA C-F/Busy C-F/CO Line C-F/NA(c~~~versoo @=aerer) IAUTOI, [=Dml Direct Call Pickup Group Call Pickup CO Lines DND 2 d&it E7clxnsions 3 dlgtt I3dm!3ions Headset Intercom Key Internal Dial Tone Stop LCR Meet Me An&er Mute Night Mode Page Park Hold MC0 Access Release ExiznstonLcchut SSD Key PSD Key Talk Back UNA Pickup AnyAuto Redial to Ext. 81-86, Multiplex 79# 70# Ol-64# 73# [PROG], lo-69# [PROG], lOO-699# [FF12], 51# [FF12), 8# [FF121. 50# 89# 77# [FFl l],[FF12]# [FF12], 52# [FF12]. 00-07# 75# 81-86,89# [FFll]. 2# 74# IAUTOl, 00-89# [AUTO], 90-99# [FFl 11, 3# 78# IPROGI. I~oGl* ~ 89 The default numbering scheme on extension FF keys is layed out starting from bottom left and ending at top right. All FF keys default to LCR/MCO keys. Only the first 24 FFkeyswilllight for CO lines that are assigned to them, the remaining keys on any extension having that many FF keys will not light ifC0 line assignments have been given to them. Sincethe~and#keysonthedialpadare used for entering data, when the use of these symbols- are required for feature codes, (FFll] provides the * and [FFl2] provides the #. YWhen entering these symbolsbyusingtheFFkeys,thedisplay will not indicate that any data was entered. To program several telephones with the same key layout. see (FF9Jprogramming. (limited to 3 per extension, 12 per ElttfBldaIl~ K==Brer 140 Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com Technical DBS F’ro@amxdng WC-A / 3.0 CPGB Instructiona Section / 2.0 / 3.0 / 4.0 Eachflextblefeature keyontheAttendant console can be pmgmnmed with a code so that pressing itwill perform the function assodatedwitbtbecodeassi$ledtothekey. Tosetatt@antcmsole 1,FFkqynumber 25, to be a BGM key, far example, enter (P'Irg], 145#,25#, pFl2], 53W batte 71# [FF12], [FF12], [FFll]. [FF12], 720# 721W 722# 723# 724# i : 7# 4# l# 53# 79# 70# Ol-64# 73# [PROG], lo-69# [PROG]. lOO-699# [FF12], 51# (FF121. 8# [FF12], 50# 89# 77# [FFl l],[FF12]# [FF12]. 52# IFF121. 00-07# 75# 8 1-86,89# (FFlll. 2# 74# [AUTO], 00-89# [AUTO], 90-99# [FFll]. 3# 78# m-4. mm* w 2.00 or a-) DirectCanPlckup GroupCaIlPichp CO Lines DND 2 d.ig¶tl9cknsiorls ~3 digtt Rctensions Headset Intercom Key Internal Dial Tone Stop LCR Meet Me Answer Mute Night Mode Page Park Hold MC0 Access Release ExtensionLockout SSD Key PSD Key Talk Back UNA Pickup Jmmxx *Key [AUTO] t IREDIAL] 81-86. 89 Auto Redial to Ext. Multiple Loop (limited to 3 per extension, 12 per attendant)(cpc-B VQ 2.00 Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com FFS 1993 Absence Msg Accountant Code Alarm Answer Key BGM C-F/AU CalIs C-F/BusyJW C-F/Busy C-F/CO Line C-F/NA (CPGB When usin# softwa.re Ihe DSS Console kevs default as indicated in the am endix following this section To reset the Attendant Console keys to m unassigned value. mess IFF5L 1149-152)#. (l-144)#. lCONF1. ION/ OFF1. 400 SJ* or -1 141 section 400 ma I~sue3 July1993 The default numbering scheme on attendant console FF keys is layed out starting from bottom left and ending at top right. All FF keys default to LCR/ MC0 keys. Only the Arst 24 FF keys will light for CO lines that are assigned to them, the remaining keys on any attendant console having that many FF keys will not light if CO line assignments have been given to them. Since the * and # keys on the dial pad are used for entering data, when the use of these symbols are required for feature codes, [FFl l] provides the * and [FI712] provides the #. When entering these symbols by using the FF keys, the display will not indicate that any data was entered. To program several telephones with the same key layout, see [FF9] progmmming. 142 Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com CF’GA DBSRo#ammin~Instructions / 3.0. WC-B / 2.0 / 3.0 / 4.0 CPGA/ 3.0 CPGB DBS Pro@-ammh~ / 2.0 / 3.0 / 4.0 Instruction Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com section 400 Flw Isaue3Juiy1993 143 section 400 Issue 3 July , FM 1993 WC-A DBS Programming Instructions / 3.0. CPC-B / 2.0 / 3.0 / 4.0 c 3-6NAMEANDlUESSlGE PRrnRAMS~Gs Names of up to 10 characters can be assigned to each extension number. This name appears on the second line of a telephone with a display, and on the top line of a display extension that is calling. ,. To assign a name to extension port 40, with the characters RICH M.. for example, enter: ml, iw, 40#, C0NPW. (see am-~ following this sectim)# ,. To assign a name to extension port 1, with the characters Operator. for example, enter: Names of up to 16 characters can be assignedtoSystemSpeedDialnumbersOO89. The namesaredisplayedalphabeticauy on large screen ICD telephones to provide comlnnation of the name of the person being cakd when using a SSD code. Toassignthename”Panasonic”tosystem speed dial number 05. for example, enter: (ITS), 2#, 05#, (see appendix following this s+ion)# To reset the names of s&em sneed dial numbers to the default initialized values, press IFF21..2#. 00-691#. ICONFl. ION/ OF-n. [FF6], l#, IS. [CONFIn, (see appendix folbwing this sectim)# To reset &ension names to the default iniuauzed val e. DIZSS rmw. l#. fl-144 jCONFl#. fONU/OFFI. If the “Attendant Feature Package” sotiisbeingused.theDSSConsole mustbejn&3llysetastypellin[Fl?3],2#to enaIdethelqsfo--es. SeeIhe appendix following this section for key designations on the DSS Console which is used to store characters for extension names. IfaDSS is not available seesectfon700,intheopgatingInstructions Manual under UAttendant Telephone Features” for alternate instructions on how to store characters. 144 .:W$ ~~~ If the “Attendant Feature Package” sofhvare is being used, the DSS Console mustbein.iUallysetastype llin(FF3]2#, to enable the keys for programming capabilities. See the appendix following this section for key designationson the DSS Consolewhichisusedto store characters for system speed dial numbers. If a DSS is not available, see section 700, in the Operating Instructions Manual, under “AttendantTelephone Features” for alternate instructions on how to store characters. Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com DBS Pro@8mxd.n~ WC-A / 3.0 CPGB section 400 FF6 Instn~ctions / 2.0 / 3.0 / 4.0 Issge 3 July Names of up to 16 characters can be assigned to PersonalSpeed Dialnumbers 90-99. The names are displayed alphabetically on large screen LCD telephones to provide con3rmation of the name of the person being called when using a PSD code. . To assign the name “Bill” to personal speed dial number 90, on prt 21 for example, enter: 1903 Amessageofupto 15chamdemcanbe aeatedsothatapemoncalkngfmma displayphonetoanextensionthatissetwith anabsencemessage,canbetiomxdofthe status ofthe extensionwer. Toassignthemessage”Leavingat3:00”to absence message 5, for example, enter: : W61, 4#, 5% [coNelK (see appendix following this secfiion)# (see To assign the message “Don’t Bother Me” to absence message6, for example, enter: To reset the names of nersonal sneed dial numbers to the default initiaked values, press rFF61. 3#. (ool-144#. @o-99)#, JCONFl. ION/OFFl. W61,4#, 6% ICOW% b= appendix m, 3#, 021#, 90#, [CONFl#, appendix following this section)# If the “Attendant Feature Package” software is being used, the DSS Console must be initially set as type 11 [FF3] 2#, to enable the keys for programming capabilities. See the appendix following this section for key designations to be used to store chara~forpemonalspeeddialnumbers. IfaDSSisnot availabe, see section 700, in the Opeding Instructions Manual, under “AttendantTekphoneFeatures*faaakemate instruc%nsonhowtostomcham&zs. following this section)U To assign the message ‘Call Later’ to absence message 7, for example. enter: [eesl, 48, 7#, [CONFj#, (see appendix following this section)# To assign the message “Return at 2:OO”to absence message 8, for example, enter: lFW, 4#. 8% ICOlW% (see appendix following this section)# To assign the message “In Bathroom” to absence message 9, for example, enter: ml, 4#, 9#, [CONFlU, (see appendix following this section)# SeeTechnotes 10 & 12 (March 1992) for complete information. Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com 145 _ section 400 FF6 IssueBJulylQQB To reset the absence me-es default initialized values. press J5-91#. ICONFl. ION/OFFl. DBSRogrmnmh~Inrtrrrctioxu CI'GA / 3.0, CFGB / 2.0 / 3.0 / 4.0 to the IF’FU. 4#, Central office Iines can be given names of up to 6 characters to help ident@ the source of the caII. When an inbound calI rings at an &ension, the top lfne of the ED indicates the Iine name. If the “Attendant Feature Package” software is being used, the DSS Console mustbeinitiaIIysetastypellm[FF3]2#, to enable the keys for programming capabilities. To set central o&e line 3 to “support!‘. for example. enter: See the appendix folIowing this section for key designations to be used to store characters for absence messages. , To reset central omce Ihe names to the defauItinitiaI&dvaI e . press IFF61.5#, fl-641#. ICONFM. ,0uN/&. BW, SK 3% KONW, folhwing be appendix this section)# A DSS Console must be used to set absence messages. If the “Attendant Feature Package” software is being used; the DSS Console mustbemMaIIysetastype11in[FFB]2#, to enable the keys for programming capabilities. See the appendix following this section for key designations to be used to store characters for central of&e line names. If a DSS is not available, see section 700, under “Attendant Telephone Features” for alternate instructions on how to store characters. See Technotes 10 & 12 (March 1992) for complete information.. 146 Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com f- DBS Pro@ammin~ h~tructions CPGA / 3.0 CPGB / 2.0 / 3.0 2%ction / 4.0 Hunt grouppilot numbers can be given a name of up to 11 characters to help identify the source of an inbound centraI office line call_-to the hunt group pilot name. To set a hunt group pilot name for hunt group 1 to “support”, for wple, enter: lees], 6#, l#, [CONFlU, (see appendix following this section)# To reset hunt E~OUD Dilot names to the default initialized values. Dress IFI? 6#. ll-8l#. ICONF]#. ION/OFFI, 400 FF6 bme3JdylSQ3 When a busy party receives an indication of an incoming intercom call, the busy party can respond by sending a text message back to the caller. .In this parameter, “p’ represents a 15character text message. The text message can be sent after a call waiting tone, a call waiting tone followed by a text message, or an oflhook voice announce. The following table shows the default text associated with messages 1 to 5. These messages can be changed using an attendant phone or a DSS/ 72. If the “Attendant Feature Package? software is being used, the DSS Console mustbeinit&IIysetastype11i.nFF3)2#. to enable the keys for programming capabilities. See the appendix following this section for key designations to be used to store characters for hunt group pilot names. If a DSS is not available, see section 700. under “Attendant Telephone Features” for alternate instructions on how to store characters. I 2 I Please Hold I I 3 I Will Call Back I ITransfer I IUnavailable I 4 5 SeeTechnotes 10 & 12 (March 1992) for complete information. 147 Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com section 400 FF6 Issue 3 July 1993 WC-A DBS Rogramming I~tmctions / 3.0, CPC-B / 2.0 / 3.0 / 4.0 \ \ \ 148 Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com Technical DBS Ro@axnmin~ CPGA/ hstructions 3.0. WC-B / 2.0 / 3.0 /4.0 se!ction Iasue3 400 FF7 July1993 I S-7 TOLL RESTRICTION PROGRAM SETTINGS CENTRAL OFFICE (0fxi?fview) LINE TOLL RESTRICTION There are 7 types of toll-restriction that can be used to curtail dialing of certain types of calls on a central office line. Toll restriction is effective on a line by hne basis per extension, for the DBS day and night operation modes. The following is a brief description of each type. -. Type 0: Full restriction of outbound dialing and inbound calls on a central of&e line Calls can be answered on a type 0 line when the line is assigned to ring on the restricted extension.. Tppe 1: Full restriction of outbound dialing on a central off&x line. Inbound ringing central office lines to all telephones can be answered and/or transferred by a type 1 toll restricted telephone. me 2: Partial restriction of outbound dialing on a central office line. 3 digit dialing of 211-911 numbers is restricted according to the program option [FM], l#, (4-l 1). Outbound dialing of system speed dial numbers is restricted according to the program option [FFl]. 2#, l#, 4#. Up to fif@ 7 digit numbers that are preset in program option : .,’ [FF7], 6#. are restricted (depending on the setting in [FF7]. l#;. -12#).:Operator. calls are restricted. International calls are restricted. Toil free dialing is allowed. Inter-digit timer is set for 6 seconds. Inbound ringing central office lines to all telephones can be answered and/or transferred by a type 2 toll restricted telephone. me 3: Full restriction (in default condition) of all access to any area or office code. Options to allow outbound dialing to selected area codes [FF7], 2#, 3#, and selected of&e codes [FF7], 3#, 3# to ease full restriction. 3 digit dialing of2 1 l-9 11 numbers is restricted according to the program option [FF7], l#, (4- 11). Outbound dialing of system speed dial numbers is restricted according to the program option [FFl], 2#, l#, 4#. Outbound dialing of up to fifty preset 7 digit numbers in program option [FM], 6#, is restricted (depending on the setting in (FM], l#, 13#). Four specially selected area codes [FF7]. 4#, (l -4)# will restrict the first 6 digits, by tying each of these special area codes to a special ofhce code table [FF7], 5#, (l-4)#, 000-999# of restrictions. International calls are restricted according to program option [FF7]. l#, l#. Operator calls are restricted. Toll fkee dialing is allowed. Inter-digit timer is set for 6 seconds. Inbound ringing central ofEke lines to all telephones can be answered and/or transferred by a type 3 toll restricted telephone. me 4: No restriction (in default condition) of all office code dialing. Full restriction (in default condition) of all area code dialing. Options to allow outbound dialing to selected area codes [FIV], 2#, 4#. and selected of&e codes [FM], 3#, 4# to alter default Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com 149 section 400 FF7 Isaue3Jdy1993 DBS PrognmminqInat~~tio~~ CPGA3.0, WC-B / 2.0/.3.0 / 4.0 restrictions. 3 digit diaIing of 2 1 l-9 11 numbers is restricted according to the program option [FF7], l#, (4- 11). Outbound dialing of system speed dial numbers is restricted according to the program option [FFlJ, 2#, l#, 4#. Outbound dialing of up to fifty preset 7 digit numbers in program option [FM]. 6#, is restricted (depending on the setting in [FF7], l#, 14#). Four specialIy selected area codes (FF7], 4#, (l-4)# will restrict the first 6 digits. by tying each of these special area codes to a special of&e code table [FF7], 5#. (1-4)#, 000-999# ofrestrictions. International caI.Isare restricted according to program option [FM], 1#. l#. Operator caIIs are restricted. Inter-digit timer is set for 6 seconds. Inbound ringing centraI office lines to aI.I telephones can be answered and/or transferred by a type 4 toII restricted telephone. Type 5: No restriction (in default condition) of aII area code diaIing. No restriction (in defauh condition) of alI office code diahng. Options to restrict outbound dialing to selected area codes (FF7],2#, 5#, and selected office codes [FF7], 3#, 5# to alter default restrictions. 3 digit dialing of 2 1 l-9 11 numbers is restricted according to the program option [FF7], l#, (4- 11). Outbound dialing of system speed dial numbers is restricted according to the program option [FFl], 2#, l#. 4#. Outbound diaIing of up to fifty preset 7 digit numbers in program option [FM], 6#, is restricted (depending on the setting in [FF7], l#, 15#). Four specially selected area codes [FM], 4#, (l-4)# wiII restrict the tirst 6 digits, by tying each of these special area codes to a special of&e code table [FF7], 5#, (1-4)#, 000-999# of restrictions. International calls are restricted according to program option [FM], 1#, l#. Operator caUs are restricted. Inter-digit timer is set for 6 seconds. Inbound ringing central office Iines to alI telephones can be answered and/or transferred by a type 5 toll restricted telephone. t’ . c Type 6: No restriction (in default condition) of dialing to any area or of&e code. Options to restrict outbound diaIing to selected area codes [FM], 2#, 6##;and selected ofIke codes [FM], 3#, 6#. 3 digit diaI.ing of 2 11-911 numbers is restricted according to the program option [FM], l#, (4-l 1). Outbound diaI.ing of system speed dial numbers is restricted according to the program option [FFl], 2#, l#, 4#. Outbound dialing of up to Wty preset 7 digit numbers in program option [FF7], 6#, is restricted (depending on the setting in [FM], l#, 16#). Four speciaIIy selected area codes (FIV), 4#, (1-4)# wiII restrict the first 6 digits, by tying each of these special area codes to a special office code table [FM], 5#. (1-4)#, OOO-999# of restrictions. International caI.Is are restricted according to program option [FM], l#, l#. Operator calls are restricted. ToII free dialing is allowed. Inter-digit timer is set for 6 seconds. Inbound ringing cent& office lines to a.II telephones can be answered and/or transferred by a type 6 toII restricted telephone. Type 7: No restrictions configuratlon. to outbound dialing on ah central office Iines in the defaulted For ToII Restriction types 3 through 6 operator calIs are allowed in default if FMl#- l# is set to l#. The Of&e code tables are used to restrict aII 0 plus diaIi.ng, the next two digits wiII also be anahzed. 150 Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com i DBS Pro@ammhqf CPGA/ 3.O,CPC-B hdructiona 3tction4oom7 Inllt-3JutylQQ3 / 2.0 / 3.0 / 4.0 The dialing of international calls can be allowed or denied on all central office lines set with a toll restriction classes of 3-6. When a new outbound call is being placed on a central of&e line (with class of service 3 through 6). immediately after a call has been received on that line, this option enables toll rest&ion, To restrict dialing of international calls for central office lines set with a toll restriction classes of 3 through 6, for example, enter: To restrict additional outbound restriction the use of the flash key and digits dialed, to make an call on a line set for a toll class of 3 through 6, enter: _ (FF71,1#,26,0# To enable dialing of international calls for central office lines set with a toll restriction classes of 3 through 6. for example, enter: To allow the use of a flash key to make a new outbound call on a line set for a toll restriction class. of 3 through 6, enter: jFF7l.l#.2#. l# This progmm option is tied to the System installation of&e code address [FFl], 2#, l#, 18#. If international calls are allowed, 011 should be allowed in types 3 through 6 offlce code tables. Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com 151 DBSRo@amming Instxuctio~ section 400 FF7 lrsue3July1993 CFCA3.0,CPGB / 2.0 /S.O / 4.0 The m-urn number of digits that can be dialed on central offke lines set with a toll restriction class of 3-6 can be limited to 15 to 29 digits, or can be unlimited. Special three digit numbers (2 1 l-9 11) can be restricted from being dialed on central ofke lines set for toll restriction class types 2-6. ;I I l# I I 15 Digits ~s#:D~tglts 7# 21Dlgits 86 22.Digits I 23 Digits 1 14# 1 28 Digits I 9# :‘ 151 ” I I 211 I” Is.1 1 la 911 I ., 29 D&its JJo L&& To allow 411 to be dialed on a central ofilce line having a toll restriction class of 2 through 6, for example, enter: JFml. 18.7#.0# To restrict 911 fkom being dialed on a central o&e line having a toll restriction class of 2 through 6, for example, enter: 2 1 l-9 11 are allowed in default. 152 Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com DBS FVo@mmh. Jndructions section WC-A / 3.0, CPC-B / 2.0 / 3.0 / 4.0 Seven digit toll restriction allows or denies the dialing of a certain 7 digit number when a toll restriction type 2 through 6 is set. Reference is made to [FF7], 6#. That address is for special 7 digit numbers. If there are any entries set in [FFV];-6#, these entries will be reviewed before the call continues to be processed. ( \ 400 FF7 Insue 3 July 1983 Areacode dialing restrictions on central oflice lines set for toll restriction types 3-6 are set in this program option. Telephone users that access a central ofllce line set to one of these classes of service, will be allowed or denied access to a specific area code; -according to the setting in this option. To disable the 7 digit table for type 2 toll restriction, enter: To allow dialing to area code 404 on a central office line set with a toll restriction class of service of 3, for example, enter: ~,1#12#,0# lr(le7l,2#,3#,404#,0# To enable 7 digit toll restriction type 3, enter: ” :’ pF7l.l# for To allow dialing to area code 406 on a centralo~celinesetwitha~~restriction class of service of 4, for example, enter: 13#.1# (FFTj. l#, (12-16)# the 12-16 refers to types 2 through 6 toll restriction. 7 digit toll restriction when enabled will look at the last seven digits dialed, area codes which are allowed may be denied telephone access to specific numbers such as WX 555- 12 12. To restrict dialing to area code 212 on a central of&e line set with a toll restriction class of service of 5. for example, enter: Iee7],2#,5#,212#,1# To restrict dialing to area code 506 on a central of&e line set with a toll restriction class of service of 6, for example, enter: [FF71,2#,6#,508#,1# Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com 153 &?ction 400 FF7 DBS~IMXUCtiOM CPC-A 3.0. CPCB / 2.0 / 3.0 / 4.0 I.asut3Jtdy1993 To reset area code toll restricllons for central office lines set as classes 3 and 4 to the default initialized value. Dress jFF71,2#. I3 or 4)#. KKIO-999)#. l#. ION/ OFFl. To reset area code toll restrictions for central of&e lines set as classes 5 and 6 to the default initialized val e. press JFF71.2#. (5 or 61#. 1000-9991#k. ION/ OFFI. Oflke code dialing restrictions on central oflice lines set for toll restriction types 36aresetinthisprogramoption.‘Ikkphone LlsasthatacJcEss acentmlofEcehnesetto oneoftheseclassesofsewi~willbeabwed or denied accesstoaspecffko&ecode, accordingtotheseUinginthisoption. To allow dialing to o&e code 663 on a centralofkeline setwithatollrestriction class of sewice of 3. for example. enter: Iee7],3%,3#,663#,0# This address is tied to the system installation area code address. (FFl], 2#, l#, 18#. ; f To restrict dialing to of&e axle 346 on a centraloBkeline setwithatollrestriction class of sewice of 4, for example. enter: Iee7],3#,4#,346#, l# To restrict dialing to o&e code 261 on a 1central of&e line set with a toll restriction class of sewice of 5, for example, enter: 154 Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com DB3Pro@ammingInstructio~ CPGA/ 3.0, CPC-B / 2.0 / 3.0 / 4.0 To restrict dialing to of&e code 588 on a central of&e line set with a toll restriction class of service of 6, for example, enter: .-. m, 3#, 6#, 588%. l# To reset ofike code toll restrictions for central of&e lines set as classes 3 to the default initialized value. press IFF71. 3#. 3M. @OO-999)#. l#. ION/OFFL To reset of&e code toll restrictions for central ofhce lines s t as classes 4. 5 and 6 to the defaulteinitialized values press lFF71. 3#. (4. 5 or 61#. fOOO9991#.0#. ION/OFFl. Four area codes can be tied to four special oflice code tables to allow or restrict a broad range of o&e codes on central of&e lines set with tollAriction classes of service 3 through 6’ Typically, area codes such as 900 are selected as special area codes. For example, to select area code 900 as the first “special area code” enter: To select area code 808 as the second “special area code”, enter: plq. ThisaddressistiedtolheSystcminstallation area code address pl], 2#, l#, 18#. 1#,900# m,41y, 4#, 26,808# To select area code 408 as the third “special area code” enter: pFq, 4#, 3#, 408W To select area code 600 as the fourth “special area code” enter: [FF71,4#, 4#,600# To reset anv of the four special area codes to the default initialized value, p ess IFF7). 4#. tl-4M. lCONF1. ION/ OkF, . Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com lb8 &ction 400 FF7 Iuuc3July1833 DBs~gmnmingInstmctions CFGA3.0, CPGB / 2.0/.3.0 / 4.0 Four special of&e code tables are tied to four special area codes to allow or restrict a broad range of office codes for each special area code, on central office lines set with toll restriction classes of service 3-6. To select of&e code 976 as an office code to be restricted with the third “special area code”. on a central office line set for toll restriction class 3 through 6, for example. enter: Iee7], SW, 3W, 9761y, l# Typically, office codes such as 976.555 or other *pay for call” line sexvices are selected as special o&e codes. To select of&e code 976 as an oflice code to be restricted with the first “special area code”, on a central of&x line set for toll resMction class 3 through 6, for example, enter: .5#. lIy.9768. l# To select oflIce code 555 as an allowed office code to work with the second “special area code”, on a central office line set for toll restriction class 3 through 6, for example, enter: [FF71,5#, 2#, 555#, O# To select of&e code 444 as an of&e code tobe allowedwiththefourth”specialarea code”, on a central ofWe line set for toll restriction class 3 through 6, for example, enter t(FF71,5#, 4#, 4448, on To reset mecial office code 1 & 2 toll restrictions for central oflke lines set as classes 3-6 to, the default initialized value. Dress lFF71. 5#. I1 or 2M. fOOO999M. l#. lON/OFFl. To reset soecial office cod 3 & 4 toll restrictions for central officz lines set as classes 3-6 to the default initialized value. Dress lFF71. 5#. (3 or 4)#. KM30999M. O#. ION/OFFl. Special office code tables 1 and 2 are restricted as default values, special ofike code tables 3 and 4 are allowed as default vaules. Default values can be changed globally in FM 9#, 13- 16#. 156 Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com DBS Pro@ammh~ CPGA/ h~truction8 section 400 FF7 Issue3JuIy1803 3.0, CPGB / 2.0 / 3.0 / 4.0 Up to 50 preset 7 digit numbers can be restricted from being dialed behind all area codes on central of&e lines set for toll restriction types 2 through 6. The identifkation of these numbers are set in this program option. [FM], l#, (1216)#, determines whether the seven digit number that is dialed is reviewed by this address. There are 7 types of toll restriction that can be used to curtail dialing of certain types of calls on a central office line. when the DBS is in the day setting. Toll restriction is effective on a line by line basis, per extension. See the overview at the beginning of this programming section for a review of each type of toll restriction. Toassign5551212asthef%tof50preset numberstoberestxictedfiombeingdtaled onacentral office line set for toll restriction class 2 (assuming [FF7], l#, 12# is set witi l#), for example. enter: To set toll restriction on extension port 60 (when the DBS is in the day setting) for central office line 10 to type 3. for . :; : example, enter: [FF7),6#,1#,5551212# - To assign 976- 12 12 as the second of 50 preset nuxnbers to be restricted from being dialed on a central office line set for toll restriction class 3 (assuming [FF7), l#, 13# is setwith l#). forexample, enter: m,6#, 2W.97612128 To reset anv of the 50 nreset restricted 7 digit numbers to the default initialized value. Dress lFF71.6#. (l-50)#. ICONFl, JON/OFFl. Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com To set toll restriction on extension port 22 (when the DBS is in the day setting) for central office line 5 to type 7, for example, enter: _ Iep71,7#,22#,5#,7# To reset central office toll restriction on am line on anv extension (when the DBS is in the dav setting). to the default initialized value. Dress iFF71. 7#. fl144)#. (l-64)#. 7#, lON/OFFk 157 section 400 FF7 Issue3July1993 This option provides the ability to take a single toll restriction class of service and apply it to all lines that appear on a specific extension, when the DBS is in the day setting. There are 7 types of toll restriction that can be used to curtail dialing of certain types of calls on a central office line. Seetheovemiewatthe nofsection3-7forareviewofeach type of toll mstriction. To set all lines that appear on extension port 14, when the DBS is in the day setting, to central of&e toll restrictfon class 4, for example, enter: IIfIF71,7#, 14#,65#,4# To reset the toll restriction on anv extension when the DBS is in the dav setting. to the default initialized value, press lFF41.7#. (l-1441#. 65#. 7#. ION/ OFFl. DB3Frogrammin~~~~ons CPGA3.0, CPGB / 2.0 / 3.0 / 4.0 There are 7 types of toll restricUon that can be used to mrtail dialing of certain types of calls on a central office lihe, when the DBS is in the night setting. Toll restriction is effective on a line by line basis, per extension. Seethe overview at the beginning of section 3-7 for a review of each type of toll restriction. To set toll resUicUon on extension port 50, central of&e line 11 (when the DBS is in the night setting) to type 3, for example, enter: m7l,8#,50#,11#,3# To set toll restriction on extension port 6, central of&e line 15 (when the DBS is in the night setting) to type 7, for example, enter: IFF7),8U,6#,15#,7# To reset central of&e toll restriction on anvline on anvextensionwhen the DBS is in the night setting. to the default initialized value. Dress lFF71. 8#. (l144M. IL-64M. 7#. ION/OFFl. The program option outlined above has an address specifically for CPC-B software versions. To perform the same task with WC-A software, the address is: [FM], 7#, (l-72)#. 33#, (0-7)#. 158 Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com /- section 400 FF7 Issue3July1993 DBSPro@ammh&jInstructio~ 3.0, CPC-B / 2.0 / 3.0 /4.0 CFCA/ c \ This option provides the ability to take a single toll restriction class of service and apply it to all lines that appear on a specific extension, when the DBS is in the night setting. There are 7 types of toll restriction that. can be -used to curtail diali.ngofcertaintypesofcallsonacentral office line. See the overview at the beginning of section 3-7 for a review of each type of toll restriction. To allow or restrict all area codes of each area code table of each toll restriction class of service to the same setting, this program option must be used. To set aJl lines that appear on extension port 31, when the DBS is in the night setting, to central oflice toll restxiction class 5. for example, enter: To restrict dialing to all area codes in the table that controls central office line toll restriction class 3, enter: To allow dialing to all area codes in the table that controls central office line toll restriction class 3, enter: [Irp'/l,9#,16,0# Iee7],9#,1#,1# IFF7],8#,31#,65#,5# ToresetthetollrestHctiononanve~tension whentheDBSisintheniQhtsetUng.tothe default initialized value. DIFSS f’FF41.8#. (I144]#. 65#. 7#. ION/OFFl. To allow dialing to all area codes in the table that controls central office line toll restriction class 4, enter: To restrict dialing to all area codes in the table that controls central ofhce line toll restriction class 4, enter: The program option outlined above has an address specifically for CPC-B software versions. To perform the same task with CPC-A software, the address is: [FF7], 8#. (l-72)++. 33#. (O- 7)#. Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com To allow dialing to all area codes in the table that controls central office line toll restriction class 5, enter: 159 Section DB!3Progfaxmhg~~tio1~ CPGA3.0. CPC-B / 2.0 /.3.0 400 FF7 laaue3July1993 / 4.0 f To restrict dialing to all area codes in the table that controls central office line toll restriction class 5, enter: To allow dialing to all area codes in the table that controls central office line toll restriction class 6, enter: To allow or restrict all o&e codes of each of&e code table of each toll restriction class of sewice to the same setting, this program option must be used. To allow dialing to all of&e codes in the table that controls central of&e line toll restriction class 3, enter: [p’esrl, 9#, 5#, O# To r&&& dialing to all area codes in the table that controls central ofike line toll restriction class 6. enter: To restrict dialing to all of&e codes in the table that controls central office line toll restriction class 3. enter: f Ir(le71,9#,5#,1# IFe7].9#,4#, l# . _. , Toresetthe~ohalareacodetollrekicUons forcentraloEkeIinessetasclasses3and4 to the defkult inWaked value. press iFF’?‘l. 9#. (1 or 21#. l#. ION/OFFS. To reset the piobal area codetoll restrictions forcentralofflixhwssetas&sses5and6 . to the defkult initiahzed value. DRSS m 9#. 13or 41#.O#. ION/OFFI. To allow dialing to all of&e codes in the table that controls central 0Bice line toll restriction class 4, enter: To restrict dialing to all of&e codes in the table that controls central office line toll restriction class 4, enter: (pIIr7.91y.66, ThisprogmmoptionistiedtotheSystem inst.&Won area code address, (FFl]. 2#. l#, 18#. To allow dialing to all office codes in the table that controls central o&e line toll restriction class 5, enter: FIT 9#,(1-4)# the l-4 represents types 3-6. 160 l# Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com DBS Pro@.ammhg CPGA/ section 400 FF7 Issue3July19fl3 Insbuctio~ 9.0, WC-B / 2.0 / 3.0 / 4.0 To restrict dialing to all office codes in the table that controls central office line toll restriction class 5, enter: [FF71,9#,7#, Toalloworrestrictallareaandofhcecodes of each toll restriction class of service to the same setting, this program option must be used. 1Q To allow dialing to all office codes in the table that controls central office line toll restriction class 6, enter: To allow dialing to all area and office codes in the tables that control central office line toll restriction class 3, enter: [FF71,9#,8#,0# To restrict dialing to all o&e codes in the table that controls central office line toll restriction class 6, enter: To restrict dialing to all area and office codes in the tables that control central of&e line toll restriction class 3, enter: --. ; :‘ rF-e71,9#*9#* To reset the global office code toll restrictions for central office lines set as tvne 3 to the default initialized value. Dress IFF71. 9#. (5 or 6M. I#, ]ON/OFFl. To reset the global office code toll restrictions for central office lines set as classes 4. 5 and 6 to the default initialized value. Dress IFF71.9#. 17or $I#. O#. fON/OFFl. This pro@m option is tied to the System instakUonareacodeaildress, FF1],2#, l#. 18#. Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com l# To allow dialing to all area and office codes in the tables that controls central office line toll restriction class 4. enter: wF7l,S#, lO#,O# To restrict dialing to all area and office codes in the tables that control central office line toll restriction class 4, enter: ~,9#,10#, 1w To allow dialing to all area and oEice codes in the tables that control central of&e line toll restriction class 5, enter: 161 section 400 FP7 DB3 Ro@am&q I.ustructio~ CPGA 3.0, CF’GB / 2.0 /.B.O / 4.0 Issue3July1993 To restrict dialing to all area and of&e codes in the tables that control central of&e line toll restriction class 5, enter: Fourspedalof3cecodetablesthataretied to four special area codes can be globally set to allow or restrict all of&e codes for each special area code, on central of&e lines set with toll restriction classes of service 3-6. To allow dialing to all area and office codes in the tables that control central office line toll restriction class 6. enter: To restrict all special office codes for the first “special area code” , enter: leP7],9#,12#, [FF71,9#,13#, ow To restrict dialing to all area and of&e codes in the tables that control central office line toll restriction class 6. enter: l# To allow all special office codes for the second “special area code” , enter: pw7],9#,12#,1# To reset the alobal area and of&e code toll restrictions for central ofIke lines set as classes 3 to the default initialized value. Dress IFF71. 9#. 9#. l#. ION/ OFFl. Tide 4 can not be returned to default values usin@ this Drogram. To reset the mobal area and office code toll restrictions for central office lines set as classes 5 and 6 to the default initialized value. Dress lFF7l. 9#. (11 or 12)#. O#. ION/OFFi. ‘Ihis program option is tied to the System installation area code program option, [FFl], To restrict all special of&e codes for the third “special area code” , enter: rFF7L 9#,15#,1# To allow all special office codes for the fourth “special area code” , enter: To reset all of&e codestied to swxial ama codes 1 & 2 for central of&e lines set as classes 3-6 to the default i.nitialized value, press lFF71.9#. (13or 141#.l#. lON/OFFl. To reset all of&e codestied to special area codes 3 & 4 for central of&e lines set as classes 3-6 to the default initialized value, press IFIV1.9#. (15or 16)#. O#. lON/OFFl. 2#, l#, 18#. F’F7 9#. (9-12) represents types 3-6. 162 Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com section400FF7 DBS Pro@=amming lnatructtonr CPC-A / 3.0, CPC-B / 2.0 / 3.0 / 4.0 FF7 9#, (13- 16) represents office code tables 1-4. Default values for special Special Special Special Special office oflice office office code code code code Imue3July1999 special office code tables table table table table 1 2 3 4 All Denied AU Denied All Allowed AllAllowed Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com 163 Sect.ion400 FFS DBS Rogmmmin~ Instruction July 1093 bsue3 WC-A / 3.0, CPGB / 2.0 /.3.0 / 4.0 LEAST COST ROUTING t-d Least cost routing is designed to route calls on central o&e lines that are supplied by speciffc carriers. By identifying a certain group of these lines along with a specific cost to place outbound calls on them during certain time periods of the day. a cost savings will accrue. Additionally, non dialed digits can be added or deleted from the prefI.x of the dialed string by the DBS. Call processing flow To determine how to route a specific number. this DBS program group uses 10 tables, each containing 1000 numbers. All tables are set up in the same manner. The tables are defined as Area Code, Office Code, 4 Special Area Code, and 4 Special Office Code tables. Each block in the table has an “z& block connected to it. This xx area is used to store the route table number (l- 15) that it’s pre& is to use. The pre& is a defined 3 digit area or o&e code, or 3 digit special office or area code numbers. An example of an LCR table is shown below. LCR Table The Special Area and Special OfRce code tables are designed for 6 digit LCR dialing analysis. The Office code table is used for all 7 digit dialing. One plus 7 digit dialing lxx 001 xx 011 xx 020 lxx # 021 etc. ~etc. etc. 960 007 xx 008 xx xx 017 xx +108 xx 004 xx 012 xx 014 zuc 015 ZM 016 xx 022 xx 024 xx 025 xx 026 0281 xx etc. etc. etc. etc. etc. etc. etc. etc. etc. etc. etc. etc. =tt xx 19611 xx etc. etc. etc. etc. etc. etc. etc. 962 xx 964 xx 965 xx 966 .xx xx 974 xx 975 xx 976 xx 19771 xx ,978( xx xx 1981) xx 984 xx 985 xx 986 xx 19871 xx 19881 xx xx 1991) xx 994 xx 995 xx 996 xx 1997) 19981 xx xx etc. TF xx xx xx I9711 005 xx 006 etc. I etc. I etc. 19671 xx xx I etc. etc. I etc. ‘968) xx etc. etc. etc. etc. 969 989 < searches the Area code table, or the Special office code tables, when the DBS program address [FFl], 2#, l#, 18#. is configured with a “1”. When this program address is improperly set, the LCR may search incorrect tables. 164 Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com Technical DBS Programming Instructions WC-A / 3.0, CPC-B / 2.0 / 3.0 / 4.0 Section400 Issue 3 July FFS 1993 After a specific number to be dialed has been identified in one of the tables above, the process proceeds to one of the 15 time priority route tables. If no time priority route table has been assigned to a specific 3 digit number or segment thereof, the call will exit LCR routing, and be placed on a pooled group “9” central office line. If all central office lines have been removed from the “9” pooled group the call will stop being processed, and the caller will receive a busy tone. groups a.rtz The 15 time priority route tables are used to determine which LCR w selected, and the priority on which those trunk groups are used. The “lookback” capability of the DBS provides for multiple searches of the highest priority line groups before lower priority groups are searched. The highest priority line group is initially chosen to route the call. If the line is available, the LCR add and-,.LCR delete tables associated with the central oflice line group are reviewed for additions or deletions to the dialed digit string. If no lines of the defined group are available. a warning tone is sent to the caller, a 2 second wait ensues. and the group is searched again. If a line is still unavailable, the second line group is accessed. This process continues until all 8 line groups in the priority are searched for an available line. In the event that all prioritized line groups are busy, caller can dial the digit 2. This procedure will enable a callback and a reservation of the first line in the group. When the DBS recalls the extension, the caller accessesa line, and the DBS will automatically redial the previously dialed number. Time Priority Route Guide Table (0-Z 5) older versions of software (WC-A, olderthan3.2 1, WC-B, older than 2.11). when LCR is used behind Centrex, special precautions are needed in the O&e Code table. -To+. ,:,. eliminate the need to dial a “9” before such numbers as 411. 555,91.1,800. and 0, there With weekend 44# 1 45# 1 46W 1 47# 48# are Oflice Code Table numbers that MUSTlVOTbe assigned to a time priority mute guide table. These numbers are 94 1,955,980, and 99 1. If OfEke Codes such as 94 1.955.99 1, and 980 are found in the locale that the DEE is installed in, it is recommended that LCR should not be used in combination with Centrex, or behind FBX applications. Further clari&ation of LCR operation maybe found inTechnote 5 (November 1991). and Appnote Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com 165 Section 400 FFS Issue 3 July 1993 WC-A When an outbound central o&e line is accessedto make a call, in a DBS set with Least Cost Routing, the DBS searches one of 15 preprogrammed routing tables for the least expensive central oflIce line, based on time of day and cost of the hne. Toll restriction settings for the line are checked, and the number is then outpulsed. DBS Pro@ammhq Instruction / 3.0, WC-B / 2.0 / 3.0 / 4.0 To remove 609 from time priority table four, for example, enter: Df’F8], l#, 4%. 609#, 08 To reset the LCRArea Code tables to the default initialized value. Dress IFF78L l#. (l-15)#. (OOO-999)#. O#. ION/OFFl. To add 203 to route. using time priority table 1, for example, enter: FFS], I#, I#, 2031, l# To add 5 16 to route, using lime priority table 2, for example. enter: [ee8], lW, 2W, 5166, l# To remove 409 from time priority table three, for example, enter: p7F8], lW, 31y.4091, O# The time priority route guide table option found at address: [FFS], 5#. (l-15)#, (l4$3)#,(l-8)#. must be set. Once a line has been accessed through LCR, the [FLASH] operation will not work. All area code numbers must be pointed td a specifh time priority table and enabled in order for LCR to automatically route the call. When executing changes in this address, a “1” entry signifies addition to the table, and a “0” signifies the o&e code is not part of the table. I 166 Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com DBSRo~ammingIns~ctions CFC-A / 3.0, WC-B / 2.0 / 3.0 / 4.0 When an outbound central office line is accessed to make a call, in a DES set with Least Cost Routing, the DBS searches one of 15 time priority routing tables for the least expensive central of&e line, based on time of day and cost of the line. Toll restrictionseUingsfortheknearechecked, and the number is then outpulsed. To use the fifth time priority route table for a call made to office code 222, for example, enter: fFFS], 2#, 5#, 222#, ! j 1W To use the sixth time route table for a call made to of&e code 546, for example. enter: cples], 2W, 66, 5461, l# To remove office code 999 from routing through the seventh time priority table, for example, enter: lFF8]* 2w, 7#, 999n, Section4OOFF8 Issue 3July1993 To remove of&e code 447 from routing through the eighth time priority table, for example, enter: [eesl, 2#, 8#, 447#, ‘o# To reset the LCR Office Code tables to the default initialized value. Dress IFF8L 2#. (l-151#. OXKb999)#. O#. lON/OFFI. The time priority route guide table option .. found at address: [FF8], 5#, (l-15)#, (l-48)#, (l-8)#. must be set. Once a line has been accessed through LCR the [FLASH] operation will not work. All office code numbers must be pointed to a specific time priority table and enabled in order for LCR to automatically route the call. ow When executing changes in this address. a ” 1” entry signifies addition to the table, and a “0” sigr&es the o&e code is not part of the table. Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com 167 . Section 400 Issue 3 Juiy FF8 1993 Four special area codes, designated as 1 through 4 in the address above, can be specially chosen for LCR routing. and tied to four special LCR of&e code tables to allow a broad range of numbers to be dialed by the least costly route. This operation keys off the first six digits dialed. where the first three digits represent an area code, and the second three digits represent an of&e code. To select area code 407 as the first “special LCR area code”, to be used for CPGA DBS Programming Instruction / 3.0, CPGB / 2.0 / 3.0 / 4.0 To reset the snecial LCR area code tables to the default initialized value. Dress ]FFSl. 3#. (l-4)#. (CONFl#. (ON/OFFl. ‘Thethe priority route guide table option found at address: [FF8], 5#, (l-15)#, (l48)#, (l-8)#. must be set. Once a line has been accessed through LCR, the [FLASH] operation will not work. LCR dialing for example, enter: [ees], 3#, I#, 407# To select area code 609 as the second “special LCR area code” to be used for LCR dialing for example, enter: [IrIF8]. 3#, 2#, 609# To select area code 404 as the third “special LCR area code” to be used for LCR dialing for example. enter: FF8]* 3#, 3#, 4048 To select area code 508 as the fourth “special LCR area code” to be used for LCR dialing for example, enter: PF8], 3W, 4#, 508U Four special office code tables, designated as 1 through 4 in the address above. can be tied to four special LCR area codes to allow up to 1000 office codes per special LCR area code to be dialed by the least cost routing. This operation keys off the first six digits dialed, where the first three digits represent an area code, and the second three digits represent an office code. To set special office code entry 1, time table 13 for office code 776 to be dialed on the least expensive route, for example, enter: lep8], 168 Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com 4#, l#, 13#, 7768, l# ’ DBS Ro@ammiq Inst~ctions cpc-A / 3.0, CPC-B / 2.0 / 3.0 / 4.0 To set special o&e code entry 2, time table 5 for office code 392 to be dialed on the least expensive route, for example, enter: ~F8],4#,2#y,5#,392#, i ' l# Section 400 FF8 lsstie 3 July 1993 Since central of&e line costs can vary by time of day, when least cost routing is being used outbound calls will be automatically placed on difkrent central office line groups depending on the time of day. This option provides for this. To set special ofke code entry 3, time table 15 for of&e code 248 to be dialed on the least expensive route, for example, enter: For example, to use time route table 1, priority 1, LCR line group 1 for outbound calls placed by the least cost routing method, enter: pF8],4#, pF8],5#, 3s. lS#, 248#, l# To reset the snecial LCR office code tables to the default initialized value, press lFF81. 4#. (l-4M. (l-15)#, fOOO999)#. O#. ION/OFFI. For ewmple, to use ‘time route table 2, priority 9, LCR line group 6 for outbound calls placed by the least cost routing method, enter: W8L When executing changes in this address, a “1” entry si@es addition to the table, and a “0” signifies the o&e code is not part of the table. l#, l#, l# 5#,2#,9#, 6# For example, to use time route table 15, priority 17, LCRline group 4foroutbound calls placed by the least cost routing method, enter: FF8], 5#, 15#, 17#,4# Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com 169 Section 400 Issue 3 July FFS 1993 WC-A DBS Ro@-ammin~ Instmctio~ / 3.0, CPGB / 2.0 / 3.0 / 4.0 /‘. To reset anv CO line DOLID Dosition in anv time Drioritv route table to the default initialized value. Dress IFF8L 5#. (l-15)#. (l-48)#. fCONF1. ION/OFFl. ’ The 15 time priority route tables are each divided into 6 preset time periods, with 8 priority positions in each time period for LCRhegroupassignme.nts.‘Ihesixpmset timepcriodsareasfollows: 1. 7:00 am to 7:59 am, positions 2. 8:00 am to 4:59pm positions 3. 5:00 pm to 7:59 pm, positions 4.8:OO pm to 11:59 am, positions 5.12:OO art-t to 6:59 am, positions 6. WEEKEND, positions 41-48 l-8 9-16 17-24 25-32 33-40 See feature options [FFl], 2#, l#. 3#, (System setting for LCR), and [FF8], 6#, &CR Trunk group table.) See Time Priority Route Guide Tables (1- 15), for priority numbers 1 through 48 on page 133. ‘Iheu.seofI.CRrequhspnxietermhed I.CR line @mp to be pri01MM awordhgto the cost of line(s).‘Ihe.xxare 8 gmups, and each group has 8 positions for central ofIke lines. Once the central oflice line priorities have bWle&lblish~these~Rgmups~ inserted in the time priority muk g&de tables, so that predetermined ER @oups willbeutilizeddurhgeachpresetthneperiod for outbound calling. To set up LCR group 1, position 1 with central office line 16. for example, enter: [eF8],6#, I#, I#, 16# To set up LCR group 2, position 1 with central o&e line 3, for example, enter: lFF8], 6#, 2#, lW, 36 To set up LCR group 3, position 2 with central office line 6, fdr example, enter: lFF81, 6#, 3#,2#,6# To set up L.CR group 4, position 5 with central of&e line 64, for example, enter: [ee81, 6W.4#, 5#,64# To set up LCR group 5, position 6 with central of&e line 12, for example, enter: F'FSI, 6#,5#, 170 Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com 6W, 12W Section4OOFF8 DBS Programming Inst~ctions WC-A / 3.0, CPGB / 2.0 / 3.0 / 4.0 To set up LCR group 6, position 5 with central of&e line 10, for example, enter: [IfIFs]. 6W, 6W. SW, 109 To set up LCR.group 7, position 1 with central of&e line 33, for example, enter: [FFS], 6#,7#. 1#,33# Issue 3 July 1993 The first digits in the dialed string that match the digits stored in the delete table are automatically deleted before dialing the telephone number. If LCR trunk group 1 is accessed, and the dial string is 1-212-666-1212 and l-2 12 should be deleted prior to dialing for example, enter: To set up ICR group 8, position 8 with central of&e line 60, for example, enter: [eesl, 7W, I#, 12124 pF8],6#, If LCR using trunk group 2 is designed to eliminate the first digit 1 in all area codes for example. enter: 8#,8#,60# To reset a nosition within an ICR central office line Q'~OUD to the default initialized setting. mess lFF81. 6#. (l-8)#. (l-W+, ]CONFl. ION/OFFl. See feature options [FFl], 2#, l#, 3#. (System setting for LCR), and (FF8], 6#, (LCR Trunk group table.) Trunks are selected in the order they are stored in the LCR trunk groups. To lower the possibility of call glare remember to place the trunks in reverse order. [FFs1,7#,2#, 16 If LCR trunk group 3 is used to route calls to a specific carrier and to prevent connection to another carrier such as 10288 for example, enter: [FFS), 7W.3W.102888 If LCR trunk group 4 is used behind centrex or a PBX and a digit 9 is automatically added (dial add table) you can eliminate incorrectly dialing the digit 9 twice by deleting the 9 each time it is dialed for example, enter: [IrIrs], 7w, 4#, 9# Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com 171 Secti0n400FF8 Issue 3 Juiy 1993 WC-A If LCR trunk group 5 is a direct Tl access line to another facility in a different area code such as 7 14, and the digit string 714 should not be dialed for example, enter: [eesl,7#, 5#, 714W To reset the LCR delete tables to the :, default initialized value, Dress lFF8L 7#. (l-8)#. ICONFl. ION/OFFl. .: DBS Rogrammb~ / 3.0. CPGB / lnst~~tions 2.0 / 3.0 /4.0 Digits in the dialed stringthat are needed to be outpulsed after a central of&e line has been seized (such as access codes), are automatically added before the dialed telephone number is outpulsed on the central of&e line. This option allows for the addition of digits. If LCR line group 1 is to be accessed. and the digit string 10288 is to be added before the dialed number is outpulsed for example. enter: @W8],8#, l#, 10288# ,. ^ Digit Delete Tables are matched to the LCR trunk groups. Each time one of these groups are accessed the dial delete table is checked. If LCR trunk group 2 is to be accessed, and you want to add the digit 1 before all long distance numbers dialed for example, enter: lees], SW, 2#, l# If LCR trunk group 3 is to be accessed, and the digit 9 is to be added before the dialed number is outpulsed for example, enter: P'FS], 8#, 3#, 9# If LCR trunk group 4 is to be accessed, and the digit string 8 is to be added before the dialed number is outpulsed for example. enter: [FF81, SW, 4U, SW 172 Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com , I DBS Programming Instructions CPC-A / 3.0, CPC-B / 2.0 / 3.0 / 4.0 Section 400 FFS Issue 3 July 1993 To reset the LCR add tables to the default initialized value. Dress rFF8L 8#. (l-8)#. lCONF1. ION/OFFl. .‘. If digits are being added and deleted from the same CO line group. the DBS will delete digits first, then add digits. 5 , Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com 173 section 400 Issue 3 July , FFQ 1993 3-9 DBS Ro@ammiq Instructione WC-A 3.0, CPGB / 2.0 / 3.0 / 4.0 / COPY PROGRAM SETTINGS To copy all the attributes of one central office line to another, this option is used. Copying must be done on aline by line basis. The first line number of this address is the source line being copied, the second line number is the target destination. To copy the attributes of central office line port 1 to that of central office line port 5, for example, enter: To copy aJlthe attributes of one extension to another, this option is used. Copying must be done on an extension by extension basis. The first extension port number of this address is the source extension being copied, the second extension port number is the target destination. To copythe attributes oftiension port 10 to that of extension port 5. for example, enter: IFF9J,2#,10#,5## To copy the attributes of central office line port 7 to that of central office line port 3, for example. enter: To copy the attributes ofmension port70 to that of extension port 3, for example, enter: p9],1#.7#,3## pF9]* 2#,70#,3## There is no default initialized value for this ontion. There is no default initialized value for this Using this address to copy central office line attributes results in the copying of all attributes for the line except the private line attribute. lke second # a&r the second central oflIce lineentxyisapartoftheproglamsequence, which confhns the copy action. ODtion. Using this address to copy extension attributes results in the copying of all attributes including toll restriction for an extension except the extension number, telephone type, station lock-out code, and EM 24 port number (BLF port setting). The second # after the second extension entry is a part of the program sequence. which confIrms the copy action. 174 Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com Technical f DBS Programming Instruction WC-A / 3.0 CPGB / 2.0 / 3.0 / 4.0 To copy all the attnbtrtes of one extensions LED FF keys to another, this option is used. Copying must be done on an extension by extension basis. The first extension port number of this address is the FF key source extension being copied, the second extension port number istheFFkeytargetextensionportnumber. To copy the LED FF key attributes of extension port 2 to that of extension port 5, for example, enter: [pF9]*3#,2#,5## section 400 FF9 Issue 3 July 1992 When copying the FF keys of a phone to another that is in the default condition, the originally assigned keys must first be cleared. This is done in address [FFS], (l-144)#, (l-24)#. A quick way to accomplish copying the same FF key settings (that are diBerent than the default settings) is to go to the FF5 addressindicated above, and clear all keys. Then copy the cleared keys to all other extensions with address [FW], 3#.Return to the (FF5], (l-144)#, (1-24)# address and create the key configuration desired. Finally, return to [FF9], 3#, and copy those features to all extensions. To copy the LED FF key attributes of extension port 6 to that of extension port 10, for-example, enter: Dres],3#,6#, lO## There is no default initialized value for this ontion. The options to the FF key copypro@am arethatoNLytheLEDFFkeypn@xmMg canbecopied.NonLEDFFkeysettingswill not be copied. The second # after the second extension entry is a part of the program sequence, which conGms the copy action. Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com 175 Section 400 Issue 3 July FFlO 1993 3- 10 SYSTEM AND PERSONAL SPEED DIAL, SETTINGS The storage of up to 90 speed dial numbers for use by designated DBS extension users are set in this feature option. To set the telephone number (203) 555-1212, in system speed dial bin number 00, for example. enter: EFlO], lW, OOW, 2035551212% To set the telephone number (800) 555-1212, in system speed dial bin number 64, for example, enter: WFlO], l#, 64#,8005551212# To set the telephone number (203) 555-1212, in system speed dial bin number 00. for example, enter: EFlO], I#, OO#, 20355512121 To set the telephone number (404) 555- 1212. in system speed dial bin number 44, for example, enter: [FFlO], DBS Programming Instructions CPC-A / 3.0, CPCB / 2.0 /3.0 /4.0 I systemspeeddialnumberswiIldisplayon largediSp~~OrleSiIl*~tiCalOIdff. Abkrckof~speeddialnumbemcanbe restricted from general use. To aeate this partition, seeffzatuteoptionFFl], 2#, l#, 4#. To restrict the display of system speed dial numbers, see[FFl], 2#, l#, 5#. To&large displaytelephonestodisplay5orlOsystem speeddial numbem, seeml], 2#, 19#. To storeanassociatednameforasystemspeed dialnumber seelFl%),2#. (00-89)#. IfaDSS consoleis availablefw m it is possible to assign a central office line group as part of a system speed dial number. To make use of this capability, insertaC asthefirstcharacterofthespeed dialbin,followedby1-6todesignatetheline group number. A 9 can also be used to accessthe pooled line capahilty. The C is required for an SLT to use SSD. A P will insert a pause, complete the entry with the COMPLETE number as it would be dialed if manuaJly done. The following keys perform the indicated functions for the programming of speed dial numbers: lW, 44#, 4045551212# To reset a svstem speed dial bin to the default initialized value. Dress, JFFlOl. I#. (OO-891#. fCONF1. ION/ OFF1 . [COW, on the phone clears entered data 1X-1,on the DSS backspaces iBS], on the DSS backspaces [->I, on theDSS forward spaces P, pauses EXAMPLE: C 1P555 12 12 will access line group 1, then pause, then dial 555-1212. 176 Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com Technical DBS Programming Instructiona WC-A / 3.0 CPC-B / 2.0 /3.0 The storage ofup to 10 personal speed dial numbers for use by each DBS extension user are set in this feature option. To set the telephone number (203) 555- 12 12 for extension port 20, in personal speed dial bin number 90, for example, enter: FFlO], 2#, 2OW. 90#,2035551212# To set the telephone number (800) 555-1212, for extension port 140, in personal speed dial bin number 95, for example, enter: F‘FlO], 2#, 140#,95#. Section 400 FFlO Issue 3 July 1993 /4.0 8005551212W To reset a oersonal sneed dial bin to the default initialized value. Dress, JFFlOl. 2%. (l-144lW. I90-991#. ICONFL JON/OFFl. Personal speed dial numbers will display on large display telephones in alphabetiti order. CPC-B software version 2.00 requires the use of a large display telephone on port 1. in order for the personal speed dial keys to function. WC-B soflsvare newer than version 2.05, allows personal speed dial key operation with the use of any model telephone. SeeTechnotes 10 & 12(March 1992)forcompletetionnation. Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com Apersonalspeeddialnumbercanonlybe usedbylheMensionportitisseton.Toset large display telephones to display 5 or 10 personal speed dial numbers, see [FF3], (l-144)#, 17#. Tostoreanassociatednameforapersonal speeddial number, see (FFG),3#, (l-144)#, (9&99)#. IfaDSSconsolefsavaiWleforp it is possible to assign a central o&e line group as part of a personaI speed dial number. To make use of this capability, insert a C as the first character of the __. speed dial bin, foIlowedby l-6 to designate thelinegroupnumber.A9canalsobeused toaccessthepooledlinecapabil~. TheC isrequired for an SLT to use SSD. A P will fns&apause.completetheentrywiththe COMPLEIEnumberasitwouldbedialedif manually done. The followfng keys perform theindicatedfforthep~ . ofspeeddialnumbersz EXAMPIES: ClP5551212will accesshnegroup81,then pause, then dial 555-1212. C9P120155512i2, willaccess pooled line group 9, then pause. then dial 1 (201) 555-1212. 177 Preface Preface CPC-B - VERSIONS 1.0 and 2.0 There are now two versions of DBS CPC-B. CPC-B, Version 2.0 (DBS III) has many new or improved features. Included in this publication new programming are addresses as well as addresses for CPC-B, Version 1.O (Enhanced DBS). See DBS Progr atnming other programming Insi~uction.s, Section 400, for addresses: Page 1 Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com Issue 1 September Addendum to the DBS Programming 1991 Instructions Section 400B CPC-B Versions 1 .Oand 2.0 Contents Preface 1 CF’C-B V2.0 - Data Tables 9 CPC-B Vl .O - Data Tables Vl .O 2 FF 1 Key - System Programming V2.0 13 FF 1 Key - System Programming Vl .O 3 FF 2 Key - Trunk Programming V2.0 18 FF 2 Key - Trunk Programming Vl .O FF4 Key - Ring Assignment and Hunt Groups Vl .O 6 FF 3 Key - Extension Programming V2.0 FF 4 Key - Ring Assignment and Hunt Groups V2.0 21 FF 5 Key - Flexible Feature Key Assignment V1.0 8 FF 5 Key - Flexible Feature Key Assignment V2.0 FF 6 Kev. - Name Assinnment V2.0 28 31 7 Index Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com 23 32 CPC-B WI.o DATATABLES Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com Initial / ‘i Initial Settings - Data Tables, Settings FF I KEY - System Default Programming 3 l-2#-l#-22#-(0 or l-15)# Attendant overflow l-2#-l#-23#-(0 or l)# Delayed-ring l-2#-2#-lO#-(0 or l)# RAl baud capability rate switch 8 calls 3 Disable 3 1200 baud 4 5 FFl-3X- 1 Page 3 FFl-2#- ,i’ ’ 3 V1.0 1.0 Version Feature AddreSS - Data Tables l-3#-20#-(0 or l-8)# Outbound l-3#-21#-(0 or l-8)# incoming FF 2 KEY - Trunk ground ground detection detection timer timer 4 seconds 5 4 seconds 5 Programming 6 FF22-(Ol-64)#-21#-(0 6 or l)# FF 4 KEY - Ring Assignment Loop-start/ground-start and Hunt switch Loop-start Groups 6 7 FF4- 7 4-5#-(OOl-145)#-(Ol-64)#-(0 or l)# Daytime 4-6#-(OOl-145)#-(Ol-64)#-(0 or l)# Nighttfme FF 6 Key - Flexible Key Asignment Feature delayed-ring delayed-ring tables No ring 7 No rFng 7 8 FFS5-(145-148)#-(Ol-72)#-CONF-Code# tables 8 DSS/72/BLF Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com consoles 8 Page2 FF 1 KEY SYSTEMPROGRAMMING “-:._“: VI ‘0 Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com FF 1 Key System Programming COMMON SYSTEM ATTENDANT i\ No stacked 1 call 2 calls 3 calls 4 calls 5 calls 6 calls 7 calls 8 calls 9 calls 10 calls 11 calls 12 calls 13 calls 14 calls 15 calls NOTE: or l-15)# calls Determines the maxImum number of incoming calls The that can be stacked to the frost attendant. overflow calls are transferred to other stations set in the delayed-ring tables. 9 Attendant overflow is available only in CPC-B. Version Version 2.0 does not have this feature. DELAYED-RING FFl-2f-l&239-(0 g#: Disable l#: Enable SETTINGS OVERFLOW FFl-2#-l#-22#-(0 0#: l#: 2#: 3#: 4#: 5#: 6#: 7#: j3#: 9#: lO#: ll#: 12#: 13#: 14#: 15#: V1.0 1 .O. CAPABILITY or l)# If there is no answer at an extension set to ring in the extension-ring tables, the call can also ring at an extension set in the extension delayed-ring tables if the system is set up for it. This setting enables the system to program delayed-ring tables. See the section on Delayed-Ring Tables under FF 4 Keu Rina Assianment and Hunt Gtourq elsewhere in this manual. Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com Page 3 FF 1 Key System Programming COMMON SYSTEM V1.0 SETTINGS RAIBAUDRATESWlTCH FFl-2#-2X-10%-(0 or l)# O#: 300 Baud (RN-A or RAI-B) l#: 1200 Baud IRAI-Bl The baud rate that serves the system’s remote administration capability can be switched to either 300 or 1200 baud when the RAI B card is installed . The settings for Data Length and Stop-Bit Length are the sane for both TTY and FM. However, the No Parity Check setting is always fixed on the RAI regardless of the TIY settings. Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com Page 4 FF 1 Key System Programming DETECTION OUTBOUND V1.0 TIMERS GROUND DETECTION FFl-3620#-(0 TIMER or l-8)# The system sends a ground signal to .the ground-start trunk and wafts for a return ground signal from the telephone company’s central office. 0#: l#: 2#: 3#: 4#: 5#: 6#: 7#: 8#: No detection 1 second 2 seconds 3 seconds 4 secon& 5 seconds 6 seconds 7 seconds 8 seconds The returning ground timer and the system If a return ground regards the trunk tone to the caller. To activate ground-start Install INCOMING O#: l#: 2#: 3#: 4#: 5#: 6#: 7#: 8#: No detection 1 second 2 seconds 3 seconds 4 seconds 5 seconds 6 seconds 7 seconds 8 seconds signal activates the detection starts the outgoing process. signal is not detected. the system as unavailable and sends a busy the Detection Timer. set the loop-start/ switch at ground start. loop-start/ground-start GROUND DETIXTION FFl-3#-21#-(0 or l-8)# trunk card VB4353 1. TIMER The time between detection of a ground signal on a ground-start trunk coming from the central office during the idle state and the start of a call process can be programmed. At the moment the ground signal is detected. the line LED on the key set will turn red indicating that the trunk is in use, even though the call has not yet been processed. To activate ground-start Install the Detection Timer. set the loop-start/ switch at ground-start. loop-start/ground/start Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com tnmk card VD-43531. Page 5 FF 2 KEY TRUNKPROGRAMMING VI .o Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com FF 2 Key Trunk Programming V1.0 SWITCHES LOOP-START/GROUND-START SWITCH FF2-(Ol-64)#-21%-(0 or l)% O#: Loowstart trunk l#: Ground-start trunk Trunk-by-trunk switching for either the loop-start or ground-start circuit allows a flexible trunk setup between the two trunks. When the ground-start trunk is enabled, check the parameters for the Outbound Ground Detection Timer and the Inbound Ground Detection Timer. Install loop-start/ground-start Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com trunk card V-B-4353 1. Page 6 FF 4 KEY il ) RINGASSIGNMENT AND HUNTGROUPS VI .o Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com FF 4 Key Ring Assignment and Hunt Groups V1.0 DELAYED-RING DAYTIME DEWIYED-RXNG FF4-5#-(OOl-145)#-(01-64)#-(0 0#: No rim TABLES TABLE!3 or l)# Assigned extensions will ring at this table when there is no answer at the extensions assigned to the Daytime CO-Line Ring Tables. sim& l#: Ring signal Port 145 Is for Universal Night Answer KJNAI NIGHTTIME DELAYED-RING FF4-6#-(OOl-145)#-(01-54)#-(0 0#: No rim2 simal l#: Ring signal TABLES or 1)# Assigned extensions will ring at this table when there is no answer at the extensions assigned to the Nighttime CO-Line Ring Tables. Port 145 is for Universal Night Answer (UNAI Page 7 Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com FF 5 KEY FLEXIBLEFEATUREKEY PROGRAMMING VI .o Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com FF 5 Key Flexible Feature Assignment V1.1) DSS/72/BLF FF 5 KEY ASSIGNMENT’ FF5-(14%148)#-(01-24) CONF: Clears d& Code#: See Section 700. DBS Proammmfnc~ Insfructio~ . under “FF 5 Key Mode” for codes. CONSOLES FOR DSS/72/BLF or (Ol-72)#-CONF- CONSOIZS Code# Dedicated trunk lines (01-64) or pooled trunk lines (81-86.89) can only be stored on the first 24 FF keys (0 l-24). A other codes can be stored in any of the 72 FF keys (01-72). 145: DSS 1 for First Attendant 146: DSS 2 for First Attendant 147: DSS 1 for Second Attendant 148: DSS 2 for Second Attendant Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com Page 8 CPC-B v2.0 DATATABLES Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com Initial \ Initial Settings Address - Data Tables, Version Feature Settings - Data Tables V2.0 2.0 Default Page FF I KEY - System Programming 13 FFl-2#-l#- 13 _- 1-2#- l#-24#-CONF-( 101-699/l l-69+0 Second attendant 101 13 l-2#-l#-25#-CONF-(101-699/l l-69#) Third attendant CONF 13 l-2#- l#-26#-CONF-( 101-699/l l-69#) Fourth attendant CONF 13 l-2#-l#-27#-CONF-(lOl-699/11-69#) Attendant transfer extension number CONF 14 l-2#- l#-28#-(0 or l)# Attendant override switch Enable 14 l-2#- l#-29#-(0 or l)# AIM key LED Lights 15 l-2+ l#-30#-(0 or l)# Extension delayed-ring capability Noring 15 16 FFl-3#- l-3#-22#-(0 or l-12)# Att. intercom hold-recall timer 20 seconcjs 16 l-3#-23#-(0 or l-12)# Ext. intercom hold-recall timer 140 seconds 16 l-3#-24#-(0 or l-12)# Att. intercom transfer-recall timer 20 seconds 17 l-3#-25#-(0 or l-12)# Ext. intercom transfer-recall timer 140 seconds 17 Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com Page 9 Initial Initial Settings - Data Tables, FF 2 KEY - Trunk Version Feature Address Settings - Data Tables V2.0 2.0 Default Page Programming 18 FF2-(01-64)- 18 2-(Ol-64)#-21#-(O-2)# Loop-start/ground-start/did loop-start 18 2-(Ol-64)#-22#-(0 or l)# DID - immediate or wink start Wink 19 2-(Ol-64)#-23#-(0-15)# Wink-start timer 200 milliseconds 19 2-(Ol-64)#-24%(0 or l-15)# Dial time out for digits 18 seconds 20 2-(Ol-64)#-2%(O-15)# DID interdigit dial time out 80 milliseconds 20 FF 3 KEY - Extension Programming 21 FF3-(001-144)X- 21 3-(OOl-144)#-2#-(0 or l-19)# Telephone types 3-(OOl-144)#-34#-(0 or l)# Extension directory display 3-(OOl-144)#-35#-@OOO-9999)# DID dial outside tel. number 3-(OOl-144)#-36#-(0-2)# 21 Displays 5 extensions 21 0000 22 Ringback tone with busy signal RE3Twith busy signal Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com 22 Page 10 Initial Initial Settings - Data Tables, Settings - Data Tables V2.0 Version Feature Address FF 4 KEY - Ring Assignment 2.0 Default and Hunt Groups 23 FF4-16 23 4-l#-(151-158)#-(Ol-64)#-(0 or l)# Hunt-group daytlme CO-line ring tables No W 4-2#-(151-158)#-(Ol-64)#-(0 or W Hunt-group nighttime CO-line ring tables No ring 23 24 FF4-3#- Hunt-group pilot ext. number No assignment 24 4-3#-( l-8)#-2#-(0-2)# Hunt-group search niethods Terminal 24 4-3#-(l-8)#-3#-(0 or lOO-699/ lo-69)# Transfer extension number No assignment 25 4-3#-( l-8)#-4#-(2-32)# Transfer timer 2 seconds 25 No assignment 25 4-3#-(l-8)#-l#-(0 or 101-699/l l-69)# ,’ ! 23 23 FF4-2#- ( Page 4-3#-( l-8)#-(5-12)#-(0 or lOO-699/ lo-69)# Hunt-group extension (l-8) 26 FF4-5#4-5#-(151-158)#-(Ol-64)#-(0 or l)# Hunt-group daytime delayed ring tables Noring 27 FF4-6X4-6#-(151-158)#-(Ol-64)#-(0 or 1)s Hunt-group nighttime delayed ring tables No ring Extension-ring tables Norfng 27 27 FF4-8#4-8#-(OOl-144)#-(OOl-144)#-(0 or l)# 27 27 FF4-7#4-7#-(OOl-144)#-(OOl-144)#-(0 or l)# 26 Extension delayed-ring tables Noring 27 Page 11 Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com Initial Initial Settings - Data Tables, Settings - Data Tables V2.0 Version 2.0 Feature Address Default Page FF 6 KEY - Flexible Feature Key Assignment 28 FF5- 28 Extensions 28 5-(CKIl-144)#-(Ol-24)#-CONF-(PROG 5-(OOl-144)#-(Ol-24)#-CONF-(PROG lo-69/1OO-699#) EL/ML keys or (81-86, PROG xmzxx#) or (xxxxxx#) hy key/Pre-programmed 89#) codes CONF 28 CONF 28 DSS/BLF Console 5-( 145- 148)#-(Ol-24)#-CONF-(PROG 5-( 145- 148)#-(01-72)#-CONF-(PROG Attendant 29 lo-69/ lOO-699#) EL/ML keys or (8 l-86, 89#) CONF PROG xxxxxx#) or (xxxxm#) Any key/Pre-programmed codes CONF Console 5-(149-152)#-(Ol-32)#-CONF-(PROG 5-(149-152)#-(Ol-32)#-CONF-(PROG lo-69/100-699#) EL/ML keys or (81-86. PROG ===#I (xxxxxx#) Any key/Pre-programmed 89#) codes CONF 30 CONF 30 FF 6 KEY - Name Assignment 31 FF6-51 31 6-5%(Ol-64)#-CONF-(XSXXX#) CO-trunk-line name assignment CONF 31 pilot name assign. CONF 31 FF6-6t 6-6#-( l-8)#-CONF-(w#) Hunt-group Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com Page 12 FF 1 Key System Programming i \ MULTI-LINE V2.0 KEY FEATURES Attendants When all the multi-line keys on the first attendant’s telephone are busy, a call will transfer in sequence to the second, third and fourth attendant. If all four attendants are busy, the call will transfer to a preset destination which must be a real extension number, such as a single-line telephone, answering machine or other single-line device. The transfer-destination extension cannot be a pilot number. 101: Second atte ndant 10 l-699/ l l-69#: Extension number COW No third attendant lOl-699/ 1 l-69#: Extension number SECOND ATTENDANT EXTENSION NUMBER FFl-2#-l#-24%CONF-(101-699/11-69X) THIRD ATTENDANT EXTENSION NUMBER FFl-2#-l#-25#-CONF-(lOl-699/11-69#) CONF: No fourth attendant lOl-699/ 1l-69#: Extension number FOURTH ATTENTUSNT EXTENSION NUMBEF FFl-2X-l#-26#-CONF-(lOl-699/11-69%) Page 13 Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com FF 1 Key System Programming MULTI-LINE V2.0 KEY FEATURES Attendants ATTENDANT TRANSFER FFl-2#-l#-27X-CONF-( CONE No extension number 10 l-699/ 1 l-69#: Transfer extension NOTE: EXTENSION 101-699/ number NUMBER 1 l-69#) If the attendants are busy, the system will transfer the call to the attendant transfer extension number. The transfer extension should be a reaI extension. It cannot be a piIot extension ATTENDANT’ OVERRIDE FFl-2X-1X-28U O#: Disable l#: Enable Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com f number. SWITCH 0 or l)# If the attendant tries to override a call once the system is set for Attendant Oven-ide Disable, a busy tone will sound. Page 14 FF 1 Key System Programming COMMON SYSTEM V2.0 SETTINGS ALMKEYLED FFl-2X-1X-29#-(0 The Alarm (ALM) key on the Attendant Console will either light or not light with this setting. O#: Does not light l#: Li@hts EXTENSION (BUSY LAMP FIELD) FFl-2#-l#-30#-(0 i \ O#: NQ l#: Yes OX 1)X DELAYED-RING CAPABILITY or l)# When there is no answer at the extensions set in the extension ring tables, calls are distributed to other extensions set in the extension delayed-ring tables. See the section on DelayedRing Tables under FF 4 K&y . ma Assianment an4 in Hunt GIVUDS elsewhere this manual. Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com Page 15 FF 1 Kev Svstem Programming MULTI-LINE Intercom Intercom-Recall V2.0 KEY FEATURES Recall Timers Timers are a new feature for the DBS system Intercom HOLD-Recall Timers If a held intercom call does not respond after a preset time, a recall signal will sound. The time for the begining of the signal is programmable. The Attendant and the Extensions each set separately. 0#: No intercom-HOLD l#: 2#: 3#: 4#: 5#: 6#: 7#: 8#: 9#: lO#: 1 l#: 12#: 20 seconds 40 seconds 60 seconds 80 seconds 100 seconds 120 seconds 140 seconds 160 seconds 180 seconds 200 seconds 220 seconds 240 seconds 0#: l#: 2#: 3#: 4#: 5#: 6#: 7#: 8#: 9#: lO#: 1 l#: 12#: No intercom-HOLD 20 seconds 40 seconds 60 seconds 80 seconds 100 seconds 120 seconds 140 seco rids 160 seconds 180 seconds 200 seconds 220 seconds 240 seconds are recall Attendant INTERCOM FFl-3X-22+(0 HOLD-RECALL TIMER or 1-12)X recall Extensions INTERCOM FFl-3#-23#-(0 HOLD-RECALL TIMER or l-12)# Page 16 Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com : , FF 1 KEY SYSTEMPROGRAMMING v2.0 Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com FF 1 Key System Programming t’ MULTI-LINE ‘\ Intercom Intercom V2.0 KEY FEATURES Recall Timers Transfer-Recall Timers If a transferred intercom call does not respond after a preset time, a recall signal will sound. The time for the begining of the signal is programmable. The Attendant and the Extensions each set separately. i \ O#: J#: 2#: 3#: 4#: 5#: 6#: 7#: 8#: 9#: lO#: 1 l#: 12#: O#: l#: 2#: 3#: 4#: 5#: 6#: 7#: 8#: 9#: lO#: 1 l#: 12#: No intercom-transfer 20 seconds 40 seconds 60 seconds 80 seconds 100 seconds 120 seconds 140 seconds 160 seconds 180 seconds 200 seconds 220 seconds 240 seconds No intercom-transfer 20 seconds 40 seconds 60 seconds 80 seconds 100 seconds 120 seconds 140 secon& 160 seconds 180 seconds 200 seconds 220 seconds 240 seconds are Attendant recall INTERCOM FFl-3X-24X-(0 recall TRANSFER-RECALL TIMER or l-12)# Extensions INTERCOM TRANSFER-RECALL FFl-3#-25#-(0 Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com TIMER or l-l2)# Page 17 FF 2 KEY TRUNK PROGRAMMING v2.0 Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com FF 2 Trunk TRUNK Prograryming V2.0 CARDS LOOP-START/GROUND-START/DIRECT-IN-DIAL TRUNK CARDS FF2-(Ol-f34)#-21X-(O-2)# There are three types of trunks: Ground-start and Direct-in-Dial Ok L.ooD-start trunk l#: Ground-start trunk 2% DID trunk Loop-start. (DID). When installing a DID trunk. check the parameters for Immediate or Wink start. Also check the parameters for the Wink-Start Timer, Dial Time Out for Digits and the DID Interdigit Dial Time Out. See also following Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com pages. Page 18 FF 2 Key Trunk DIRECT-IN-DIAL DID - IMMEDIATE V2.0 (DID) OR WINK FF2-(Ol-64)#-22%(0 Programming START 1 or l)% Start - After comxcting with a distant switching system. the DBS system will wait 65 milliseconds before accepting the digits of a dialed number. Immediate Q#: Wink start l#: Immediate start WinIs Start - The DBS system waits for a momentary signal hink~ before accepting the digits of a dialed number. WIN-K-START TIMER 0#: 140 milliseconds l#: 2#: 3#: 4#: 5#: 6#: 7#: 8#: 9#: lO#: 1 l#: 12#: 13#: 14#: 15#: 160 180 200 220 240 260 280 300 200 200 200 200 200 200 200 msec msec msec: msec msec msec msec msec msec msec msec msec msec msec msec 1 Maximum accepting amount of time the system waits before the digits of a dialed number. Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com Page 19 FF 2 Kev Trunk Programming DIRECT-IN-DIAL DIAL TIME V2.0 (DID) OUT FOR DIGITS FF2-(Ol-64)%-24#-(0 or l-15)% O#: No time out l#: 15 seconds 2#: 3#: 4% 5#: 6#: 7#: 8#: 9#: lO#: ll#: 12#: 13#: 14#: 15#: 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 18 18 18 18 18 18 18 seconds seconds seconds seconds seconds seconds seconds seconds seconds seconds seconds seconds seconds seconds Maximum amount of time before a time-out signal. indicating an incomplete dialed number. is sent from the telephone company’s central office. DID INTERDIGIT DIAL TIME OUT FF2-(01-64)#-25t-(O-15)W 0#: l#: 2#: 3#: 4#: 5#: 6#: 7#: 8#: 9#: O#: l#: 2#: 3#: 4#: 5#: 30 milliseconds 40 msec 50 msec 60 msec 70 msec 80 mseg 90 msec 100 msec 110 msec 120 msec 130 msec 140msec 150 msec 160 msec 160 msec 160 msec Sets the amount of time for dialing each digit before a time-out signal is sent from the telephone company’s central office indicating an incomplete dialed number. Page 20 Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com FF 3 KEY EXTENSION PROGRAMMING v2.0 Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com FF 3 Kev Extension Programming EXTENSION PROGIMMMING TELEPHONE TYPES FF3-(001-144)X-2%-(0 Ok No assignment l#: Analog telephone 2#: Digital telephone (FF 6 key) 3#: Digital telephone (FF 12 key) 4#: Digital telephone (FF 24 key) 5#: Reserved 6#: Reserved 7#: EM/24 W-43310 8#: OPX (pulse) 9#: OPX (tone) lO#: Voice mail &EC) 1 l#: DSSl - Extension lOO/ 10 12#: DSS2 - Extension lOO/lO 13#: DSS3 - Extension 10 l/ 11 14#: DSS4 - Extension 101/l 1 15#: Voice mail (OPXI CPGB, 16#: 17#: 18#: 19#: Version V2.0 or l-19)% . Stores telephones in the system. 2.0 First attendant console Second attendant console Third attendant console Fourth attendant console EXTENSION DIRECTORY FF3-(OOl-144)#-34#-(0 O#: DisDlavs l#: Displays 5 extensions 10 extensions DISPLAY or l)# Extension directory display on a large-screen display telephone. Page 21 Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com FF 3 Key Extension Programming DIRECT-IN-DIAL DID DIAL OUTSIDE V2.0 i\ -*. (DID) TELEPHONE NUMBER FF3-(OOl-144)#-35#-(0000-9999)# QOOO#: Default 0000-9999#: Outside telephone RINGBACK number A signal is sent from the DID CO-trunk line to the DBS system and converted to a DBS extension number. The parameters represent the last four digits of the DID outside telephone number. TONE WITH RINGBACK TONE WITH BUSY SIGNAL BUSY SIGNAL FF3-(OOl-144)#-36#-(0-2)X Q#: Rirwback tone with busv siQnd l#: Busy signal 2#: Ringback tone Sets ringback tone on a busy Multi-Line key. A caller ringing in on a busy multi-line key will hear the tone set by this address. This tone can also be set to a Voice-Mail Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com port. Page 22 FF 4 KEY RING ASSIGNMENTAND HUNTGROUPS v2.0 Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com FF 4 Key Ring Assignment and Hunt Groups V2.0 ( ) RING ASSIGNMENT AND HUNT GROUPS In the DBS system, you can have up to eight hunt groups with a maximum of eight extensions plus a pilot extension number in each group. The pilot extension number is not receiver of incoming ring signals. reaches the hunt group through the then rings at the frost free extension to the hunt-group search method. a real extension, but a Once the ring signal pilot number, the signal in the group according Seefollowing page. INCOMING CO-LINE RING SIGNAL TO A HUNT GROUP CO-line ring signals are set in Day Ring. Night Ring, Day Delayed-Ring and Night Delayed-Ring tables. You can set a ring signal for each hunt-group pilot number (15 1- 158) and each CO Iine (01-64). HUNT-GROUP DAYTIME RING TABLES CO-LINE RING TABLE3 FF4-l%-(151-158)#-(01-64)#-(0 Q#: No ring simd l#: Ring signal Sets the hunt-group NIGHTTIME CO-LINE FFQ-P%-(El-1581%(01-64)#-(0 Q#: No rim signal l#: Ring signal Sets the hunt-group Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com or 1)# pilot numbers for daytime ring. RING TABLES or 1)X pilot numbers for nighttime ring. Page23 FF 4 Key Ring Assignment and Hunt Groups V2.0 HUNT-GROUP PILOT EXTENSION FF4-3#-(1-8)#-l#-(0 O#: No Assi~men~ 101-699/l l-69#: Extension PROGRAMMING NUMBER GROUP or lOl-699/11-69)# Pilot extension number HUNT-GROUP FOR A HUNT SEARCH number in a hunt group. METHODS FF4-3X-(l-8)#-2#-(O-2)1 There Q#: Terminal 1 #: Distributed 2#: Longest Idle are three types of hunt groups: Terminal Begins its search with the pilot number and then moves through the eight extension numbers, in sequence. before transferring after a set time to the pilot number of the next hunt group. Distributed Distributes calls through the pilot number based on which extension in the group received a call in the last search. The next extension in sequence receives the new call. Longest Idle Searches through the pilot number for an extension in the group which has Page Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com 24 FF 4 Key Ring Assignment HUNT-GROUP TRANSFER FF4-3#-( and Hunt Groups V2.0 PROGWiMMING EXTENSION l-8)#-3#-(0 NUMBER or lOO-699/10-69)# I ._ _ ..: : . D#: No assirmment lOO-699/ lo-69#: Extension Once a ring signal ends its search in a hunt group, it can be transferred to a pilot number in another hunt group, an extension. the attendant. an answering machine or another destination. number TRANSFER FF4-3#-( l-8)%-4#-(2-32)# Sets the maximum amount of time before a call is transferred to another hunt group. 2#: 2 seconds 3-32#: 3-32 seconds HUNT-GROUP EXTENSION FF4-3#-(l-8)+(5-12)%-(0 0#: No assignment lOO-699/ lo-69#: TIMER JZxtension number (l-8) or lOO-699/10-69)# Assigns an extension number to one of the eight places in a hunt group. J Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com Page 25 FF 4 Key Ring Assignment and Hunt Groups V2.0 DELAYED-RING TABLES HUNT-GROUP DAYTIME DELAYED-RING TABLES FF4-5%-(151-158)#-(01-64)#-(0 or l)# Q#: No rine sienal l#: Ring signal Sets the hunt-group pilot numbers (151- 158) in the daytime delayed-ring tables. Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com Page 26 FF 4 Key Ring Assignment and Hunt Groups V2.0 DELAYED-RING HUNT-GROUP NIGHTTIME TABLES DELAYED-RING or 1)R FF4-6#-(151-158)#-(01-64)#-(0 Q#: No rinP .sjg& l#: Ring signal Sets the hunt-group pilot numbers ( 15 1 - 158) in the nighttime delayed-ring tables. EXTENSION-RING TABLES FF4-7#-(OOl-144)#-(001-144)X-(0 Q#: No ring signal l#: Ring signal or l)# This sets the ring on an extension-line key. The first set of port numbers (OOl- 144) represent your telephone. The second set of port numbers (OOl- 144) belong to’the target telephone. EXTENSION DELAYED-RING FFQ-8#-(OOl-144)X-(OOl-144)#-(0 Q#: No ring signal l#: Ring signal TABLES TABLES or l)# If the set extensions on the extension-ring table do not answer, a call will also ring on extensions set in the extension delayed-ring table. The first set of port numbers (00 1- 144) represent your telephone. The second set of port numbers KKll-144) belong to the target telephone. Page 27 Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com FF 5 KEY FLEXIBLEFEATUREKEY PROGRAMMING v2.0 Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com FF 5 Key Flexible Feature Assignment V2.0 MORE FLEXIBILITY FF KEY FEATURE FOR FF KEYS ASSIGNMENT EXTENSION FOR EXTENSIONS LINE (EL) AND MULTI-LINE FF5-(OOl-144)#-(Ol-24)#-CONF(PROG lo-69/100-699#) CONF: Clears data PROG lo-69/ lOO-699#: EL keys Sl-86.89#: ML keys or (ML) KEYS (81-86, 89X) Programs Extension-Line (EL) and Multi-Line (ML) keys. Store the Multi-Line key as 81-86.89. There can be a maximum of 12 ML keys on the Attendamtelephone. On other telephones. there can be up to 3 ML keys assigned to any of the 24 FF keys (Ol24). See Section 700B. Addendum to the DBS ODerating lr&uction~ under “Line Key Fea,tures”for nation ofEL and ML keys. an ewpla- ANY XEY OR PRE-PROGRAMME D CODES FF5-(OOl-144)#-(01-24)#-CONF(PROG PROG xxxxxx#) or (xxxxxx#) -#) will program the Any Key feature. You can program any digits up to a of six. Use this feature to store, for maximum example, code 5 for OHVA. There can be a maxfmum of 24 FF keys (01-24). (PROG PROG CONF: Clears d& PROG PROG xxxxxx#: Any key, maximum of six digit Note: The LCD screen will only display up to four digits. (=xxxx#) is for setting pre-programmed codes. xxxxxx#: Pre-programmed codes See Section 700. DBS Owemtbw lnsbuctions. under “~ the FF Keys” for a chart of these codes. See also Section 700B. Addendum to the DBS Ormatina Instructions under on how to “More Flexibility for FF Keys” for instructions store CF codes plus an extension to an FF key. NOTE: use the programming mode through the telephone to assign the FLASH or CONF features to an FF key. You cannot See Section 700B. Addendum to the DBS Operatim lns~ctiorq under “More Flexibility for FF Keys” for instiffons on how to assign these features to FF keys. Page 28 Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com FF 5 Ker MORE FLEXIBILITY FF KEY ASSIGNMENT Flexible CONSOLES 147: DSS 1 for Second Attendant 148: DSS 2 for Second Attendant DSS/72/BLF AND POOLED-TRUNK-LINE KEYS FFS-(145-148)X-(01-24) or (Oi-72)#-CONF(PROG lo-69/100-699#) or (81-86, 89#1 Pmgrams DSS/72/BLF and Pooled-Trunk-Line (MCO) keys. Store the MC0 key as 8 l-86,89 on the first 24 FF keys (0 l-24). All of the 72 FF keys can be used for DSS/72/BLF keys. CONE Clears data PROG lo-69/1OO-699#: DSS/72/BLF keys 81-86, V2.0 Assignment FOR FF KEYS FOR DSS/72/BLF 145: DSS 1 for First Attendant 146: DSS 2 for First Attendant Feature 89#: MC0 keys See Section 700B. Addendum to the DBS ODeratinq Instructions under “Line Key Features” for an euplanatim ofEL and ML keys. ANY KEY OR PREPROG RAMMED CODES FF5-(145148)#-(01-72)#-CONF(PROG PROG XXXXXX#) or (xxxxxx%I CONF: Clears daQ PROG PROG xxxxxx#: Any key, m-urn of six digits KXXXXX#: Pre-programmed codes (PROG PROG xxxxxx#) will program the Any Key feature. You can program any digits up to a maximum ofsix. Use this feature to store, for example, code 5 for OHVA. There are 72 FF keys (0 1-72). .. Note: The LCD screen (rxrxxr%) is for setting will only display pre-programmed up to four digits. codes. See Section 700. DBS ODemtina lnsb-uct&~~. under the EF Keys”for a chart of these codes. See also 7OOB. Addendum to the DBS ODeratina Instructions “‘More Flexibility for FF Keys” for insb-uctions on store CF codes plus an extension to an FF key. “Storing Section mder how to NOTE: You cannot use the programming mode through the telephone to assign the FLASH or CONF features to an FF key. See Section 700B. Addendum to the DBS ODeratina InstructionS under ‘More lQxibility for FF Keys” for instructions on how to assign these features to FF keys. Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com . Page 29 FF 5 Kev Flexible MORE FF FLEXIBILITY KEY ASSIGNMENT Feature Assignment V2.0 FOR FF KEYS FOR ATTENDANT CONSOLES with Optional Attendant Feature Package (VB-43330) Attendant Console User Guide. Section 760 for FF Key Layout.) Use (See DSS/72/BLF AND POOLED-TRUNK-LINE KEYS FF5-(149-152)#-(01-08) or (Ol-32)X-CONF(PROG 10-69/100-699%) or (81-86. CONF: Clears dau PROG lo-69/100-699#: DSS/72/BLF 81-86,89#: MC0 89#) Pmgrams DSS/72/BLF and Pooled-Trunk-Line (MC01 keys on the Attendant console. Store the MC0 keys as 8 l-86.89 on the first eight FF keys (0 l-08) only. keys keys ANY KEY OR PRE-PROG XUIMMED FF5-(149-152)X-(Ol-32)#-CONF(PROG PROG xxxxxx#) CODES or (-#) (PROG PROG xnxxx#) CONF: Clears data PROG PROG m#: Any key, maximum xxxxxx#: will program the Any Key feature. You can program any digits up to a maximum ofsix. Use this feature to store, for example. code 5 for OIWA. There are 32 F’F keys (0 l-32). of six digits Pre-programmed codes Note: The LCD screen will only display (xrxxxxX) is for setting pre-programed up to four digits. codes. 700. DBS OKETU&W Instn&ions. URder “Storing the FF Keys” for a chart of these codes. See also Section 700B. Addendum to the DBS Oweratina Instructions under “More Flex-&i@ for FF Keys” for instructions on how to store CF codes plus an extension to an FF key. See !3ecm NOTE You cannot use the programming mode through the telephone to assign the FLASH or CONF features to an FF key. See Section 700B. Addendum to the DBS Qperatina lnsbuctions under “More FZexibUity for FF Keys”for instructions on how to assign these features b FF keys. Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com Page 30 i I FF 6 KEY NAME ASSIGNMENT v2.0 Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com FF 6 Key Name Assignment V2.0 NAME ASSIGNMENT CO-TRUNK-LINE NAME ASSIGNMENT FF6-5W-(01-64)#-CONF-(xxxxxx#) COW; Clears data xxxxxx#I: Name or message assignment - up to six characters You can set CO-trunk-line name assignment in the programming mode during remote maintenance or you can set it with PCAS. Programming through a telephone set requires a 72-port Direct Selection Station (DSS/72). Note: The DSS/72 must be set to Telephone Types 11 for extension 100 or 13 for extension 101. See under F’F 3 Keu Extension Proaramminq, V2.0 elsewhere in this manual. HUNT-GROUP PILOT I NAME ASSIGNMENT FF6-6X-(l-8)#-CON-F-(naanaaxrmx#) CONl? m#: Clears data Name assignment - up to 10 characters Assigns a name of up to 10 characters a Hunt-Group Pilot Extension number. Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com to Page 31 \ Detection timers, V1.0 5 Dial time out for digits 10.20 DID dial outside telephone number DID interdigit dial time out 10. 20 Index A ALMkeyLED DID. immediate or wink start DID trunk cards 10. 18 Direct-in-dial (DID) - extensions 9.15 Any key Attendrqrt 12.28.29.30 console FF key assignment/Any key/Pre-programmed Attendant console codes DSS/72/BLF 12.29.30 keys 12.29. 30 Attendant consoles Attendant Attendant intercom intercom 12.29.30 hold-recall timer 9. 16 transfer-recall timer 9. Direct-in-dial (DID) - trunks Direct Direct Select console, Select console. Station Station 30 Distributed. DSS/72/BLF DSS/72/BLF 10. 22 10, 19 22 10. 18, 19. 20 V1.0 V2.0 2. 8 12. 29. hunt groups 24 2. 8 consoles, V1.0 consoles, 12. 29. 30 V2.0 17 Attendant Attendant overflow override 2.3 switch Attendant Attendants transfer extension 9. 13, 14 E 9. 14 9. 14 number B EL (extension Iine) keys 12.28 Extension delayed-ring tables 11. 27 Extension delayed-ring capability 9, 15 Extension directory display 10. 21 Extension FF key assignment/Any key/Preprogrammed codes 12.28 BLF 8, 12, 29, 30 10.22 Busy signaI Extension C Common Common name system system CONF 28.29.30 CPC-B - Version - Version assignment setttngs. settings, V1.0 V2.0 12.31 3.4 9, 15 (See NOTE) 1.0 2-8 9-31 2.0 &tension Extension intercom intercom hold-recall timer 9, 16 transfer-recall timer 9. 17 Extension Extension 12.28 line (EL) keys programming, V2.0 10. 21.22 Extension ring tables 11, 27 F, G D Data tables. Data tables. Daytime keys 12.28 CO-trunk-line WC-B FF key assignment/EL/ML Vl.0 V2.0 delayed-ring Delayed-ring Delayed-ring Delayed-ring FF 1 Key - System 2 9- 12 tables. V1.0 capability 2.3 tables, V1.0 7 10.26. tables. V2.0 2. 7 27 Programming. 4. 5 FF 1 Key - System Frograrnm V1.0 irlg. v2.0 14. 15. 16. 17 FF 2 Key - Trunk Programming. W-0 FF 2 Key - Trunk V2.0 Programming. 2, 3. 9. 13. 2.6 10. 18 Page 32 Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com FF 3 Key - Extension Programming, V2.0 10. 21.22 FF 4 Key - Ring Assignment and Hunt Groups, v1.0 2, 7 FF 4 Key - Ring Assignment and Hunt Groups, V2.0 10. 23, 24. 25, 26, 27 FF 5 Key - Flexible Feature Key Assignment V1.0 2. 8 FF 5 Key - Flexible Feature Key Assignment 12, 28. 29. 30 V2.0 FF 6 Key - Name Assignment 12.31 FIASH 28.29.30 (See NOTE) Fourth attendant extension number Intercom Intercom recall timers transfer-recall 9. 16. 17 timers 9. 17 L Longest idle. hunt groups 24 Loop-start/ground-start switch. Loop-start/ground-start/direct-in-dial. V1.0 2, 6 V2.0 10. 18 M 9. 13 MLkeys 12.28 More flexibility for FF keys Multi-line (ML) key features 12. 28.29. 30 13. 14. 16. 17 H N Daytime CO-line 11, Hunt-group 23 Hunt-group ring tables daytime 26 Hunt-group Hunt-group extensions 11.25 nighttime CO-line ring tables 11, Outbound nighttime 11, p* Name assignment delayed-ring tables 11, Nighttime 12.31 delayed-ring tables. V1.0 2. 7 ( 0 ground detection timer. V1.0 2. 5 for a hunt group 11. 23 Hunt-group 27 delayed-ring tables 9 Pilot extension number 11, 24 Hunt-group-pilot extension number Hunt-group-pilot name assignment 12. 31 Hunt-group programming 11, 24. 25 24 Preface 1 Pre-programm ed codes Hunt-group ring tables Pooled-Trunk-Line Hunt-group search methods 11. 23 keys 12. 28. 29.30 12. 29. 30 11.24 R I. J, K Incoming CO-line 23 Incoming ground ring signal to a hunt group RAI baud rate switch, V1.0 2. 4 Ring assignment and hunt groups, V1.0 2, 7 Ring assignment V2.0 11. and hunt Initial settings - data tables, V1.0 2 23. 24. 25. 26.27 Ringback tone 22 Initial settings - data tables. V2.0 9. 10. 11. Ringback detection timer, V1.0 12 Intercom HOLD-recall timers 9. 16 2. 5 tone with busy signal Ring tables. Ring tables. Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com groups, V1.0 V2.0 10.22 2. 7 11. 23. 24, 25. 26.27 Page 33 S Second attendant extension Switches 2. 6 System programming. System programming. 16. 17 v. T number 9. 13 V1.0 2. 3. 4 V2.0 9. 13. 14. 15, Telephone types 10.21 Terminal. hunt groups 24 Third attendant extension number Transfer extension number 11.25 Transfer timer 11.25 Trunk cards 10. 18 Tnmk programming, V1.0 2. 6 Trunk programming, V2.0 10.18 9. 13 U UNA7 Universal night answer 7 V Voice mail Wink-start 21, 22 timer 10. 19 Page Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com 34 m Panasonic Issue 3 - July 1993 DBS Programming Forms and Tables Section 450 CPC-B Versions 1.0,2.0,3.1, and 4.0 CPC-A Versions 3.0,3.1, and 3.2 Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com he new DBS Ffogramming Forins‘ and Tabks, section 450, has fewer pages, yet contains more information on how to make programming easier by using the newly-designed forms to record programmed data. How-to instructions precede each FF Key chapter. While some forms overlap in information, every form charts a specific kind of programming. The instructions make clear who will use each form. This manual is for software versions: CPC-B 1.0, 2.0, 3.1.4.0 and CPGA3.0, 3.1, 3.2 All of the forms in this manual are intended to be photocopied. Saue your origin& and use them as copy masters. Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com 5 Y 8 t e / m W he FFl Key is for system-wide programming. There are seven submodes (l# to 7#) for this key. i d e S 8 t t i n Q 8 Time and Date, Recall and Pause timers, and DISA (Direct Inward System Access) are a few of the nearly 100 features available for programmin g on the FFl Key. Features programmed on this key affect the entire system. In contrast, the other nine FF keys affect only one extension or trunk, and are programmed on an extension-by-extension or trunk-by-trunk basis. The exception to these keys is System Speed Dial. in the FFlO Key which also affects the entire system. ( The programming forms and tables for the FFl Key apply to each DBS system (single or double cabinet). The data options for most features are 0 and 1, but some features have more than these two programming options. For example, the options for the Paging feature range from 00 to 07. Other features offer up to 15 options, such as the Automatic Pause Timer and Unsupervised Conference Talk-Time (trunk-to-trunk conferencing). Save Your Original Foims!!! / Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com 2 I EFIKey-Sgskem Account s Y 6 .t Address e m W i d e S e t t SMDR timer/starting One-touch time display -lO#-(0 HOLD (DSS BLF) or 11% CO line hold or l)# Sets number of extension -14#-(Oar 1)X -15#-(0 Extension intercom or 1)X intercom 1: Enable 0: Exclusive 1: System 0: Intercom 1: Retrieves SLT FLASH control -12#-(0 or I)## Attendant 16 sec. 0: DisaWe (automatic) Non-appearance -1 l#-(0 from dialin -9#-(0 or l)# Key-bank 1: Starting i P ST s hold ho/d dial tone he/d CO line 0: 2 digits (10 to 69) digits 1: 3 digiis (100 to 699) 0: Tone 1: Voice 0: Tone 1: Voice 3 Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com l?FlKey-System DBF Account Name Account Address Cutover Date Account Phone (Main List) sheet of i.. 1 S t 8 Address / Feature m W -16#-(0 Solash -17#-(0 Splash -1w(0 or l)# (alert) tone or 11% (alert) tone or 11% i d e on a voice call See FF3-99, lO# on a busy override Area code or 1 + area code -19#-(0 or I)# SSD name display - large display -21X40 or 1)C Voice mail tone -22#-(0 or 1 to lS)# Attendant overflow -23#-(0 or l)# Delayed-ring capability -248~(101 to 69/l 1 to 699)# (WC-B Second attendant -2514101 to 69/l 1 to 699)# (UC-B 1: 10 names calls (CPC-B Vs. 1.0) Vs. 20) Vs. 2.0) Third attendant -26#-(101 to 69/l 1 to 699)# (CPC-8 Vs. 2.0) Fourth attendant -27#-(101 to 69/l 1 to 699)t (WC-B Vs. 20) Attendant transfer extension (CPC-8 vs. 2.0) -28140 or 1M Attendant override switch (CPC-B Vs. 2.0) -29WO or l)i Alarm LED mode (WC-B Vs. 2.0) -3O#-(0 or 1)R BLF (extension) delaved ring -31#40 Analog to 6M port transfer ring interval 1: 3.0 Set 2: 2.0 Set 3: 1.O Set 4: 1.O Set Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com ON ON ON ON / / / / 1.O Set 2.0 Set 2.0 Set 3.0 Set OFF Off OFF O# S e t t i n Q 8 I FFIKey-System s Y S t Address / Feature Program e Options m -32#-(0 to 1)W (CPC-B DID/DNIS emulation -32X-(0 or l)# (CPC-B Vs. 4.0 or higher) 0: Disuble W Vs. 3.0 or higher) 1: Enable 0: Disable i d e Multiole DID --33%-(0 or 1 )# 1: Enable 0: No limit Paging duration -34%-(0 or 1)# 1: 60 seconds 0: ISecON/3SecOFF -I#-(0 0: No parity or l)# SMDR lTY parity SMDR lTY parity -3#-(0 or 1)R SMDR baud -4#-(0 or 1)X SMDR stop-bit check check 1: Purify check type 0: Odd 1: Even -2#-(0 or I)# - (CPC-A Vs. 3.0 and above) 1: 300 bps rate 2: 1200 bp - WC-A 3: 4800 bps V 2.0 4: %lXl bps - WC-A V 3.0, CPC-B V 1.0,2-O 1: l.Obits . .. length 2: 1.5 bits 3: 2.0 bits -W-(0 or 1)X SMDR data 1: 5.0 bits (less than 90 ports) length 2: 6.0 bits (less than 90 ports) 3: 7.0 bits 4: 8.0 bits See FF3-14R -6#-(0 or l)# SMDR print mode -9#-(0 or l)# Dump data mode 1: lncofning und outgoing 0: Long-distance 1: Ail outgoing 2 calls only calls O:lWCklfUonly -8X-(0 or I)# SMDR print mode calls only 1 -7#-(0 or l)# SMDR print mode 0: Outgoing 1: Titles and llY data 3 0: No control I: Control (Xon/XoffI -lO#-(0 or I)# RAI baud rate switch 0: 300 bauds ( Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com (RAI-A, RAI-B) S e t t i n B 8 FFlKey-System me Account Cutover Date Account Phone (Main Address Address -I#-(Up / Feature W to 3 dlglts)# PBX access code i 1 d e -2X-(Up to 3 dlgits)# PBX access code 2 -3X-(Up to 3 digits)# PBX access code S e t t 3 -4X-(Up to 3 dlgltsM PBX access -5HUp code 4 to 3 dlgtts)P PBX access code 2 Y 8. t e m i 5 n -6#-(Up to 3 dlglts)# PBX access code 6 -7#-(Up to 3 dlgits)t Q 8 PBX access -8WUp code /- 7 to 3 dlglts)# PBX access code 8 -9%~(1to 3)# Automatic -low pause See FF2-13# after dialing pause 1: Pause - 1st digit See FF2-13t to 3)X Automatic 1 after dialing 2 2: Pause - 2nd digit 3: Pause - 3rd diait -1 l#-(1 to 3)# Automatic pause after dialing See FF2-131 No entry at default 3 1: Pause - 1st digit 2: Pause - 2nd digit 3: Pause - 3rd diait -12#-(1 to 3)# Automatic pause after dialing See FFZ- 13# No entry at deiautt 4 1: Pause - 1st digit 2: Pause - 2nd digit 3: Pause - 3rd digit -13w See FF2-131 to 3)# Automatic pause after dialing 5 No enfry at default 1: Pause - 1st digit 2: Pause - 2nd digit Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com 6 PFlKey-System Account S Y Address S t Address -14#-(1 / Feature to 316 Automatic -W-(1 pause after dialing pause after dialing W 6 1: Pause - 1st digit i 2: Pause - 2nd digit d e 1: Pause - 1st digit 7 See FF2-13# after dialing e m No entry at defauff 2: Pause - 2nd digit -l#-(1 to 3)# Automatic pause Options See FF2-13# See FF2-13# to 3)# Automatic Program 8 S e t t No entry of defuu/f i 1: Pause - 1st digit 2: Pause - 2nd digit n Q S -17#-(1 See FF2-13# to 3)# Automatic pause -18#-(1 to 3M Automatic pause after dialing 1: Pause - 1st digit 2: Pause - 2nd digit 9 See FF2-13# after dialing 1: Pause - 1st digit 0 2: Pause - 2nd digit -l#-(0 Universal -2#-(0 External See FF4- 1#, 2# or l)# Nigtif‘ Answer 1: Continuous (UNA) ring pattern 0: No fP/ reluy or l)# Page Interface (EPI) page group OC -4#-(0 External -5#-(0 External Page Interface (EPI) page group 01 Interface (EPI) page group 0: 1: EPI relay 0: No EPI rew or l)# Page 1: EPI relay 0: No EPIrely or l)# Page 1: EPI relay 0: No ffl reluy -3#-(0 or l)# External 0:3secson/l Interface (EPI) page group 0: Interface (EPI) page group 01 -6#-(0 or l)# External -7#-(0 Page or l)# Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com secot7 FFIKey-system Account Address Account I Address Phone (Main List) Y s t e I / Feature m 8x-(0 or I)# ixternal Page interface (EPI) page group 06 W 1: EPI relay (Not in use) 0: No EPI relay lxternal Page Interface (EPI) page group 07 (l-8)+( l -20)#-(0 or 1)X :lass of Service settina (Not in use> 0: Restricted 1: Not restricted (l-100)X-l#-(0001~9999)X ‘erified Forced Account (1-l OO)#-2#-(0-7)s Codes ‘erified Code Forced 1: EPI relay l “*: No uccount codes cooo1-9999w 0:TRSTypeO Account toll restrictior 1: TPSType 1 2: m.S Type 2 3: TRS Type 3 4: lRS Type 4 5: TRS Type 5 6: TRS Type 6 No infry (0000 to 2359)# Uomatic switch to night (0 or 1 to 12)# rttendant HOLD-recall mode timer (HHMM) af defautf OWO to 2359: Automatic 0: No recall I: 20 seconds 2: 40 seconds 3: 60 seconds 4: 80 seconds 5: 100 seconds 6: 120 seconds 7: 140 seconds 8: 160 seconds 9: 180 seconds 10: 200 seconds 11: 220 seconds 12: 240 seconds Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com me i d e RF1 Key - System Account Account Address Address / Feature HOLD-recall timer S Y 8 t e In W 0: No recall -(O or 1 to 12)X Extension Phone (Main List) 1: 20 seconds 2: 40 seconds 3: 60 seconds 4: 80 seconds 5: 100 seconds 6: 120 seconds i d e S e t t i n 7: 14Oseconds Q 8: 160 seconds 8 9: 180 seconds 10: 200 seconds 11: 220 seconds -(O or 1 to 12)# Attendant transfer-recall timer 0: No recall I: 20 seconds 2: 40 seconds 3: 60 seconds 4: 80 seconds 5: 100 seconds 6: 120 seconds 7: 140 seconds 8: 160 seconds 9: 180 seconds 10: 200 seconds 11: 220 seconds 12: 240 seconds Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com 9 I?FlKey-Systam 9. F Y 8 t e m Address / Feature W i -(O or 1 to 121% Extension transfer-recall timer Attendant Hunt Group recall timer 0: No recall 1: 20 seconds 2: 40 seconds 3: 60 seconds 4: 80 seconds 5: 100 seconds 6: 120 seconds 7: 14oseconds 8: 160 seconds 9: 180 seconds 10: 200 seconds 11: 220 seconds 12: 240 seconds d e 0: No recall 1: 20 seconds 2: 40 seconds 3: 60 seconds 4: 80 seconds 5: 100 seconds 6: 120 seconds 7: 140 seconds 8: 160 seconds 9: 180 seconds 10: 200 seconds 11: 220 seconds Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com 10 FEY Key - System f-‘ \ Cutover Date Account Phone (Main List) Bs Account Name ccount Address Sheet of S Y 8 t e m Address /’ Feature W i d e Extension Hunt Group recall 1: 20 seconds timer 2: 40 seconds 3: 60 seconds 4: 80 seconds 5: 100 seconds 6: 120 seconds 7: 14Oseconds 8: 160 seconds S e t t i n Q s 9: 180 seconds 10: 200 seconds 11: 220 seconds 0: No recall Attendant park HOLD recall timer 1: 20 seconds 2: 40 seconds 3: 60 seconds 4: 80 seconds 5: 100 seconds 6: 120 seconds 7: 140 seconds 8: 160 seconds 9: 180 seconds 10: 200 seconds 11: 220 seconds Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com 1: FFY Key - Sgstem Cutover Date Account Phone (Main List) BS Account Name ccount Address Sheet of u /r. 8t e In Address / Feature &tension park-HOLD recall tlmer (0 or 1 to 12)# Wendant reversion timer W 0: No recall 1: 20 seconds 2: 40 seconds 3: 60 seconds 4: 80 seconds 5: 100 seconds 6: 120 seconds 7: 140 seconds 8: 160 seconds 9: 180 seconds 10: 200 seconds 11: 220 seconds i d e S e t t i Il Q 8 0: No recall 1: 20 seconds 2: 40 seconds 3: 60 seconds 4: 80 seconds 5: 100 seconds 6: 120 seconds 7: 140 seconds 8: 160 seconds 9: 180 seconds 10: 200 seconds 11: 220 seconds Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com 12 l?Fl Key - System unt Phone (Main List) Address t e m / Feature W (Oor 1 to 1511 Insupervised i See FF2-16#, FF3-131 conference talk-time 1: 5 minutes 2: l0m//wfes 3: 15 minutes 4: 20 minutes 5: 25 minutes 6: 30 minutes 7: 35 minutes 8: 40 minutes 9: 45 minutes 10: 50 minutes 11: 55 minutes 12: 60 minutes 13: 65 minutes 14: 70 minutes *(O or 1 to 1SM 4utomatic pause timer 0: No pause 1: 0.5 second 2: 1 .O second 3: 1.5 seconds 4: 2.0 seconds 5: 2.5 seconds 6: 3.0 seconds 7: 3.5 seconds 8: 4.0 seconds 9: 4.5 seconds 10: 5.0 seconds 11: 5.0 seconds 12: 5.0 seconds 13: 5.0 seconds 14: 5.0 seconds Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com d e S e t t i n sr a FFlKey-@stem Account Cutover Date Account Phone (Main List) Name Address Address Sheet of S/ Y s t e m / Feature W see 18# -(O or 1 to 1OM CO line FLASH timer i d e 0: No FLASH 1: 0.2 second 2: 0.3 second 3: 0.4 second 4: 0.5 second 5: 0.6 second 6: 0.7 second 7: 0.8 second 8: 0.9 second 9: 1.0 secorld f -(O or 1 to 6)# SLT onhook FLASH(0 FLASH timer Disconnect (D) I 0: 200-500 ms (I? Over 500 IT-ISCD) 1: 2OW50 ms (0 Over 750 ms 0 2: 200-1CXlO ms (0 Over 1Ooo ms (D) 3: 2O@l200 ms (0 Over 1200 ms (0) ms 0 4: ZW-15W 5: 6: 30-W 15W ms (0 Over 200 ms CD> rns CR Over 500 ms (D) 0: 4 seconds -(O to 3M incoming Over ring timer 1:8seconds Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com 14 P FFYKey-System Account S Y 8 t e Address Address m / Feature W O: Synchronizes -(O 01 1 to 15)# ncoming ring delay timer 1: Expand 2: Expand 3: Expand to 50 ms to 100 ms to 150 ms 4: Expand 5: Expand 6: Expand to 200 ms to 250 ms to 300 ms 7: Dial pause Expand to 350 ms 8: Expand 9: Expand to 400 ms to 450 ms IO: Expand I 1: Expand 12: Expand to 500 ms to 550 ms to 600 ms 13: Expand 14: Expand to 650 ms to 700 ms 0: 1.2 seconds -(Oto lS)# timer 1: 1.2 seconds 2: 2.0 seconds 3: 3.0 seconds 4: 4.0 seconds 5: 5.0 seconds 6: 6.0 seconds 7: 7.0 seconds 8: 8.0 seconds 9: 9.0 seconds 10: 10 seconds 11: 11 seconds 12: 12 seconds 13: 13 seconds 14: 14 seconds Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com to incoming ring cycle i d e S e t t i xl Q 8 lTF1 Key - System j st 8 t Cutover Date Account Phone (Main List) BS Account Name ccount Address e m Address / Feature w i -(O or 1 to lO)# 0: No FLASH d PBX-FLASH 1: 0.2 second e timer 2: 0.3 second S 3: 0.4 second e 4: 0.5 second t 5: 0.6 second 6: 0.7 second t i n Q 8 7: 0.8 second 8: 0.9 second 9: 1 .O second 10: 1.1 seconds -(O to 15)# Call Forward-No Answer timer 0: Call forward after 4 seconds 1: Call forward after 8 seconds 2: Cd forward affer 12 seconds 3: Call forward after 16 seconds 4: Call forward 5: Call forward after 20 seconds after 24 seconds 6: Call forward after 28 seconds 7: Call forward after 8: Call forward 9: Call forward after 36 seconds after 40 seconds 10: Call forward after 11: Call forward after 48 seconds 12: Call forward after 13: Call forward after 56 seconds 14: Call forward after Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com 1 32 seconds 44 seconds 52 seconds 60 seconds 16 FFlKey-Systxm i’- ’ Cutover Date Account Phone (Main List) dBS Account Name Account Address Sheet of S Y 8 t Address e m / Feature W -(O or 1 to 8)# Outbound ground detection timer i d e 1: 1 second 2: 2 seconds 3: 3 seconds 4: 4 seconds S e t t i n Q 8 5: 5 seconds 6: 6 seconds 7: 7 seconds -(O or 1 to 818 Incoming ground detection timer 0: No detection 1: 1 second 2: 2 seconds 3: 3 seconds #:#seconds 5: 5 seconds 6: 6 seconds 7: 7 seconds 0: No intercom -(O or 1 to 1216 Attendant (UC-B intercom HOLD-recall timer Vs. 2.0) HOLD recall I: 20 seconds 2: 40 seconds 3: 60 seconds 4: 80 seconds 5: 100 seconds 6: 120 seconds 7: 140 seconds 8: 160 seconds 9: 180seconds 10: 200 seconds 11: 220 seconds Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com 1 RF1 Key - System Account Addre Y 8 t e m Address / Feature Program Options W i -(O or 1 to 12)# Extension WC-B intercom HOLD recall timer 0: No intercom 1: 20 seconds HOLD recall 2: 40 seconds 3: 60 seconds 4: 80 seconds Vs. 2.0) d e S e t t 5: 100 seconds i 11 Q 6: 120 seconds 7: 14oseconds 8: 160 seconds 9: 180 seconds 10: 200 seconds 8 11: 220 seconds 12: 240 seconds -(O or 1 to 12)# Attendant WC-8 intercom Vs. 2.0) transfer recall timer 0: No intercom 1: 20 seconds transfer recall 2: 40 seconds 3: 60 seconds 4: 80 seconds 5: 100 seconds 6: 7: 8: 9: 120 seconds 140 seconds 160 seconds 180 seconds 10: 200 seconds 11: 220 seconds 12: 240 seconds Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com 18 RF1 Key - Sgstem D’BS Account Name Account Address Address Cutover Date Account Phone (Main List) / Feature Program Sheet -- of S Y 8 t e m Options W i -(O or 1 to 12)# Extension intercom transfer recall 0: No intercom 1: 20 seconds 2: 40 seconds 3: 60 seconds 4: 80 seconds 5: 100 seconds 6: 120 seconds 7: 140 seconds 8: 160 seconds 9: 180 seconds 10: 200 seconds 11: 220 seconds 12: 240 seconds timer (CPC-6 vs. 2.0) CO delayed ringing timer WC-B Vs. 3.0 or higher) 0: CO delay 1: CO delay 2: CO delay 3: CO delay 4: CO delay 5: CO delay 6: CO delay 7: CO delay 8: CO delay 9: CO delay 10: CO delay 11: CO delay 12: CO delay 13: CO delay 14: CO delay Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com transfer ringing ringing ringing ringing ringing ringing ringing ringing ringing ringing ringing ringing ringing ringing ringing d e recall S e t t i n !3 8 I after after ufier after after after after after after after after after after after after 4 seconds 8 seconds 12 seconds 16 seconds 20 seconds 24 seconds 28 seconds 32 seconds 36 seconds 40 seconds 44 seconds 48 seconds 52 seconds 56 seconds 60 seconds I FFIKey-System Cutover Date Account Phone (Main List) DBS Account Name Account Address Address Sheet of P Y 8 t e / Feature m EXT. delayed (WC-6 ringing timer Vs. 3.0 or higher) Hunt Group no answer (CPC-B Vs. 3.0 or higher) 0: EXT. delay ringing after 4 seconds 1: EXT. delay 2: EXT. deby ringing thgbhg after 8 seconds crlyer 12 seconds 3: EXT. delay 4: EXT. delay ringing ringing after 16 seconds after 20 seconds 5: EXT. delay 6: EXT. delay 7: EXT. delay ringing after 24 seconds ringing after 28 seconds ringing after 32 seconds 8: EXT. delay 9: EXT. delay ringing ringing i d e S e t t after 36 seconds after 40 seconds 10: EXT. delay 11: EXT. delay ringing ringing after 44 seconds after 48 seconds 12: EXT. delay 13: EXT. delay ringing ringing after 52 seconds after 56 seconds 14: EXT. delay ringing after: 60 seconds 0: H. Group no answer after 4 seconds 1: H. Group no answer after 8 seconds 2: If. Grout no mswer offer 12 seconds 3: H. Group no answer after 16 seconds 4: H. Group 5: H. Group no answer no answer after 20 seconds after 24 seconds 6: H. Group 7: H. Group no answer no answer after 28 seconds after 32 seconds 8: H. Group 9: H. Group no answer no answer after 36 seconds after 40 seconds 10: H. Group no answer after 44 seconds 11: H. Group 12: H. Group no answer no answer after 48 seconds after 52 seconds 13: H. Group no answer after 56 seconds no answer 15: H. GrouD no answer atier 60seconds after 64 seconds 14: H. Group -(HHMMM (WC-B Vs. 4.0 or higher) W i n Q 8 c c HH: Hours (00 to 23) MM: Minutes Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com (00 to 23) 2c FFl Key - DBS Account Name Account Address System Cutover Date Account Phone (Main List) Address / Sheet of S Y s t e Feature m -(4 digts)# Remote Ako used with DISA maintenance W I i d e' -(4 diglts)# See FF2-ill. 191, 20# -(4 d@tsM See FFZ-11X, 19#, 20# 1111: S e t t Default i n -(4 digtk)# -(O Of 1)Y DID reset -(O to 111 DID/l1 reset -(O of l)# Confirmation -(O or I)# (CPC-B Vs. 3.0 or hlghed (CPC-B (6) Vs. 4.0 01 hlgher) (WC-B Dekutt 0: (do No l-l not reset DID Q 8 numbers) of higher) of DID reset (WC-B Vs. 4.0 or higher) -(O to 9999)#-(10 to DID Number Set -1X-1X-(0 System (CPC-B Vs. 3.0 9999: 69 or 100 to 699I1 to W size Vs. 4.0 OT higherl 10 to 69 loo to 699 # 0: 1: 2: 3: 4: 5: 6: 7: Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com D6S 40 DBS 72 DBS 96 DBS 40 + (Tl must Df3S 72 + DE3S 72 + 01 must DES 96 + DEE 96 + DES 40 be in slave DBS 40 fll DBS 72 be In slave DES 40 DBS 72 cabinet.) not supported) cabinet.) 2 EFIKey-system Sheet Account Address Account of ? Phone (Main List) L Y 8 t e m Address / Feature W -l#-2#-(1 to 3)Y i 1: Tl of the master cabinet Synchronization setting for the first sync d e 2: Tl of the slave cabinet some - l #-3#-(0 to 3)# S e t t o:NCYE Synchronization setting for the second sync sauce 1: Tl of the master cabinet 2: Tl of the slave ccbinet 3: Free Run (Internal clocking) -l#-#-Cl to 3hv Synchronization i n Q s OrNOne setting for the third sync some 1: Tl of the master cabinet 2:Tl oftheslavecabinet 3: Free Run (lntemd docking) -2#-l#-(0 to 2sM Neiwuk Resync timer ( Oto25hous = No Entries -2#-2#-(IJ to 12)# Diiconnect timer -m-3#-(0 to 15)# Guard timer -2#-4#-(0 to lS)# Release acknowiedge timer (RLS ACK Timer) -2#-!i#-(0 to 8)Y Duipdse Oto8 delaq timer -2#45#-(0 to 1511 tink timeout timer OJVinkTimeout) ~2#-7#-(oto15)# ncoming detection timer -2#-W-(0 to 8)x Oto8 Ynswer supervision timer (Answer Super4 (3)-6mMs .2#-9#-(0 to 15)# oto 15 mmediate Glue timer (Imm-Glare Timer) t-i (3)=6clMs *2#- 1or-<0 to 15)# &ink Glare timer M-Glare Timer) Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com 22 Key - Sgstem FFl r \Account Address Account -3X-(1 Digital m Program options W 1 to 8)X-(1 pad S Y .s t e Phone (Main List) Address / Feature -8#-4W P to 8)#-(0 settings to 3OM (Digital Pad Set) 1 CklJitTvr>es K-TEL SLT DATA PmbgCOTrk Tl Master Tl slave OPllONl” OlllON2” DPVW CoNF~C)# Tone 1 &lFRl)# Tone2&lFM)# No. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 lo 11 ‘12 Figure circuit 1 shows type. Figure most 2 shows common figure the used to identify the defautt values Tl connections. for the 3 lists the pad numbers adjustments provided each i d e by each number. I F/awe 2: Default wd vaiues From To Sefflng Tl%l Tl f2 Tl Xl Tl f2 K-TEL K-TEL SLT SLT K-TEL .K-TEL SLT SLT Tl Rl Tl 62 Tl 81 Tl #2 16 16 16 16 16 I I 16 16 16 I Value -2 dB -2 dB -2 dB -2 dB -2 dB -2 dB -2 dB -2 dB F&we 3: Ptd Nos. Pad No. #CrcuitType3&912cxe rae4vedtifuiureuse. 1 Level ] i +28 dB 1 YJse~~la7d2to CX&lUliCjUePADlevels tocicuikthutrequke speddvdmew 29 30 Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com -28 dB -30 dB 23 IF1 Key - System n Account Address Account Phone (Main List) Y 8 t e Address / Feature -4#-l#-l#-(0 to I)# (Master cablnet) -5#-l#-l#-(0 to l)# Glave cabhot) Trunk class -4#-l#-2X-(0 to 24)# (Master cabhot) -M-l#-2#-(0 to 24)# Glave cablnetl Number of channels used -4#-l#-3#-(0 to l)# @laster cabinet) -s#-1x-3#-(0 to 1)# (Slave cabinet) Frame format -4#-1#-4#-(0 to l)# (Master cabinet) -5#-1#-4#-(0 to l)li Wave cablnet) Clear chawwl -4#-l#-sr-co to l# (Master cabinet) -St-l#-5#-(0 to 1M (slave cabhot) Failure mode -4+1#-6+(0 to l)# (Master cabinet) -5X-it-M-(0 to I)# Gtave cabinet) Remote loopback (R-Loooback) -4+1#-7#-(0 to l)# (Master cabhot) -5#-l#-71(0 to I)# (Slave cabinet) Yellow akxm send -4#-2#-l#-(0 to 15)# (Master cablnet) -5#-2#-W-(0 to iS)# tslave CabInetI Red alarm detection (Red Aim Det) -4#-2#-2#-(0 to lS)# Nader cablnen -SI-2#-21-(0 to isjr kitave cabtnell Yellow detection (YeI Aim Det) -4#-2#-3#-(0 to 15)# (Master cablneb -St-263#-(0 to lS)# Mave cabinet) Yellow alam recovq (YeI Aim Ret) -4#-2#-4#-(0 to 1511 (Master cabhot) -s#-2##-(0 to 1511 fslave cabinen 3her darms detection (Other Alm Det) -4#-2#-5#-(0 to lS)# (Mastor CabInen -5#-2#-5#-(0 to 1511 Grave cabtnen Other alarms recovery (Other Aim Ret) -4#-3#-ll-(0 to 9ooo)# (Master cabinet) -St-Jli-l#-(0 to 9ooo)# &v* CaMnet) Frame loss counter (Frame Count) -4#-31-2#-(0 to 9ooo)# (Master cabinet) -4+3#-2#-(0 to 9alo)# (Skve cabinet) Slip counter (Slip Count) -&l-3&3+(0 to I)# (Master cabinet) -4+3#-31140 to 1H Slave cabirmt) Red alarm counter (Red Aim Count) m W 0: Analog only 1: Tl analog and i d e trunks 0 to 24 co, 0: SF (Super 1: ESF @Mended 0: AM (Alternate 1: B8ZS (Binary 0: Mode 1 1: Mode 2 0: No 1: Yes Super Mark 8-zeros Frame) t lnverslon) t i n SJ suppression) 8 (No system (System S e Frame) response responds to to loop&ac&.) loopback.) c aoff 1: on 0 to 5 (2) 0 to Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com 15 j 24 RF1 Key - System Cutover Date Account Phone (Main List) DBS Account Name Account Address Sheet-of S Y 8 t e Address / Feature In -4#-3#-4#-(0to 9oooM (Master cabinet) -5#-3#-4#-(oto5QOO)u (slave cabinet) 0 to 9000/24h sianal counter (Sla LossCount) -4#-3#-5+(0to 5xmo)# (Master cabinet) -5#-3#-5#-(0t09000)x (Slave cabinet) Svnc loss counter (Svnc LossCount) 0 to 9000/24h d e Loss -4#-3#-#-(0t05aOO)x -S#-3#-#-(0 to 9000)# (Master cabinet) (slave cabinet) Yellow alarm counter (Yet Alm Count) (Master cabinet) -4x-4#-l#-(0 to 1)X (5lave cabinet) -5#-4#-1X-(0 to I)# Yellow alarm relay (Ye1Alm Relay) (Master cabinet) -4X-4X-2+(0to 1)# (5lave cabinet) -W-4%-2+(0 to l)# Red alarm relay (Red Aim Relay) (Master cabinet) -4%-4#-3%-(Oto1)R (slave cabinet) -5#-4#-3n-(oto I)# Loss relay (Master cabinet) -4#-4#-4%-(0t0 1)X (5Jave cabinet) -5#-4#-4n-(oto l)# Frame loss relav (Frm Loss Relav) (Master cabinet) -4#-4#-5n-(oto I)# (slave cabinet) -5#-4#-5#-(0t0 I)# A6 relay (Master cabinet) -4#-4#-6#-(Oto I)# (Slave cabinet) -5#-4#-6#-(Oto l)# &limed Alarm relay reset 1: Manual Trunk Type Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com W i 1: Ground Start 1 2: Ground Start 2 3: E&M l?FlKey-Sptem DBS Account Name Account Address Cutover Date Account Phone (Main List) Sheet of Y 8 t e m W i DID/DNIS table (DID/DNIS) -6#(1 to 64)#-3#-(0 Outgoing 1: Outgoing bit setting (Robbing to 64)#-7#-(0 dialing Dial tone I 0: off (BT Send) 0: off 1: On to 1M detection 0: on 1: On (RBT Send) to 2)# (Other I 1: On (DT Receive) -7#(o to 99%9#-2#-(0 -&/(I 1: On to 1)Y transmission alarms 0: off (DT Send) generation -6#(1 to 64)#-ll#-(0 Ringback 1: DtMF Dial) to l)# -6#(1 to 64)#-lO#-(0 Dial tone (Incoming to l)# transmission f signal not used) 0: Dial pulse (1 OPPS) method transmission only 1: On CABCD s/gnu/ used) bit set) to l)# -6#(1 to 64)#-9#-(0 Busy tone 0: Off (ABCD to I># -6#(1 to 64)#-8#-(0 Other 0: Bothwoy to 2)# mode Incoming Sfat/rlngdown 1: Wink start type -6#(1 to &I)#-61140 -6#(l 0: lmmedlote to 1I# -6#(1 to 64)#-H-(0 Robbing Staff 1: Wink stati 2: Dial Tone start -6#(1 to 64)#-4#-(0 Trunk 0: lmmedute to 211 type Incoming d e 1: DID 2: DNIS Aim Det) oto 15 oto 15 (1) (1 - 250 ms) I I to &a)#-(10 to 69 or 100 to 699M Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com 26 FFl Key - System S Y 8 t e m W i d e S e t t i n Q 8 Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com 2 r c d F F 2 he FF2 Key is for programming trunk lines and acts as an interface between the CO or DID trunk lines and the DBS system. K e Y There are two programming forms for the FF2 Key: The Trunk Port list is for assigned names and TelCo circuit numbers. The Trunk Features list is for recording any of the 25 features that can be programmed on each trunk port. Notes: (1) The Pooled Tmk Group Access settings in the FF2 Key (Trunks’ programming) are different from the Trunk Group settings in the FF8 Key (LCR programming): (a) Trunk lines set in the FF2 Key are accessed by the user with access codes (9, 8 1 to 86). (b) Trunk lines set in the FF8 Key are automatically selected by the system. Save Your Original Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com Forms!!! 28 FF2Key-TrunkRwts Account Address Addre Account Phone (Main List) T r U n k P 0 r t L i 8 t Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com #?F2Key-TmnkPb~ Trunk Ports I ~‘.y”.-.. (Circuit ..“...D. Number) U n L i S t f Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com FlCZKey-TmnkRrts DBS Account Name Account Address r Cutover Date Account Phone (Main List) Adctre~~ I Feature I Progrcml optkms I I I I Sheet Trunk Ports (01-W I I I P of I T r I I I U n k 0: No pooled Pooled trunk access, Group -(l to 6A)#-W-(0 or 111 Pooled trunk access, Group -(l to 64#-9#-(0 or l)# Pooled trunk access, Group -(l to 64)Clow1 or a0 Trunk llne type -(l to 64)#-1 l#-(0 of l)# Enables DISA Private 84 85 86 1: Group 84 0: No pooled l:GfoupE!s 0: No poded 1: Group 86 1: CO line 2: PBX he trunk access i trunk access trunk access line port number MF signal sending omlng ring signal S e t t time 1:3secsON/l secOFF 2: 2 sea ON/2 sea OFF 3: 1 set ON/l set OFF 4: 1 secON/2secsOFF 5: 1 secON/3secsOFF 6: 5 set ON/.5 set OFF 7: .5 set ON/.5 set OFF .5 see ONl2.5 sea OFF 8: .5 set ON/X5 sea OFF Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com n Q s FF2Key-IVunkPorts Account Cutover Date Account Phone (Main List) Address r Addross / Fwh~ro I Program OptIons I I I I sheet Trunk Ports (01-64) I I I I of T r I I U n k Trunk disconnect timer P 0 r t -(l to 64)#-19f-(HHMMM 7: SO ms 8: 4OOms 9: 45orns 10: 5ooms 11: 55oms 12: 6ooms 13:65orn.s ld: 7txms 15: 750 ms No entry d defaun S e t t i n Q s c 1: Ground-start trunk (CPC-B Va 2.0) r Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com 32 FF2Key-TrunkPorts DBS Account Name Account Address Cutover Date Account Phone (Main List) Sheet of T r u n k P (CPC-B Va 2.0) 3.0 FF3-351 0 1: 15seconds 2 16seconds 3: 17smnds 4 I8socalds 5 19seconds 6:2oseconds 7: 21 seconds 8:22seconds lo: 11: 12: 13: r t S e t t i 18 seconds 18 seconds 18seconds 18seconds n !Y a (CPC-8 Va 2-a) !30. FF3-351 Tl port clas - trunk (CPC-B Vs. 4.0 or high.0 r Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com he FF3 Key is for programming extensions. The 36 feature available for this key represent 36 submodes (l# to 36#). F F 3 Telephone Types, submode 2#, default automatically to data settings 1 through 7 or can be set in programming mode using data 8 through 19. K e Y The number ofbuttons or keys on the telephone determine how many FF keys are available for programming. DBS telephone models come in 16-, 22-, and 34-button sets. There are several programming programming: forms avaiZable for extension The Extension Ports form summarizes the programming on all extension ports and is for use by the installer/programmer. below are located at the backof this mama2 inunediately following the RF1 0 Key information: Theforms expU.ned The Extension Summary form is for recording features programmed on a single extension port. The salesperson or programmer and the system administrator will use this form to design a program for an extension port. Refer to the Extension General hformztim and the Extension Programning boxes on this form. Use a separate form for each extension port. Photocopy the original form and use only the copies. The Summary the Customer. To copy extension another extension Key Plan or the Key Plan are for Use either form as appropriate. featuresjhm one extension port, use the FF9 Key. Save Your Original Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com port to Forms!!! i\ 34 EF3Key-mns J DBS Account Name Account Address Cutover Date Account Phone (Main List) Addross -(l to / 144)#-11(100 to 699/10 Extension numbers -(l to 144)#-2#-(0 Telephone types of (CPC-6 hlghor) Vs. 20 of F.&MO 1 to Program to Extonskn options 140 0: 1: 2: 19)# -(l to EM/24 144)#-3#-(001 to 144)X console station-port number -(I 144)X-/#-(0 Forced LCR -(l to Forced -(l to Station or to 6W/10 to 69: No assignment Analog telephone Dlgital telephone Of 1M account 144)~~66(4 lockout L - Extonslons or l)# slgnal -(l to lM)W-#-(0 Call waiting or I)# -(l to 144)#-Pi-(0 Busy override or 1)X to 144)#-W-(0 or Busy overridden -(l to Prime 144)#-116(0 of line preference -(l to Ringlng 144)#-12#-(0 01 l)# line preference -(I to 144)C13#-(0 Unsupervised -(l SMDR to printout l)# o( conference 144)#-14#-(0 of FFl-2#-I#-174 l)O(FF2-lH,FF-3#-11I - Extension-wide or l)#(FFl-21.-21-61) Incomlna cdts t 0 telephone (12 FF Ilnes) telephone (24 FF lines) i (6 FF Ilnes) 5: 6: 7: 8: 9: 10: Reserved DSLT (Vs. 3.0 or higher) EM/24 VB-43310 OPX (pulse) OPX (tone) Voice mall (AEC) 11: 12: 13: 14: DSSl DSS2 DSS3 DSS4 - Extension Extension Extension Extension EM/ar 1 to 0 n P 0 r t 8 lO/lCKl lo/100 ll/lOl ll/iOl nd connoclod 144~ Stored extensions LCR restrict/cm for on oubld~ d delmli 9999: Statlon 2 to lockout W - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - EM/24 cd/s LCR I:Exhns&nPortstand2 0: Eafonsbn Potts 0: No call wattlng l)#(Seo X 3: Dlgltal No dry ooa3 to code -(l to 144)#-7(1-(0 CO line off hook -(l code R E 4: Dlgttal 1: Forced 0: Disabk 1: Enable digits)## 144) n a Q No 1)X restriction 144)~~W-(0 verified (1 to 69)# 15: Voice mall (OPX) 16: First attendant console 17: Second altendant console 18: Third attendant console 19: Fourth aftendant console to Pats code - I: 0: 1: 0: Cd wattha Dbab& Enable Rejects - - - - - - - - - - I: 0: 1: 0: Accepts Dbabh Enable Dkable - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - I: En&k 0: Dkabh 1: Enable 0: Dkable I: EndJk Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com c FF3Key-Extensions Account Address Account c Phone (Main List) h E -(I to CO lU)#-15f-(0 line of off-hook 1 to slgnol -(l to lU)I-W-(0 Q CO -(l llne off hook to lU)#-171-(0 slgml PSD -(l names to (5 or ICI sets extensions -(l to lU)C20#-(0 to 10 norms) - large poQe groups u l)# 02 Sets extensl0ns -(l to lu)(r-22+(0 to page groups of l)# 03 %tS t0 PClge 04 QRXPS u to medium 0 l)# p&Je groups u 11* 05 1: Page 0: 9o.a not 1: Page 0: o0.a 1: Page grocp 0: D0.a no/ Page grq 05 0o.a not behmg page 1 to 0: 1 No ctnngo to 24: See Sets adnskms -(l to lU)#-26+(0 idle dkpkxy -(l to ID1 off -(l to ID1 colt t0 - large-dkpluy 144)&27#-(0 hook PaQ0 Qt0’JPs u 1 to 24H Q dkpW lU)I-28+(0 u status kXQe-dkpkYY 24)# diillng 1 to during -(l CO to lu)r-sor-(o u line call d&pkry 1 to 24)l after diing -(l to lU)r-31r-(0 Page call dkplay u - 1 to 24)1 brge-dkplcw -(l Q 1 to Cal -(l waltlng to Intercom -(l to Extension dkplay lu)r-3s(0 busy tone lU)#-34C(O u directory -(l to 1u)~-35.-(0 hlghor) Extension clcss u kxJe-dkplov 1 to 24)# dkpkzy - display of 24)# I)# oI to pqp Qc4@ 01 P to m qoLp 02 to pqp Qolp 05 to page gu#J 04 to pqa qarp 07 0 r t a c. 06 -9 24: See programming Mawal ograrwnlng Mcnud 24H - to lU)M9e-(0 u line call dkplay lU)(I-32#-(0 n 24)# -(l CO to 00 kq?AkP~ 1 to display Qarp 07 telephone 1 to - Qroql not page 04 Mong 1: 0o.a to 01 -9 0: 1: l)r I 00 Mong group not 0: of wing grq not -(l lU)I-2940 e volume I sets extensions to WQe Qrwps 06 to t wkme display Doea sets extensions to -(l to 144)#-21I-(0 sets extensions -(l to lU)II-w-co l-igher l)# 01 lu)r-zsr-(o 3: me&ml i page groups of l)# 0xtensionS Lowu pattern 00 to 2 volume n 8 page groups u l)# -(l Mlnlrnum I)# u Sets extenslms -(l to lU)r-lPI-(O 1: 1H OI lU)*-lM-(O X 4)(1 volume 1 to service 0: large-dkpluy (CPC-B 6)# large (CPC-I) setting va. 1 No to Rogrammlng Manual Programming Mcnwl dratgo 24: See 2.0) dkpm VI 3.0 i 0 1 to 8: Set to Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com IndMdwl extension 36 FlQ Key - JZxtensions DES Account Name kcount Address Address -(I to 14&#-36#-(0 RIngback tone Cutover Oate Account Phone (Main List) / to wtth Extmston Foaturo 2H (WC-B busy Vs. 0: 3.0) to lU)#-37#-(1 Tl port (CF’C-B to 3 or class station Vs. 4.0 or hQh.0 7 to -(l to hlghor) ~MH-39#-(0 Extension -(I to hlghor) DSLT -(l ring IM)#-UU-(0 handset to 144)#-41#-(0001 -(l to hlghor) Permanent call tone e n 0 7: OPT1 8: OPT2 9: DTMF n lo: CONF 11: MFRl MFRZ 0 (SCC) Vs. 3.0 or 0: BrokUs hobd 1: conference 9H (WC-B Vs. 3.0 or 0: 0-d (CPC-B to Vs. 3.0 (CPC-B lnltiie on 1: 3 set ON/l set OFF ON/2 set OFF ON/l set OFF ON/2 set OFF 5: ON/3 set OFF 1 set @hrrt Vs. 3.0 or (WC-B (CPC-B Vs. Vs. set OFF set sac OFF OFF set OFF OFF SlT t- h proonrm ON/l set OFF 2: 2 set 3: 1 set ON/2 ssc OFF ON/2 set OFF 4: 1 set ON/3 set OFF 5: 6: 7: 8: 9: 1 set ON/5 set OFF 1 set ON/7 set 0.5 set 0.5 set 0.5 set 0: Nonmaf “=: rtng sdng 1: 3 set 1: Louder 9999H dng 2: 2 set 3: 1 set 4: 1 set 6: 0.5 set ON/OS 7: 0.5 set ON/OS 0.5 set ON12.5 8: 0.5 set ON/3.5 9: 1 set ON/7 set 0: DO&WICWI~ on or call trunk OFF ONf3.5 ON/J.5 ON/3.5 set OFF set OFF set OFF (+6dB Gain) No relocallon Nof lowurdod codas - sot - codes 144~~42#-(0 to X t Wngback (WC-B level 3.0 w hlghor) Auto set relocaiion s/gnat sQnal l# 111 vdume Q E 144) i (.SlT/OPW or (1 to 3: DATA .. c PM pattern busy wltt~ Ports 2: SLT MTEL) to ton. of 1: KTEL 13H 12: -(l to 144)#-3W-(0 or hlghor) SLT hook flash -(l to 144H-39#-(0 to hlghorl Extension ring pattern Rtngback 1: Busy signal 2: -(l sheet 3)# 3.0 0: or 1: Busy/No forward answer 2: eusy 3: No answer -(l to higher) Permanent -(I to hlahor) MljMCil 144)#-UI-(NN(N))# call (WC-B forward IM)#-UI-(O separailon or Vs. 3.0 01 NN(N): extension l)# (CFC-B Call forward exMnsion number Vs. 4.0 or 0: MC0 1: ML keys kevs Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com 3 '; I he FF4 Key is for setting ring assignments to each trunk. F The attendant position (port 1) defaults to ring (data 1). All other extension ports default to no r-kg (data 0). F Ring settings are assigned for day, night, day-delayed, delayed, extension, and extension-delayed ring. K night- 4 e Y To assign a ring to Recall timers or to set Call Forward No Answer, refer to the FFl Key forms on pages 8, 9, 10, 11, 12, and 17. There are four programming assignment information: forms for recording ring- The Hunt Group Tables form and the Call Coverage Group Extension Tables form are surnmary sheets for the installer/ programmer and are helpful cross-references for the Customer since the same information is also on the Extension Summary form and Key Plan. The forms explained below cue located at the buck of this manual immedia.teZy foUowing the FFIO Key information: The Extension Summary form is for the salesperson system administrator. Refer to the Ringing Assignment on this form. Note: See the DBS Programming Guicfance Manual five (5) ring-assignment addresses. and box Section 400, for the See the Addendwn to the DBS Progranuning lnsb-uctions. Section 400B, for the eleven (11) Hunt Group addresses. Save Your Original Forms!!! i 38 Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com liYF4 Key - Ring Assignment DBS Account Name Accbunt Address Cutover Date Account Phone (Main List) sheet of cl Day FF4-1X-(1 to 145)%-(1 to &I)#-(0 or l>U See FFl -2X-4+ 1# 0 Night FF4-2X-(1 to 14!Wo See FFl-2#-4R-lt 0 Day-Delayed FF4-5+(1 to 14%&o to &W-(0 or 1Y c1 Night-Delayed FF4-W(1 to 14!5)#< 1 to 64)%<0 or 1I# cl Extension FF4-7#-(1 to 144)#< 1 to 144)%-tO or 1)B c cl Extension-Delayed FF4-#<1 to 14&W to &I)#-(0 or 1)P to L&W-CO or l>a A tl 3 i n Q A 8 s i Q n m e 11 t Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com FIT4 Key - Ring Assignment Adcount Address - Hunt Group 1 Yot Name lot ExVPofl me qF Extension ?F Timer tiension xtension xtension xtension xtension xtension xtension 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 Pilot Name Pilot ExVPOrt Type TRF Extension TRF Timer Extension 1 Extension 2 Extension 3 Cdbneinn d -ensIon Hunt Group 3 Pilot Name Pilot Ext./Port Type TRF Extension TRF Timer Extension 1 Extension 2 Extension 3 H Pilot Pilot Type TRF TRF Name ExVPort Extension Timer Extension Extension Extension Extension Extension U n t 1 2 3 4 5 T 0 a b Day Delayed RingNight Delayed Ring- lay Delayed Ring- ‘ilot Name TRF Timer Extension 1 Extension 2 Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com Day Delayed Ring- i FF4 Key - Ring Assignment DBS Account \i Account Name Cutover Date Addre Extension Tab14 cdlCoverogeGfoup2 CdlCoverogeGroup3 Cdl Coverage Group 4 Extension l- Covering Extension 1- Covering Extension l- 2- COVWiIlQ k-tension 2- Covering &tension 2- A Covering Extension l- Covering Covering Extension 2- Coveting Exiension Extension 3 Extension 3 Extension 3 a Extension 4 Extension 4 Extension 4 Extension 5 Extension 5 Extension5 1 1 Extension 6 Extension 6 Extension 6 Extension 7 Extension 7 Edetion 7 C Extension 8 Extension 8 Extension 8 0 a C V Cdl Coverage Group 5 cdl coverage Group 6 Cdl Coverage Group 7 Cdl Coverage Covering ExtensiOn l- COV&lQ Extension l- Covering Covering Extension 2- covefinQ Extension 2- Extension 3 Extension 3 Extension 4 Extension Extension 5 Extension Extension b Extension Extension Group 8 Extension l- Covering Extension l- CovefinQ Extension 2- Covf3finQ Extension 2- Extension 3 Extension 3 4 Extension 4 Extension 4 5 , Extension 5 Extension 5 Extension 6 Wetion 6 Extension 6 7 Extension 7 &tendon 7 Extension 7 8 Extension 8 Extension 8 Extension 8 e r a Q e G r 0 U P Cdl Coverage Gfoup 9 cdl coverage Group 10 Cdl Coverage Group 11 Cdl Coverage Group 12 Covering Ex.tension l- Covering Extension l- Covering Extension l- Coveimg Extension l- Covering Extension 2- Covering Extension 2- Covering Ex-tension 2- Covering Extension 2- Extension 3 Extension 3 Extension 3 Extension 3 Extension 4 Extension 4 Extension 4 Extension 4 5 Extension 5 Extension 5 Extension 5 Extension Extension 6 Extension 6 Extetion 6 Extension 6 Extension 7 Extension 7 Edension 7 Extension 7 8 Extension 8 Extension 8 Extension 8 Extension Cdl Coverage Group 1: Cdl Coverage CdlCoverogeGfoupl4 Group 15 Cdl Coverage Group 16 Covering Exfension I- Covering Extension I- Covering Extension l- Covering Exkmsion 1__ Covering Extension 2- Covering Extension 2- Covering E&nsbn 2- Covering Extension 2- 3 Extension 3 Extension 3 Extension 3 Extension Extension 4 Extension 4 Extendon 4 Extension 4 Extension 5 Extension 5 Extension 5 Extension 5 Extension 6 Extension 6 Extension 6 Extension 6 Extension 7 Extension 7 Extension 7 Extension 7 Extension 8 Extension 8 Extension 8 s 4 Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com i he FF5 Key is for setting pre-programmed feature codes to extension ports. Remooe any CO line or pooled trunk information with the CONF key before programming the FE5 features. In addition to the 16-, 22-, and 34-button telephones, you can also prograxn FF5 features on the AFP (Attendant Feature Package) Console, the DSS/72, and the EM/24. forms for 8F5 Key features. 7here are four prtgrm AU of these forms are for the instakr/pmgrummer: TheExtensionKe~formonpage43andthe sample form on page 44 are for recording Personal Speed Dial and Flexible Feature information for a single extension. Use one for-r-nfor each extension port. Photocopy the original form and use only the copies. The AFP (Attendant Feature Package) Console F’F Keys form on page 45 is for recording AFP progmmming. The shaded areas on the form represent fIxed AFP console keys. The AFP is available only on CPC-B Version 2.0. The DSS/72 FF Keys form on page 46 is for recordi.ngallattendantconsoleprogrammmg, including the AFP. The EM/24 FF Keys form on page 47 is for recording trunks or extensions assigned to specific extension ports. Save Your Original Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com Forms!!! E F F 5 K e Y I??5 Key - Fkible’Featums Penonal Speed Dial (PSD) FFl O-2#-( 1 to 144)#-(90 P!sD CODES 90 to W#-( 16 digits)# Name / Number L B E X J 93 94 95 96 97 98 t e n 8 i 99 0 n I Mullt-llne Key Assignment I FFKeys 1 ML5 (85) 1 1 Flexible Feature Key Assignment FFS-( 1 to lM)#-( 1 to 24WCONF-(Up Feature Code 1 I 1 ML9 (9) I to 6 digits)ll Feature Code Feature Code Feature Code Feature Code Feature Code 19 20 21 22 . 23 24 13 .14- 15 16 17, 18 7 - 8 . 9 10 11 12 1 2 3 4 5 6- c 16 Key Telephone 22 Key Telephone 34 Key Telephone (VW221 0,42211,42213) (VB-43220,43221,43223,43225) (VB-43230,43231,432X3) = FF Keys 1 to 6 = FF Keys 1 to 12 = FF Keys 1 to 24 Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com 1 (For Feature Codes and Tl Alarm Key Assignment, See FFKey Code Chart on Page 74) DBS Account Name Account Address Cutover Date Account Phone (Main List) Sheet of Personal Speed Dii (PSD) FFlO-2141 to 144)+(90 to 99)#-(16 d@ts)# Name / Number I 90 ,opmtm a 91 solis 92 sauk 3m 4m 93 94 95 ap-*t-m 73 BCCW. c91-w1-555-f234 1 E x t e P S i 0 n MutMne Key Assignment FF5-(1 to 144)#-(1 to 24WCONF-(81 to 86,89M T- Name / Number ML1 (81) ML2 (82) ML3(83) FFKeys 1 Flexible Feature Key Assignment FFS-(1to 144)#-(1 to W&CONF-(Up’ Feature Code L faZ3 4,s 6 7 ML4(84) ML5(85) 8 ML6 (86) ML9 (9) 15 th$gh 22 4 thmvBlr u, 23 I4 to 6 Qgits# Feature Code Feature Feature Feature Code Code Code .. Feature Code 19 20 21 .22 23 124 13 14 15 . 1 16 17 . I 18. 7 . 1 - D&s 210 Pa0 ML1 81 8 2 !D.ssm I1220 !ML9 89 K 9 3 GP*-h 70 ML9 89 ,. 4 XllTage RIO lXSl20 m 16KeyTelephone(\16-42210,42211,a2213)=ff Keys 1 to6 22 Key Tete~hone (V&43220,43221,43223,43225) = FF Keys 1 to 12 34 Key Telephone (\/B-43230,43231,43233) = FF Keys 1 to 24 11, 5 BPf ~~ lxs 130 !Pl30 ,12 6 . -Rhk ‘3 !D.s.s140 m40 (For F&turn Codes and 11 Alarm Key Assignment, See FFKey Code Chart on Page 74) .. 44 Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com FF5 Key - FkxibZe DBS Account Name Account Address Featzms Cutover Date Account Phone (Main List) Sheet-of This Table for 1 st Attendant Console 2nd Attendcmt Console 3rd Attendant Console 4th Attendant Console E A F P c 0 P s 0 1 e F F \ r K FFS-(149 k 1s2wm to SwcoNF- m wS/7ldlFkyr e hvkw Y s u F&(149 k Ia-(01 to 32WCONF- [PIK)CPPOCUD Riitsii /Key1 Feahin * 1Kev i -Feature Indicate External Page Zone with an asterisk. Feah~ro Feature 1Kevl Feature - Fixed Feclture I Kev I Feature EZKI I Kevl - D&un Feature for 3 dii I Kev I Feature (or 2 digits) 4-c Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com FE5 Key - FZexibZe Features Account Address Account Phone (Main List) DSS/72 FF Key Assignments B lettside Key Fealure 65 Key Feature PAGE0 57 pAGia3 66 PAGE1 58 PARK1 Key Feature 67 pAGE2 Key Feature 59 p- 68 PAGE.3 60 PAM3 D S S / 7 2 F F K e Y/ 8 Ext. , p~No. 1stDSSConsotefor 1st Attendant 2nd DSS Consot. 1St Attendant 1st DSS Ccnsole mdAblu!ant 2nd 2nd * Indicate DSS Console Attefldant f-J for for for 0 Key Feature 69 PAGU 61 p- Key Feature 70 pPAW5 Key Feature 71pPNM Key Feature 72PNW 0 0 External Page Zone with an asterisk. Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com 46 E‘FS Key - Flexible Features DBS Account Name Account Addre Cutover Date EM/24 FF Key Assignments You need both the FF3 key crnd the FF5 key to program the EM/24 Cons/e. 47 Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com he FF6 Key, in combination with the DSS/72, can create messages for absence message codes 5 to 9, and can assign names to extensions, system speed dial, personal speed dial, trunk lines, and hunt group pilot extensions. 1 13 F F 6 K e When there are several DSS units, use only the unit positioned nearest the telephone for programming. Y Use the Name Assignment formwith the Speed Dial I&t, Key Plan, and Summary Key Plaq. All these forms are for the installer / programmer. Save Your Original 1 Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com ( .- Forms!!! 1 48 FEY3 Key - Nane Account Addre Assignment Account (CON0 Clear Data Phon Use the DSS to enter Names 1 13 N a m e A 8 s Sp: Bs: C: -: Use Keypad to enter Numbers EXWlSbNFM-IX-(1 to lM)R-(10 -M==w FF6-M-(5 chamcters~ Use with Key Plan or Summary Key Plan SSDNcme&sQment FF6-28400 to 89)#-( 16 &xactersM A name can be stored in each System Speed Dial code (00 to 89). Use with Speed Dial list PSD Name iesignment FF6-3#-(1 to 144)#-(90 to 99)#-(16 charoctws)# A name can be stored in Personal Speed Dial codes (90 to 99) for each extension port (001 to 144). Use with Speed Dial list i Q n m e xl t 8 Space Backspace Movetoieft Move to right to 9)#-(15 chamctefsb Store Absence Messages in message codes (5 to 9). Each message can be a maximum of 15 characters. Messages (0 to 4) cannot be changed. 0: In Meeting 1: At Lunch 2: Out of Office 3: Vacation 4: Another Offrice 5: 6: 7: 8: 9 Ttunk Ncme Asigmmt (CPC-8, V2.0) FF6-SR-(1 to 64)#-(6 chcmcters)# A trunk name can be a maximum Hunt Group f’ilot Name Ass&merit FF6-#-( 1 to 8)#-( 10 charcicters)# A pilot name can be a maxtmum of 6 characters. (CPC-B, V.2.0)‘ of 10 characters. Cd WcMng Text Reply (cpc-E, m.o or higher) FF6-7#-(1 to 5)#-(15 chcm&rsM The answer can be a matimum Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com of 15 characters. 4 (_ he FF7 Key is for programming toll restricted Area and Office codes. The submodes are (l# to 9#). 7hereareseuenfoms ades: iheinstaller/prqgrammer canusetorecord these The TRS System Settings form is for submode l#. ‘This programming affects the entire toll restrict system. TheTRS&eaCodes/OfficeCodesformisforsubmodesZ# and 3#. It establishes restrictions for Classes of Restriction 3 to 6. The TRS Special Area Code Tables form is for submodes 4# and 5#. It is for Classes of Restriction 3 to 6. Each of the four tablescanacceptonethousand(1,000)officecodeoramacode entries. The 7-Digit Call Restrict form is for submode 6#. Use this optional table to restrict up to tMy 7-digit numbers for Classes of Restriction 2 to 6. PI F F 7 K e Y c The TRS Day / Night Assignments form is for submodes 7# and 8#. In most cases, the “all-trunk” setting is used for each extension, but excepfioIls can be made wherever needed. Enter trunk number and COR (0 to 7). Photocopy the original form and use a separate page for day and night. The TRS Block Mode form is for submode 9#. Record default changes (deny, allow) for each CORkom 3 to 6 throughout the toll restrict system. 7hefol7nexpzuinedbebwislocatedattibackofthismanual . . zmm&at@foUowing the IF1 0 Key information: Summary form is for assigning toll reslrictions to each extension. Use one form for each extension port. Photocopy the original form and use only the copies. Refer to the TdRes~nbox on this form. The Extension Save Your Original Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com Forms!!! 50 FlVKey-TRS ’ 3% Account Cutover Date Account Phone (Main List) Name Sheet of I n Settings 1 International calls ofWe -l#-2# Incoming calls -l#-3% Maximum digits dialed code tab/8 0: Disable I: m&8 T R S Not f8Shkted -I#-AX 211 dial restriction -l#-5# 311 dial restriction -l#-6# 411 dial restriCtiOn -l#-7# 511 dial restriction -111-M 611 dial restriction -l#-9# 7 11 dial restriction -l#-low 811 dial restriction -I#-1 l# 911 dial restriction 1 to 15: 15th to 29th digit 0: Allow 1: Deny 0: Allow 1: Deny 0: A/low See FF7-M -111-121 74g1i resirkt table COR Tvpe 2 See FF7-M -l#-13# -11-141 7-ciigit restrict table COR Tvpe 2 see FF7-6# restrId table COR TYW 2 Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com 1: Deny 0: Allow 1: Deny 0: Allow 1: Deny 0: Allow 1: Deny 0: Allow 1: Deny 0: A/law 1: Deny 0: Allow 1: R8ddCt 0: Allow ?: i?8SfdCt 0: Allow I: Resfrkf S Y s t e m Cutover Date Account Phone (Main List) A r e f - - - - - ---- - .::~:::::::::: .\...:..:.- 1: - I- bi ::.:.:.z:::::: - - - - - ~ - ___ ~ - - - - - . . . . . . . . ..y. 7.. .:.A:.:.:.‘:..:.: .:: ,.:. ,. .:: ,. - - - . .... Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com Class of Restriction ~ (COR) - - 52 FYVKey-ZftZS 1 PBS Account Name Account Address Cutover Date Account Phone (Main List) Sheet --- (3 to 6)l - - -- - - - - - of ::i$!:. F:F& T R S COR ( ‘: A r e ---m---- (3to6) I - - -- - - - - - - ------ -------- a / 0 f f i C e -- - - - - - - - - - __ - - COR l-----------(3 to 64 ___ . .: ....:;. 3......“...: ___ ___ d Special Office Codes (000 to 999) Class of Restriction Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com (COR) DBS Account Name Account Address Cutover Date Account Phone (Main List) sheet of FF7-6#-(1 F7-l#-(12to 16)#-(Oar l)# D i Q i t c C a 1 1 R e s t r i C t i 0 n S l Noentriesatddautt Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com 54 Account Cutover Date Account Phone (Main Ust) Address sheet 0 DAY FF7-7#-( 1 to 144)#-( 1 to &I)# or (65)#-(0 to 7)# 0 NIGHT FF7-8#-( 1 to lb!)+( 1 to 64)# or (&)#-(0 of to 7)# R 42 43 s 44 D a Y 49 I 53 I 1 I I I I I N t I 26 77 -65 Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com 1 I I I I I 5-c DES Account Name Account Address Cutover Date Account Phone (Main List) Sheet of FF7-9#-(1 to 16)#-(0 or l)# -9#- 1% Area Code - COR 3 -9#-2% Area Code - COR 4 -9#-3w Area Code - COR 5 0: Allow 1: Deny 0: Allow 1: Deny 0: Allow 1: Deny B Office Code - COR 3 1 0 ck Office Code - COR 5 M 0 Office Code - COR 6 Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com d e he FF8 Key controls economy trunk lines for designated calling areas. The submodes are (l# to 8#). The following forms are for the iizstaUer/pr The LCR Area Codes/Office Codes form for submodes l# and 2# establishes area code tables and office code tables. The LCR Of!fice Codes for Special AreaCodes form is for submodes 3# and 4#. Ifthe customer requires special area codes, set them in tables 1 to 4. ‘l3eLCRTimePriorityTabksformforsubmode 5# sets up time priority tables for the trunk groups. The Ix=R Trunk Groups form for submode 6# separates trunks into groups. The LCR Delete/Ad$ Tables form is for submodes 7# (delete) and 8# (add). TheDeleteTablerecordsupto 16digitsstripped Tom an outgoing dialed number. Example: delete an area code or l+ area code. The Add Table records up to 16 digits added to an outgoing dialed number. ICw-@e: adds a carrier’s (MCI, Sprint, etc.) account number or equal access number (1m). Save Your Original Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com Forms!!! K e Y DBS Account Name Cutover Date FFS-l#-(1 L3 -- -- -~ ~ 1I ~ - - - --- -- -- - I I - to 15)#-(000 I I or l)# II - - - - - ~ - I- - - - ~ - - - - - - - - - ~- I- to 999)#-(0 1! of 1 ------ - - ___ ------ -- ~- -- -- - I Sheet - - - - ~ - - - - - - -.- - - - I I e - A I: f a / 0 - ----- I f f I .i - - - ~ - - - I- - - - - I ~ - - - - - - - ___ - - - - - - - - - - ___ - - - - - - - - ___ -- I e ----- J 1 c ___- C - ___- I I - - - - I I Time Prlorlty Table (1 to 15) Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com 58 DES Account Name Account Address Cutover Date Account Phone (Main List) Time Priority Table Special Area Codes FF8-3#-(1 - - - - - - to 4)#-(000 sheet of to 999)# - - S P e - C- fiecial Area Code - i a 1 (1 to 4)~ Table A - - - - - :: :. .: . . . y.: - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - :.:.:.: :.-. - - dOffice Code Entries (000 to 999)1 Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com t e a BlBKey-LCR DES Account Nam Account Address unt Phone (Main List) 7:00 am - 8:OO am :.:.>.. .+:.: .j;:::: ... lK--2#~3#~4# 5# 6# P 7# - s# (Tnmk ll# 9# --ax--- 12# 13# 16# 14# -15#(Tmnk 17# .---18#-1~-~#- 25# 26# 21# - 27!# 28# 29# 3=L-~%~~#.-.-~# 22# ~- 30# 38# 42# 43# 4.M 45# Groups) @ ..::: .:::.::: :...-. i...... ii.... i...... :.:.“. ........i .. :(.:.:. .:...> :.,_:.:. ..-.. ..... ..:.>:.. .# ;$$! .:::. ...A ::j::::: .::,x.. .... .._.... ..._..A ..... ..:. _... ......A. ..,. . ::... 2 ;,.,,._ ..:.:.:.: ..-.. .._ Q i..:. ...:i. ...:..... :. >..,i .:.:.,.: ..:.. :. ::: :._j.. ... 31# a# g (Td Group) i$ .::.>:. ...:; :: .._... .:.::.: .::.. :: .A.... ...l . ::. ..: ..:.:> ..;. ..A .::: .:.. :.:.: .:. :.. .;;:I ...\ 39# 40# ..:: ,::..:. 23# 24# (TrunkGroups) (TN& l# Groups) ..: $$f @# -47#48#- Groups) f'Aa e P I: i 0 r i t Y “;:: : .:;.: II... 6C Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com FZV?Key-LCR DBS Account Name Account Address 1#--2# Cutover Date Phone (Main List) Sheet -- of Account 3# 4# 5# 6# 7# 8# (Order within Each Trunk Group) 1#---2#-3# 4# 5# 6# 7# (OKbf 1#-.-2# 3# 4# 5# 6# withm Each Trunk Group) 7# (oldet 8# 8# withm Each Trunk Group) I L C R T r U n 1#p2# 3# 4# 5# 6# 7# 8# @rder wilhm Each Trunk Group) k G r 0 1#-2# 3# 4# 5# 6# 7# -- ’ (older 1#-2#.-3# 4# 5# 6# 8# within Each Trunk Group) 7# U P s 8# (Order within Each Trunk Group) 1#-2# 3# 458 5# 6# 7# 8# (Order within Each Trunk Group) 1#-e-2# 3# 4# 5# 6# 7# (kf9f Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com 8# within Each Trunk Group) 61 RZ%Key-LB? DBS Account Name Account Address Cutover Date f lLCR Delete/Add Tables1 FF8-7#-( 1 to 8)#-(Delete up to 16 digits)# FF8-8#-( 1 to 8)#-(Add up to 16 digits) Address -7#-2% -7#-3w -7#-4# -7#-SW -7#-6R -7#-7# -7#-8# -8#-1X -8#-2# -8#-3# -8#-4# -8#-5% -8#-6W -8#-7# 1 Feature Trunk 01 - Delete Trunk 02 - Delete Trunk 03 - Delete Trunk 04 - Delete Trunk 05 - Delete Trunk 06 - Delete Trunk 07 - Delete Trunk 08 - Delete Trunk 01 - Add Trunk 02 - Add Trunk 03 - Add Trunk 04 - Add Trunk 05 - Add Trunk 06 - kdd Trunk 07 - Add Trunk 08 - Add I Proaram Otiion’ LCR Delete Table Dialing Digits ’ Delete Dialing Digits Delete Dialing Digits Delete Dialing Digits Delete Dialing Digits Delete Dialing Digits Delete Dialing Digits Delete Dialina Diaits Delete LCR Add Table Dialing Digits Add Dialing Digits Add Dialing Digits Add Dialing Digits Add Dialing Digits Add Dialing Digits Add Dialing Digits Add Dialina D&its I Add up up up up up up up UD to to to to to to to to I Selected O&ion’ I 16 digits 16 digits 16 digits 16 digits 16 digits 16 digits 16 digits 16 diaits : a L C R d 8 up to up to up to up to up to up to up to UD to 16 digits 16 digits 16 digits 16 digits 16 digits 16 digits 16 digits 16 diaits 1 8 t 8 / A d d I l NoentriesutcWoutt , Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com 62 -. he FF9 Key copies programmed data from extension to extension, trunk to trunk, or FF key to FF key. The sub-modes are l# to 3#. :- Tnm&s/submode l#. FF9-l#-(Ol to 64)#-(01 to 64)## Trunk features can be copied to another txunkwith the single exception of the Private Line feature, which cannot be copied. 1 a mtensions/submode m to 144)#-(1 to 144)## 2#. FF9-2#-fl C With four exceptions, all other features can be copied to any extension in the DBS system. 7Ie&~exe@ons are= extension number, telephone type, station lockout code, and the EM/24 port number (BLF). EFKeys/submode 3#. FF9-3#-(1 to 144)#-(1 to 14-4)## Save Your Original I Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com Forms!!! 1 63 he FFlO Key is for programming System Speed Dial (SSD) and Personal Speed Dial (PSD) numbers. There are 90 SSD codes and 10 PSD codes in the DBS system. The Speed Dial List is for recording the SSD and PSD numbers. SSD numbers are programmed programmer or the attendant. by the installer/ PSD numbers canbe programmed by the station user as well as the attendant and installer/progmmmer. Distribute a copy of each Speed Dial List to every station user in the system. Photocopy the original forrn and use only the copies. See instmctionsfor ll-. thel?FWCey to assignspeed diat Save Your Original Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com Forms!!! 64 FFlO DES Account Name Account Address Key - Speed DiaZing Cutover Date Account Phone (Main List) Sheet-of PI S P e e d D i a 1 65 Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com he Extension Summary form is for recording all the FF3, 4, 6, and 7 Key features associated with each extension port. This who tion Key form is for the installer/programmer will eventually transcribe the informaonto the Summary Key Plan or the Plan for sign-off by the Customer. : CL E X t 8 n s i 0 n S U m m a r Y Save Your Original Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com Forms!!! 66 Extension DBS Account Name Account Address Extension General Summary Cutover Date Account Phone (Main List) Information Sheet-of ~(1. ran (FF3,6) (1 to 144) ]16022034CI)Std. 7 Ex-tension Programming ForcZz Forced Veriied Acct Code Station Lockout Code CO Off Hook Signal Call Waiting . .Busy Override Busy Overridden Prime Une Preference Ringing Line Preference Unsupervised Conference SMDR Printout Off Hook Sianal Volume Off Hook signal Puttem Page Group Pickup (External Paaina) 1 (FF3) Mu/k = Defautt DEnable 0 Ditcrble 1 1 I I 1 1 1 4 DEnable q Disable 1 Accept 0 Reject lEnable mm&/e mAcc& q Reiect mEnable nDiscrMe ~Etlable i$isabie DEnable 0 Discrble loYes ONo i 1.2.3.4 none b conmfe 00.01,02.03 I 04.05.06.07 1 1 I I m E X t e .n 8 i 0 Hunf Group (FF4) n Hunt Group Member Hunt Group Number Hunt Type Transfer Extension Pilot Extension/Name I to6 T/D/L Ext. Ring Assign. Ext. 10 to 69 (100 to 699) lmmediie Delayed U cdl caverage m (FF4) S m a r Y Tall Resfdcfbn DAY -mS VW ~3 Type TFS Type TRSType Uass of Resfricfian QF7) Type (0 to 7) Trunks (1 to 64) DAY Type (0 to 7) IRS TYW TRSType TRSType TRSTYW Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com Trunks (1 to 64) 67 Extension DBS Account Name Account Address ____ __ Cutover Date Account Phone (Main List) ._ ___ .__..__ ______-_ Ex-lension hrmral Summary InformatIon Ext. Port (1 to 14.4) (FF3.6) Extension NlOto6W/lOto69) Extension Rogramting 1 (FF3) h/k = DefauR iEEl Forced LCR ( Forced Verified Acct Code Station Lockout Code CO OfY Hook Signal Call Waiting Busy Override Busy Overridden Prime tine Preference Ringing Line Preference Unsupervised Conference s‘MDR Printout Off Hook Sianal Volume Off Hook Signal Pattern Page Group Pickup (External Paging) DEnable HfIis. abh9 I- 1 I I :! I; I 4 ] -[7Dis mabk aanable S1Accec bt OReject able !eiect IllEn Iable ~D&able I[aErwf9e 0 Disable mnable 0 Disable xept.-I- q N0 1 1.2.3.m q one jqcontinue od I ti.02.03 04.05.05.07 ~1 EXTRing Pattern 0 E x t e Ringing Assignment CO Ring Assiin. Day Niaht Hunt Group (FF4) .n QF4) 8 Trunks (1 to 64) i IO9, 14 1 to 14 4 0 n S ll m m Tdl Reshktion Class of Restriction (FF7) Coverage Member Coverage Group number Coverinc~ Extension 1 Covering Extension 2 a r I to 16 Y I 1 i Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com 6% he Key Plan is a summary-of the programming on each station for and 10 keys. the FF3,4,5,6,7,8,9, Programmed data is taken from the floor plan of an installation site which, along with the Summary Key Plan, is the only other place cable numbers are documented. This form is used on the final walk-through of an installation or upgrade to verify the programming on each station. [1:1 K 8 Y P 1 a n Save Your Original Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com Forms!!! DBS Account Name Account Address Cutover Date Account Sheet of 70 Phone (Main List) Circle or Fill in as Appropriate co-Llne/FF Asoment 1 2 3 4 5 6 key 7 6 9 Button 10 PlaI Amignment 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 10 20 21 22 I23 b-4 my Ntht lms COR 2348 --- ht 1 Delayed Circle or Fill in as Appropriate **e Nulhe/Deputmsnt hdmmsnt1 co-Llne/FF keyButton Auignment ll2l3t4i6 Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com IS 17 IS IO I10 I he Summary Key Plan is a summary of the programming on the FF3,4, 5, 6, and 7 keys for each station. The form is for larger installations where most, but not all the details of an installation are recorded. The floor plan, Key Plan, and Summary Key Plan are the only places where cable numbers are documented. Q The Summary Key Plan is used by the installer/programmer and the Customer to sign off on the installation. S U m m a I: Y I K 8 Y Save Your Original Forms!!! 71 Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com 72 S K m m a r Y K e 9 P 1 a n Technical Cornme,Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com 1 A P P e n d i X A ppendix A is a master list of FF key defaults. Following the master list is a pocket-sized version of the FF key default chart beginning on page 90. Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com Appendix FFl-l#- 1 Default A 1 Ca lendar - 1 #-(MMDDYYj# -2#-(HHMM)# Timers -l#-(0 or l)# - _-. 1 -3#-(0 or l)# -4#-(00 to 89)# -5#-(0 or l)# -6#-(0 or l)# -7#-(0 or l)# -8#-(0 or l)# ii 0 1 -9#-(0 or l)# -lO#-(0 or l)# -1 l#-(0 or l)# -12#-(0 or l)## -14#-(0 or 11# -15#-(0 or l)# -16#-(0 or l)# -17#-(0 or l)# -18# 0 1 1 I 1 1 1 Attendant transfer ext. number Attendant override switch Alarm LED mode BLF (extensionrdklayedring 1 1 I 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 to 69/ 101 1 1 1 -30%(0 or l)# I 0 -2#-(0 -3#-(1 -4#-(1 -5#-(1 -6#-(0 -7#-(0 -8#-(0 or or to to to or or or I)# l)# 4)# 3)# 4)# I)# l)# l)# I A t I I I SBMDR and Data 1 FFl-2#-2#-l#-(0 and Displays Call duration display SMDR timer 5. 16 or 30 seconds Least-Cost Routing (LCR) TRS for SSD Display during SSD iWTO-FLASH REDIAL One-touch dialing On-hook transfer Key bank hold Non-appearance CO-line hold SLT FLASH control Sets number of extension -digits Attendant intercom Extension intercom Splash tone on a voice call Splash tone on a busy override to 2)# -27#-(11 I Date (01 to 12) (01 to 311 (00 to 99) Time (0000 to 2359) FFl-2#-1#- -a#-(U axtd Time A P 1‘ 8 .n d i x 1 (Al2:4m 1 4 1 1 0 Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com SMDR SMDR SMDR SMDR SMDR SMDR SMDR SMDR parity check parity type baud rate stop-bit length data len&h printing mode 1 printing mode 2 (long/local) ~rlntim mode 3 (title) , 74 Appendix - I FFl-2#-2W- Default -9#-(0 or l)# -lO#-(0 or l)# 0 A A P R e SB%DRand Data 1 FFl-2#-3W- PBX Access and Pauses I I - -(l to a)#-(00 to 99) or (Ok to 9k)# 49 to 18)#-(1 to 3)# See FF!&l% I I UNA and EPI See FF4-1#.2# -1%(0 or 1)8 -(2 to 9)#-(0 or l)# 0 I Universal Night Answer (UNA) ring pattern External Page Interface (EPI) groups (00 to 07) 0 I FFl-2#-5#-(l to 8)#-(1 to 20)#-(0 cos or l)# I O I FFl-2#-6#0 Codes I FFl-3#- l#-(0000 to 2359)# -2#-(0 or 1 to 12)# -3#-(0 or 1 to 12)# -4#-(0 or 1 to 12)# -5#-(0 or 1 to 12)# - -6%(0 or 1 to 12)# -7iWO or 1 to 12)# -a#-COor 1 to 12)# -9#-(0 or 1 to 12)# -lO#-(0 or 1 to 12)# Class of Service setting Account I -(l to lOO)#-l#-(OOOl-9999)# -(l to lOO)#-2#-(0 to 7)# A PBX access code (00 to 99) or (Ok to 9k) Automatic pause after dialing (0 to 9) FFl-2#-4#- I n d i x Dump data mode (Xon/Xoff) PAI baud rate switch Verified Verified Forced Account Forced Account System Timers/Night 1 7 1 7 1‘ 7 1 7 9 Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com Codes Code toll restriction Switch/Conf. Automatic switch to night mode Attendant HOLD-recall timer Extension HOLD-recall tfmer Attendant transfer-recall timer Extension transfer-recall timer Attendant Hunt-Groun recall timer Extension Hunt-Group recall timer Attendant park-hold recall timer Extension park-hold recall timer Attendant reversion timer Unsupervised conference ta.Ik time Automatic pause timer CO-line FLASH timer SLT on-hook FLASH Incoming ring timer Ring signal delay timer Dial pause timer PBX FLASH timer Call forward/no answer timer Outbound ground detection tlrner Incoming ground detection timer Attendant mtercom HOLD-recall timer Appendix -23#-(0 or 1 to 12)# -24#. 40 or 1 to 12)# -25#-(0 or 1 to 12)# -26#-(0 to 15)# 1 -27#-(0 to 15)# -28#-(0 to 15)# -29#-(HHMM)# f I I Extension intercom HOLD-recall Attendant intercom transfer-recall Extension intercom transfer-recall CO delayed ringing timer EXT. delayed ringing timer Hunt Group no answer Auto Day Mode 7 1 7 2 2 2 e I Remote Maintenance I -(4 digits)# 1 FFl-BW- e n d i x timer timer I timer A I 1 FFl-4#- I A 9999 Set four digits Code Also used with DISA I I DISA ID Code -(4 digits)# Set four digits / FFl-6#- See Fl%!-ll#. 19#. 20# DISA Code for Outgoing Calls -l#-(0000 -2#-(0000 1111 to 9999)# to 9999)# 9999 Code 1. set four dieits See FF2-11#.19#.20# Code 2. set four digits See FF2-11#,19#,20# System Programming FFl-7#9999 -(4 digits) # FFl-8#-l# _, ( ID Code Set four digits DID I -(O or l)# I 0 0 DID reset DID/T1 reset DID Confirm FFl-8#-2W 40 or l)# 0 Confirmation of DID reset Sync sources/System FFl-8W-4# 0 3 -l#-l#-(0 to 8)# -l#-2#-(1 - l#-3#-(0 -l#-4#-(0 -2#- l#-(0 to to to to 3)# 3)# 3)# 25)# 0 0 2s -2#-2#-(0 to 15)# 1 Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com Timers System size Sync setting Sync setting Sync setting Network Disconnect for first sync source for second sync source for third sync source sync source recovery timer timer 76 Appendix FFl-SW-4# -2#-3#-(0 -2#-4#-(0 -2#-5#-(0 -2#-6#-(0 -2#-7#-(0 -2#-8#-(0 -2#-9#-(0 -2#-10%(0 Default to 15)# to 15)# to 8)# to 15)# to 15)# to 8)# to 15)# to 15)# -3#-(1 to S)#-(1 to 8)#-(0 to 30)# -4#-l#-l#-(0 to l)# -4#- l #-2#-(0 -4#- l#-3#-(0 -4#-l#-4#-(0 -4% l#-5#-(0 to to to to 24)# l)# l)# l)# -4#-l#-6#-(0 -4#-l#-7#-(0 -4%2#- l#-(0 -4#-2#-2#-(0 -4#-2#-3#-(0 -4#-2#-4#-(0 -4#-2#-5#-(0 -4#-2#-6#-(0 to to to to to to to to l)# l)# 15)# 15)# 15)# 15)# 15)# 151# -4#-3#- l#-(0 -4#-3#-2#-(0 to 9000)# to 9000)# -4#-3#-3#-(0 -4#-3#-4#-(0 to l)# to 9000)# -4#-3#-5#-(0 -4#-3#-6%(0 to 9000)# to 9000)# -(4 or 5)#-4#- l#-(0 to l)# -(4 or 5)#-4#-2#-(0 to l)# -4#-4#-3#-(0 to l)# -(4 or 5)#-4#-4#-(0 to l)# -(4 or 5)#-4#-5#-(0 to l)# -4#-4#-6#-(0 to l)# -5#-l#-l#-(0 to l)# -5#- l#-2#-(0 to 24)# -5#- l#-3#-(0 to 1)# 3 9 2 15 7 3 3 3 - A Sync sources/System Timers Guard timer Release acknowledge timer Outpulse delay timer Wink signal start detection timer Incoming Detection timer Answer Supervision timer 1 1 Frame loss counter (Master Cabinet) Slip counter (Master Cabinet) Red alarm counter (Master Cabinet) 1 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com X A Glare‘timer - immediate start Glare timer - wink start Digital pads (loss/gain settings) Trunk class (Master Cabinet) Number of channels used (Master Cabinet) Frame format (Master Cabinet) Clear Channel format (Master Cabinet) Failure Mode (Master Cab) Remote loopback detect-ton (Master Cabinet) Yellow alarm send (Master Cabinet) Red alarm detection timer (Master Cabinet) Red alarm recovery det timer (Master Cabinet) Yellow alarm detection timer (Master Cabinet) Yellow alarm recov det timer (Master Cabinet) Other alarms detection timer (Master Cabinet: Other alarms recov det timer (Master Cabinet) 0 0 A PP e n d i Loss Signal counter (Master Cabinet) Sync-loss counter (Master Cabinet) Yellow alarm counter (Master Cabinet) Yellow alarm relay control Red alarm relay control Loss relay (Master Cabinet) Frame loss AIS relay Alarm relay reset (Master Cabinet) Trunk class (Slave Cabinet) Number of channels used (Slave Cabinet) Frame format (Slave Cabinet) 7 I- Appendix Default A Sync sources/System Timers -5#-l#-6#-(0 to l)# -5#-2#- 1 #-(0 -5#-2#-2#-(0 -5#-2#-3%(0 -5#-2%4#-(0 -5#-2#-5#-(0 -5#-2#-6#-(0 15)# 15)# 15)# 15)# 15)# to 15)# 1 -5#-3#-2#-(0 -5#-3#-3#-(0 to 9000)# to l)# 1 Clear channel format (Slave Cabinet) Failure mode (Slave Cabinet) Remote loopback detection (Slave Cabinet) Yellow alarm notlficatlon (Slave Cabinet) Red alarm detection timer (Slave Cabinet) Red alarm recovery det timer (Slave Cabinet) Yellow alarm detectton timer (Slave Cabinet) Yellow alarm recov det timer (Slave Cabinet) Other alarms detection timer (Slave Cabinet) Other alarms recov det timer (Slave Cabinet) Frame loss counter (Slave Cabinet) Slip counter (Slave Cabinet) Red alarm notification (Slave Cabinet) 0 0 boss signal counter (Slave Cabinet) Sync-loss counter (Slave Cabinet) Yellow alarm counter (Slave Cabinet) Loss relay (Slave Cabinet) Alarm relay reset (Slave Cabinet) 0 0 0 1 1 1 to to to to to 1 1 1 -5#-3#-6#-(0 to 9000)# -5#-4#-3#-(0 to l)# -5#-4%6#-(0 to l)# -6#-(1 to 64)#-l#-(0 to 3)# -6#-(1 to 64)#-2#-(0 to 2)# to 2)# -SW1 to 64)#-3#-(0 -6#-(1 to 64)#-4#-(0 to l)# -6#-(1 to 64)#-5#-(0 to 2)# -6+(1 to 64)#-6#-(0 -6#-(1 to 64)#-7#-(0 -6#-(1 to 64)#-8#-(0 to l)# to l)# to l)# 3 0 0 0 0 1 -6+(1 to 64)#-9#-(0 to I)# -6#-(1 to 64)#-lO#-(0 to l)# -6#-(1 to 64)#-1 I#-(0 to l)# -7t-(0 to 9999)#-(10 to 69 or 100 to 699)R to 9000)# to 9999)#-( DID/DNIS f- settings Outgolm? tvoe Incomine tvoe Trunk mode Robbing bit setting Incoming dialing method Dial tone transmission Busy tone transmission Dial tone generation Rlngback transmission DNIS number setting Counter Dialing 10 to 69 A Red alarm counter FFl-8#-8# -7t-(0 X Trunk type Alarm FFl-8#-51 -3#-3#-(0 1 0 0 0 0 - A / .. P P e xl d i or 100 to 6991t DID dialing Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com Assignment I’ assignment 78 Appendix i ! \ FF2-(01-64)#- i A -l#-(0 or l)# -2#-(0 or I)# -3#-(0 or l)# -(4 to 9)#-(0 or l)# -lO#-(1 or 2)# -ll#-(dor l)# -12#-(001 to 144)# -13#-(0 or l)# -14#-(0 or l)# -15#-(1 to 3)# -16#-(0 or l)# -17#-(0 or 1 to 9)# -18#-(0 or 1 to 15)# - 19#-(HHMM) -20#-(HHMM) -21#-(0 to 2)# -2 1 #-(0 to 3)# -22#-(0 or l)# -23#-(0 to 15)# -24#-(0 -25#-(0 -26#-(4 or 1 to 15)# to 15)# to 6 or 13)# Default Programming 0 1 0 Denies trunk use Pulse or DTMF dial type Pooled-trunk-group access 9 Pooled-trunk-group access 81 to 86 1 Trunk type 0 Enables 0 ’ ^ Trunk DISA 3 Private-he port number Automatic pause Dial-tone detection IYMF signal sending time Unsupervised conference (trunk capability) Incoming ring signal pattern Trunk disconnect timer DISA start time DISA end time Loop-start. ground-start or DID trunk card Trunk selectfon DID - immediate or Wink start Wink-start timer 4 5 a Digit dial time-out DID interdigit dial time-out Tl port class - trunk 1 0 1 0 0 7 0 0 0 Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com A P P e n d i X A Appendix A 3 1 FF3-(001-144)#-l#-(10 to 69/100 to 699)# -2%(0 or 1 to 19)# -3#-(001 to 144)# -4#-(0 -5th(0 0 0 or l)# or I)# to 9999)# -S#-(0000 -7#-(0 or l)# -8#-(0 or l)# or l)# or l)# or l)# or l)# or l)# or l)# or 1 to 4)# or l)# or l)# -9#-(0 -lO#-(0 -1 l#-(0 -12#-(0 -13#-(0 -14#-(0 -15#-(0 -16#-(0 -17#-(0 Default Extension Port Specifications 100 to 699 Extension number PortslPorts2to144- 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 2 0 0 -(18 to 25)#-(0 or l)# 0 or -27#-(0 or -28#-(0 or -29#-(0 or -3O#-(0 or -31%(0 or 24)# 24)# 24)# 24)# 24)# 24)# 0 or 1 to 24)# or 1 to 24)# 0 -26#-(0 -32#-(0 -33#-(0 -34#-(0 1 1 1 1 1 1 to to to to to to or l)# to 9999)# -36#-(0 to 2)# -37#-( 1 to 3 or 7 to 13)# -38#-(0 or l)# 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 -4 1 #-(000 1 to 9999)# 0 - or l)# Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com A Busy override Busy overridden Prime-line pick up Automatic pickup for a ringing line Unsupervised conference (ext. capabilib SMDR printout by incoming call CO off-hook signal volume CO off-hook signal pattern f PSD name large-screen display (5 or 10) Sets extensions to page groups (00 to Oi Idle screen on the large-display phone [DT display on the large-screen phone [DT display on the large-screen phone CO-line display on display while dialing CO-line-call on large-screen after dialin Page-call display on large-screen phone Call-wait display on large-screen phone Intercom-busy-tone display on large- 0 -4O#-(0 or l)# -44#-(0 Forced verified account code Station lockout code CO-line off-hook signal for off-hook voice announce Call waiting Tl port class station SLT hook flash 0 to 3)# -43%(NN(N)) X 0 0 to 9)# -42#-(0 port number screen phone Extension-directory display on the large-screen phone (5 or 10 names) DID outside extension number Ringback tone with busy signal -35#-(0000 -39#-(0 Telephone types EM/24 console station Forced LCR restriction P e n d i Extension ring pattern D-SLT handset volume level Auto set relocation codes Permanent call forward Permanent call forward ML/MC0 Separation ! .-. extension 80 Appendix FF4-l#-(OOl to 144)#-(01 1Default to 64)#-(0 A 1 Incoming DayUme ring or l)# Ports 1 at 2Port83to144- 1 0 Hunt-Group FF4- 1 #-(151 to 158)#-(01 to 64)#-(0 or l)# FF4-2#-(OOl to 144)#-(01 to 64)#-(0 I 0 I Day Ring Tables FUng signal for pilot number Incoming Nighttime or l)# Ports Ports CO-Line Call Table ring Hunt-Group to 64)#-(0 or l)# 0 I I Hunt Groups -1%(11 to 69/101 -2%(0 to 2)# Pilot extension to 699)# 0 2 i FFQ-4#-l#-(1 to 8)#-(lo/69 number Search method Transfer extension number Transfer timer Hunt-group extension numbers First~coverine extension Second covering extension to 100/699)# Other covering to 100/699)# FM-5#to 64)#-(0 or l)# 0 to 64)#-(0 or l)# 0 Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com extensions Day Delayed-Ring Tables Daytime tables delayed-ring Hunt-Group FF4-5#-151 to 158)#-(01 and CO lin Call-Coverage Groups (16) -(3 to lS)#-( 1 to 8)#-( lo/69 -(OOl to 145)#-(01 Night Tables F&g signal for pilot number FF4-3#-(1 to 8)#- -3#-(10 to 69/100 to 699)# -4#-(2 to 32)# -15 to 12)#-(11 to 69/101 to 699)# and CO line 1 0 l&k 23 to 144- FF4-2#-(151 to 158)#-(01 Ring Assignment tiay Delayed Ring Ring signal for pilot number and CO lir Appendix A A 4 I? e 1 Night Delayed-Ring Tables FF4-6#-(OOl to 145W(01 to 64)#-(0 0 or l)# I Night delayed-ring X I Hunt-Group FF4-6#-(151 to 158)#-(01 tables n d i to 64)#-(0 or l)# Signal for pilot number 0 I Night-Delayed A and CO line I Extension Ring Tables FF4-7#-(OOl to 144)#-(001 to 144)#-(0 or l)# intercom 0 ring signal Ert Delayed-Ring FF4-8#-(OOl to 144)#-(001 to 144)#-(0 or l)# I 0 Tables I Intercom ring signal Reminder: DEFAULTS Record changes to the ring default on the Extension Summary form and the Hunt group Tables form found elsewhere in this manual. An extension can only be a member of either a Hunt Group x a Coverage Group. 82 Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com Appendix A A I FF5-(001 to 144)#- ~~ - Extensions P 0 e n d -(01 to 24)#-CONF-(PROGlO to 69/100 to 699)# i EL keys X : _-(Ol to 24)#-COl’W(81 A ML keys to 86. 89)W . FF keys - (01 to 24) Default 01 to 24 -(Ol to 24)#-CONF-(PROGPROG-6 -(Ol to 24)#-CONF-(6 di&tsJ# Aw key Pre-programmed codes dieits)# (See FF-Key FF keys - (01 to 24) I 01 to 24 I Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com Default Code Chart) I 8: Appendi% A A / i FFS-(145 to 148)#- DSS/72/BLF -(Ol to 24)#-CONF-(81 d i x A Default 1 FF keys - (01 to 24) to 24 -(Ol to 72)#-CONF-(PROGlO I Consoles MC0 keys to 86. 89)# -01 e n to SS/lOO to 699)# FF keys - (01 to 72) Default 01 to 56- 100 to 155 - Extensions 57 to 64- 7500 to 7507 - Park hold 65 to 71- #OO to #06 - Page zones 72- #52 - Day/Night -(Ol to 72)#-CONF-(PROGPROG6 -(Ol to 72)#-CONF-(6 DSS keys / dis!its)# Pre-programmed codes ditits)# (See FF-Key Code Chart] 1 FFkeys-(01 r-- to72) 01 to 72 1 I I Default - I ,' 84 Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com Amendix A A P P e FFS-(149 to 152)#- Attendant Consoles (4) n d i -(Ol to 08)#-CONF-(81 I MC0 keys to 86. 89)# FF keys - (01 to 32) I 01 to 32 I -(Ol to 32)#-CONF-(PROGlO to 69/100 Default A _. DSS keys to 699)# FF keys - (01 to 32) X Default 01 to 12 13 to 14 7508 to 7509 - Park hold 15 to 16 17 to 20 7504 to 7507 - Park hold 21 to 24 7500 to 7503 - 25 to 28 #04 to #07 - Page zones 29 to 32 #OO to #03 - -(Ol to 32)#-CONF-(PROGPROG6 -(Ol to 32)#-CONF-(6 ” ” ditits)W Pre-programmed codes d&its)!! (See FF-Key r ~~ FF keys - (01 to 32) I Code Chart) Default a 01 to 32 Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com 8-L Appendix A A. * d Absence Message Account Code * Alarm Answer Key Attendant Background Music (BGM) * 71 FF12 (#) 7 FF12 (#) 4 FFll (*) 1 0 FF12 (#) 53 4 $# #Busy Override * Call Forward/All Calls m Call ForwardMoAnslBusy * Call Forward/Busy Call Forward to CO Line I Intercom Dial Tone On/Off 1 Intercom Key I For example, Also: to store: Busy Ovwrfdo Tnnlr Qwulng 1 Sotion Lockout (example:741234), II 1 76 I*#voice I I 1 et T1 ahrm - enter an rxtonsbn - store as 88 (0144) call/Tone Call I Volcc Aaaormcc. key only if the feature coda is preceded can be stored b either an oxtension on a numbw or mde &I nurnbw followed by code 4. folbwed by mde 2. - II the feature mda 74 is stored on a One-Touch theIDcodewilldisphylrhenthestati~kndkckedout by pressing ON/OFF and CONF. key with the four-dfgft ID code1 II Pufc HOID To 75176 AUTO (90 to 99) 1 % Universal Night AISWK (UNA) and OSHook A FF12 (#) (00 to 07) FF12 (#) 50 to Crg Walthg X *c# FF12 (#) 52 FF12 (#) 51 These features can be stored on a One-Touch *# 2 AUTO REDIAL AUTO FLASH *Page Groups * Park-HOLD Key/Retrieve PermnalSpeedDial (PSD) FF12(#) 8 These features. tn addition One-Touch key. CONF 69 77 Mute Key Night Key 720 721 722 Headset Mode % Intercom Transfer Least-Cost Roulitlg (LCR) * Meet-Me Answer *Wessage Waiting (Set) Message Waking (Answer) Message waiting (Cancel) L‘ e n d i - IO pa& a call. press the HOLD key plus the ChwTowh key: Feature OR/OFF-PROC+FF key. key-lOl#-HOID Setttng number for master Setttng number for slave I Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com 86 Appendix FF6- Default -l#-(001 to 144)#-CONF-(10 char.)+/ -2#-(00 to 89)#-CONF-(16 characters)# -3#-(001 to 144)#-(90 to 99)#-CONF -( 16 character+ -4#-(5 -5#-(01 -6#-( 1 -7#-( 1 to 9)#-CONF-(15 characters)# to 64)#-CONF-(6 characters)# to 8)#-CONF-ii0 cha.ractexs)# to 5)#-CONF-( 15 characteIs)# - - Default FF7-l#-l#-(0 or l)# 0 -2#-(0 -3#-(1 -4#-(0 -5#-(0 -S#-(0 or to or or or 1 l)# 15)# l)# l)# l)# 0 0. 0 -7#-(0 or l)# -8#-(0 or I)# -9#-(0 or l)# 0 -lO#-(0 or l)# -1 l#-(0 or l)# -(12 to 16)#-(0 or l)# 0 0 1 0 0 FF7-2#or 1)# (DSS Console) Extension name System speed dial name (00 to 89) Personal speed dial name (90 to 99) Absence message numbers (5 to 9) CO-trunk-line name Hunt-group pilot name OHCA Answerback _l. Toll Restriction A Setting TRS for international calls Dialing restriction/incoming calls F&xQ.riction/maximum digits dialed 211 restriction 3 11 restriction 411 restriction 5 11 restriction 6 11 restriction 7 11 restriction 8 11 restriction 9 11 restriction 7-digit dial restriction/types (2 to 6) Area code types (3 to 6) Office-Code Table FF7-3#-(3 to S)#-(000 to 999)WO or l)# OtTice-code types (3 to 6) Special Area Code Table FF7-4#- Special area codes (1 to 4) to 999)# Special Office-Code Table FFT-5#-11 to 4)#-(000 Name/Message Area-Code Table -(3 to S)#-(000 to 999)#-(0 -(l to 4)#-(000 A to 999)WO or l)# Of&e codes (1 to 4) 87 Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com Appendix A Cn FF7-6#- I Default 7-Digit Restriction 7-digit FlW-7#-(001 to 144)#- -(Ol to 64)#-(0 -65#-(0 7 to 144)#to 7)# 7 X Daytime TRS Daytime TRS (all extensions) Nighttime to 7)# Nighttime Nighttime TRS TRS (all extensions) Type Blocks for each Area Code -( 1 to 4)#-(0 or l)# -(5 to 8)#-IO or l)# ‘Ibe (3 to 6) Area Codes Type (3 to 61 Office Codes ‘l&e (3 to 6) Area/Office Codes Type (1 to 4) Special Area Codes for Office Codes 49 to 12)#-(0 or l)# -(13 to 16)#-(0 or l)# FFS-l#- Default to 999)#-(0 or l)# Office-Code Table to 999)#-(0 - or l)# I Time priority tables (1 to 15) LCR offke codes (000-9991 Special Area-Code Table FF&3W-(l to 4)#-(000 Area-Code Table Time priority tables (1 to 15) 1 LCR area codes (000 to 999) FFS-2#-11 to 15)#-(000 A TRS FF7-9#- -(l to 15)#-(000 n d i TRS codes (1 to 50) Daytime TRS -(Ol to 64)#-(0 to 7)# -65#-(0 to 7)# FF7-8#-(001 Y e Table Speclal area codes tables (1 to 4) Special area codes (000 to 999) to 999)# Special Office-Code Table FFS-4W-(l to 4)#-(1 to 15)#-(000 to 999)#(0 or l)# I Time-Prioritv FFS-5#-(l to 15)#-(1 to 48)#-(1 Special office codes (1 to 4) Time-priority tables (1 to 15) to 8)# Time-priority Tables tables -(1 to 15) Time bands (1 to 481 LCR trunk groups (1 to 8) i 38 Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com Appendix FFS-6#- Trunk-Group -(l to 8)#-(1 to 8)#-(01 to 64)# LCR trunk FF8-7#- Tables groups Dial-Delete -(l to 8)#-(16 digit&# FFS-SW-(l to 8)#-(16 I- I digits)# Default FF9-l#-(01 A to 64)#-(01 Table &CR) Dial-delete tables (1 to 8) Dial-Add Table Dial-add mode to 144)#-(001 to 144)## Copy extension -3#-(001 to 144)#-(001 to 144)## Copy FF key mode 1 Default -l#-(00 -l#-(001 to 89)#-(16 to 144)#-(90 to 99)#-(16 digits)# mode Speed Dialing System d@ts)# &CR) Copy Mode -2#-(001 FFlO- A tables (1 to 8) Copy trunk to 64)## (1 to 8) Personal speed dial - speed dial - 39 Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com A T\ L; e n d Pocket-Sized r--- List of Programming --a---------------- s I I I I I I Addresses A 1 I I I I I I 1 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I t I I I I I -1r4oa 1v I I I I I I I I I I I 90 Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com Pocket-Sized List of Programming Addresses A P P e n d i x A I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I L ------------------------ i I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I -1 91 Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com A e xl d Pocket-Sized List of Programming -------------------l---%x I I I I I I I i A 1 I I I I I I I 1 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I‘ I I I I I I I Addresses I I I I FFI-SI-I# 4oOW 40 to 111 DID -_. 0 - 0 Rl-s#-l# DID reset OIOrrl Iuet DrncQnnnn I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I -----------------,-,,,,,-I 92 Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com Pocket-Sized List of Programming Addresses r---@&&--------_--- ------7 A I I I ~1” ._ .- ,- .- ..- I -~ -4u- I@-2r-(0 to 24w -4ElKw-m to 114 -4r-1r-4r4oto IW - I I I I I I -aa-ar-4crO -4ff-21-W-(0 I -’ _ __ 0 1 0 ._ to mu to l& I I I I I I I I I I I I L X I r I I I I I I I I I I I I A P P e n d i ----- __-_-____vw------e- Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com Number dchmnch l3unu~(Mwrcab0 Un mdtra hmmt used Waster Master Cabhell I I I I I I I I CabInetI I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I -1 93 I? 8 n d Pocket-Sized List of Programming -------------------l---x i Addresses 1 i A I I I I I I I I I I I I I f I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I L --------------------,,-,-I Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com 94 A P P e n a Pocket-Sized r ___ i I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I list of Programming if% Addresses A --------------------~ mm401-64w i x lD&ult !I I TnmkR0afomda t I ~. -I4woar Ilf -15e-11 ta31e -‘- I I _ ._-._I I 0 1 f I I I I I I I I I I L ___-_---_-------_------- Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com Dlablme d‘bii4FslmalsmdiMtmx I ‘. I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I J 95 &J e n d Pocket-Sized List of Programming Addresses i X A I I I I I I I I I I I FPs+o1-lU)#- Default 100 to 809 -IWlOlo69/lOOt0699J# --_.----21.IO or 1 u) 19l# -3wcoI to 1441# 41io or 111 -5r-(0 oc lI# -6ctoooO lo 9999v -74-(0 or 114 _ 0 0 ---_ -I- .1 Extewlon ExluWan I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I Port Speclflcatims number Tekphme typea EM/24 oonrole station port llumbcr .Forced LCR -wn Fcmxdvulflcd-ntcodc s.mlon lakout c0.i; .. CO-Une of?-hook ~,@,a, la o,T-,,.,.,k I I I I i I I I I I I I - I I I I I I I I I L -35r-(oooo to 9999M -36r-to to 21r -----.--_ -37r-(1co3ar7t01311 -36rio or I)# -39140 to 911 -41r4oax ta9999w .- -.._--. -4/I-(0 to 314 -43wNNlNll ---._._. -44wo or IW -- 0000 0 .-n_ DID outside camsion nu&r . . ..~ Iul&ck i&e v&h busy SIgnal l-1 MR Ckt) slauon - -_-- __-. UlJMcQ .scpanuon f I I I I --------------------------I Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com 96 A P P e n d List of Programming Pocket-Sized r--- I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I i I I I I I I I I I I x Addresses A -m------------------7 I I I FPCIO+I01 ,o 144lwJ1 i Defiult to 64lNO or I)# FWtS1&2Pmts2t.a blcolnhg Dayune 144 lung Adglmlout I rine 1 0 I I I I -fool to 1441401 lo 641r40 or 111 ratalC2rortssto144. N&c I I I I I Nlfi 1 0 FF4-21- Hunt-Group N&bt Table6 I I I I FM-Sb- L _____-__------_---_----- Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com Da+ lkla~ed-Rlr~ Tabkr I I I I I I I I I I I I J 97 . P . P P e n d Pocket-Sized List of Programming Addresses I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I Reminder: I I I I I I I I I I I I I I F&cord changes to the rtng default on the Mention Summary form and the Hunt group Tables form found elsewhere tn this manual. An atenslon can only be a member of either a Hunt Croup pi a Coverage Group. I 1 I L i __-----------m--s------- Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com -I 98 A P P e n d Pocket-Sized List of Programming Addresses i X A I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I FFs-(Ool cpl to 144w I I I I I I I RtCdOO8 to Z~#-CONF-@BQQ-IO to @,CXNB to 69$9 EL key13 I FF keys - (01 to 24) 1 Default I 01 to 24 401 to 24)WZONF-(PROOPROGB I I I I I I I wr JW I I I I key I I I I I I I I I I I I I I _ FF keys - (01 to 24) 01 to Pm-programmed codes fsn? R-Rev &de CJmIiJ Default 1 24 L,--~-~~---~----~~---- --- I I I I I I I I I I I I A 99 Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com P e n d Pocket-Sized I I I I I I I mlH145 List of Programming to 14I?w D6s/72/BLFconso1er q&l to !24wcoNF-~ to 66.88)r FFkeys-(01 I to241 MC0 keys Default f I I FFkeys-(01 to72) Default 01 to 56- 100 to 155 - Extensions 57to6465to71- 7500 to 7507 - Park hold MO to x06 - Page zones 152 - Day/Night 72---------I-------------------------- I I I i I I I I I I I 01 to24 I I I I I I I I Addresses Pre-programmed codes IsarF-~codrckart 401 to 72WCON?~# I I I I I I I I FFkcys-(Olto72) 01 to 72 Default i I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I L -------------------,,--,~ 100 Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com A P P e n d Pocket-Sized I I I I I I I I I I I I List of Programming i I I I ms414s MC0 -to-CONF-@~$fll@ FF kevs I CoPaoka Attaadoat to 152w - (01 to 321 I I I I . I I m to 69/166 -tQlldWto-CONF-O’ROO-10 FF keys - (01 DSS keys ma ta 32) I Dcfnllil I I I I2 13 to 14 I I I I I I I I I I I I I keys rkfarlll I (41 01 to 32 011n 750H lo 7.StXJ Park hold 17to20 7504 ,,I 7507 Park hokl 21 lo 24 75Ooto7m3- 25 to 28 x04 29 to 32 roolo 15 to 16 I I I - IO 107 - Pagr a03 - mncs I - I I I I I Re~programmed codes I I I I I I Addresses (See R-Key FF keys - (01 lo 321 01 IO 32 I Iktilrllt Code I Chart I I I I I I 101 Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com e n d Pocket-Sized r--s List of Programming i% I I I I I I ---em ----- ---- -_____ Addresses A 1 I I I I I I 1 I I I I I I I I I I C UFRy 721 t UFm 722 c#FawMtocoLhl 723 I I I I I I I I FFl2(r, fmbon 7976 A”lO(Wb”) I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I L t I __-----------------e--w- -I 102 Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com A P P e n d Pocket-Size IList of Programming r--$&=-- ------------------, I I I I I I I -Iu-IIXII lo 1441~-CONF-U0ch~l~ -&00 to 691r-coti-il6_--chuacun1r__-_ _.__-3r-fco1 to 144l~.160 (0 OOPCONF _ . 416 ..-- chalaclcn)d ---:4r.15 to 918-420NFi15 channcn1r _-_---. -5~.@l 10 64WCONF-I6 &~~trrslR .6U-(I to BJWJONF-(1Ochfuaclersl~ -7U-(I LO 5WCONF-(15 -. \ _-- A -._ [ chxaclurl~ I I - --- 0 0 i . -_.-___-HKA AIlwcrbut Restdctlon I I Sattia~ I I _2 11 mtrkllna -31 I rcstmkn .--.--41 I mwll-tk.n 51 I rnll4r4loll ._ -_.-.-_-. _Gil-Ion --- - 1 711- -... _ _ ---__ . . - ..-. - 611 rcItrruw __. --I)1 ---- 1 Rs(~lon 7digil dial raWkthn/lyp% P UI 6l ~ Pm-2#- I I I I I I I I I _ -- _-_.--- 0 .-0 I I I ( 1 ( .roll 0 0 0 I I I 0 1 0 I I I __ -_. -. d&l .__~ name ICI3 to 661 _... 1 DeQult -. .- DSS Ccndc) _ -I I A_. A m rP7-l#- E4tas101 -;;yslm qmd -. _.-- I , i X t r~uno/Mcuagc r?5- I I I Addresses keecedo Tabk I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I 103 Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com Pocket-Sized List of Programming Addresses r--- x --------------- ---I A 1 II I I I I I FF7-71-mo1to 14416 Devtlme nts I I -1 I I I f I I I I i I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I 1 I I I I L -----c------------------ -I 104 Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com A P l? e n d Pocket-Sized List of Programming Addresses I C I I I I I I I I I 1 1 Did-Delete P-m-74- I Table &CR) I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I i I I I I I I I I I I I -1,~(001 10 IUV-(90 lo 99Wl16 dl@lsIL L ___-------------__------ I I I I I I I I -I 105 Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com A p f P e n d i X B CC RuZes and Regulations f Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com 106 ': In compliance with the requirements of Part 68 of the FCC Rules and Regulations for e connection of Terminal equipment to the telephone network, and for your conven- n ience. the following information is presented. d Notifying the Telephone i x Company When connecting or disconnectin Terminal equipment to the telephone network, notify the telephone company of tfl e following: connection line(s), FCC registration number, and ringer equivalence number of the registered Terminal equipment. FCC Registration Model Numbers VB-420 10 (DBS308) VB-42020 (DBS616) Numbers Key System ACKUSA-61853~KF-E ACKUSA-6185~KF-E B Hybrid System ACKUSA-61855~MF-E ACKUSA-61856-MF-E When enabling Pooled Trunk Access, inform the telephone company or a Panasonic service center of the MF-E FCC Registration number. According to FCC rules, Pooled Trunk Access is regarded as one of the distinguishing features of a PBX as opposed to a key telephone system. The REN determines the number of devices you may connect to your telephone line and still have all those devices ring when your telephone number is called. In most, but not all areas, the total RENs of all devices connected to one line should not exceed five (5.0). Contact your local telephone company to determine the maximum REN for . your calling area. Service order code Network address signaling code Facility interface code Required network interface code DIRECT C~NNECTIONTOA PARTYLINE 9.OF E 02LS2 (2 wire/loop RT25c ORCOIN-OPERATEDTELSPHOXE start) LINEIS PROMBITED If you are on a party line, please check with your local telephone company for further information. Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com 107 Should Terminal equipment cause harm to the telephone network. the telephone company shall. where practical. notify the customer that service may be temporarily disconUnued. However, where prior noUce is not practical, the telephone company may temporarily discontinue service forthwith, if such action is reasonable in the circumstances. In case of un-notified temporary discontinuance of service. the telephone company shall: e n d i X 0 Promptly notify the customer of such temporary discontinuance of service. B (B) Afford the customer the opportunity to the temporary disconttnuance. (Cl Inform the customer of the right to bring a complaint to the Commission pursuant to the procedures set out in Part 68 of the FCC Rules and Regulations. (A) Availability Technical including to permit company customer’s 03 of telephone to correct the situation which gave rise information: information on interface parameters and specifications not set by FCC Rules, the number of ringers which may be connected to a particular telephone line Terminal equipment to operate in a manner compatible with telephone commumcaUons facilities, shah be provided by the telephqne company upon request. Changes in telephone and procedures: company communications facilities. equipment, f operations The telephone company may make changes in its communicaUons facilities. equipment. operauons or procedures. where such action is reasonably required in the ’ operaUon of its business and is not inconsistent with the rules and regulations in FCC Part 68. lfsuch changes can be reasonably expected to render any customer’sTerminal equipment IncompaUble with telephone company communications facilities or require modification or alteration of such Terminal equipment or otherwise materially affect its use or performance. the customer shall be given adequate notfce. in writing, to allow the customer an opportunity to maintain uninterrupted service. ; Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com 108 This system is hearing-aid compatible. e n d i x %iEN bX3 EWHMINQEMERQENCTNUMBERSOR B&JUNG TEAT CALLS lro EMEROENCY NUMBERS: B (A) Remain on the line and briefly explain U.3 Program or test emergency numbers early morning or late evening. to the dispatcher only in off-peak the reason for the call. hours: these are usually THE GRANTEE OR ITS Acmm SHALLPROWDETHE USEROFTHE REGISTERED THE FOLLOWING INFORMATION: /I \ (A1 installation. 03 Registered (Cl When a malfunction from the telephone nect all equipment. (D) If connections operation Terminal and repair procedures. equipment in the EQUIPMENT WITH where applicable. may not be used with party lines or coin lines. is indicated the customer shall disconnect the registered equipment line to determine the problem. Until the problem is corrected, discon- other than W25C are needed. contact the local telephone company. 109 Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com A P P 8 n d PLEASE OEBERVE THE FOLLOW~O GUIDELINESTO ASSURE THE SAFE USE OF Yom TELEPHONE (A) This product is an electrical device and can be hazardous if immersed in water. i X 03 To avoid the risk of electrical shock. do not use this unit while in the bathtub. shower. or when wet. lf you accidently drop the unit into water. unplug it first. then retrieve it by pulling the cord. (Cl The telephone temperatures. should not be exposed to heat sources, direct sunlight. extreme moisture, strong vibrations or greasy or dusty environments. (D) Never attempt telephone. to insert (El Never clean the telephone (F) Never install (G) Never install telephone that purpose. (HI Never touch un-insulated telephone wires or terminals been disconnected at the network interface. telephone wires. pins or similar objects in the vents or openings with benzol. paint wiring jacks during thinner a lightning in a wet area unless or other solvent B of the materials. storm. they are specifically unless designed the telephone for line has Warning -This unit generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy. And if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions manual. may cause radio interference. The Unit has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A digital device pursuant to Part 15 of FCC Rules, which are designed to provide reasonable protection against such interference when operated in a commercial environment. Operation of this equipment in a residential area is likely to cause harmful interference the user at his own expense will be required to take whatever measures are necessary interference. in which case to correct the If necessary, the user should additional suggestions. consult technician The user may find the following booklet prepared This booklet is available the dealer or an experienced radio/television by the Federal Communications locally from FCC regional Commission for helpful: offices. Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com 110 ., ... .. - ndex 111 Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com Index A 211 restriction 51.87, 103 311 restriction 51, 87. 103 411 restriction 51.87. 103 511 restriction 51.87. 103 611 restriction 51.87. 103 7-digit dial restriction/COR types (2 to 6) 50, 51. 54. 87. 88. 103, 104 711 restriction 51.87. 103 811 restriction 51.87, 103 911 restriction 51.87. 103 ABCD inband si.@alhq 27.78.94 Absence messages (5 to 9) 48. 49.86.87. 102. 103 Account code 35.67.70.86, 102 Add table &CR) 57.62.89 AFP 42.45 Alarm indication sigual (AIS) detection 25. 77.93 Alarm LED mode 4.74.90 Alarm notification red 24. 26. 77. 78. 93. 94 yellow 24.25. 77. 78.93. 94 Alarm relay recovery mode. 24.25. 77, 78. 93. 94 Alert tone 4.74.90 Analog port transfer ring interval 4.74.90 Answer key 86. 102 Auy key/pre-programmed codes 45. 46. 83-85. 99- 10 1 Appendix A 73- 105 Appendix B 106-l 10 Area Codes LCR 57.58.88. 104 TRS 50, 52. 56. 87. 88. 103. 104 Attendant 3. 4. 8-13. 18. 19, 42. 45. 74. 86, 90. 102 consoles/flexible feature key assignment 42, 45, 85. 101 feature package (AFP) 42, 45, 85, 101 HOLD-recall ttmer 8, 76.92 Hunt Group recall timer 10. 75. 9.1 intercom HOLD-recall timer 9, 75, 91 transfer recall timer 9. 75. 9 1 voice/tone call 3. 74. 90 overflow 4, 74. 90 override switch 4. 74. 90 park-HOLD recall timer 11, 75, 91 reversion timer 12. 75. 91 transfer extension 4. 74. 90 transfer recall timer 9. 75. 9 1 Auto day mode 20.76. 92 AUTO-FLASH-RED&IL 3.74,90 Auto set relocation codes 37. 67, 68. 70, 80. 96 Automatic Dialers 109 Automatic HOLD (key-bank HOLD) 3,74,90 Automatic pause 31.79.95 Automatic pause after dialiug (1 to 9.0) 6. 7. 75.91 Automatic pause timer 13.75.91 Automatic switch to uight mode 8.75.91 I Y r: e X c B Background music (BGM) 86, 102 BGM (Background music) 86, 102 BLF (busy-lamp field) 4. 74. 90 BLF (extension) delayed ring 4.74.90 BLF port number (EM/24 console stationport number) 35, 77.93 Busy-lamp field (BLF) 4. 74, 90 Busy overridden 35.67.68.77.93 Busy override 35. 67.68.70.71.86, 102 Busy tone (voice mail) 4, 74, 90 Busy tone transmission 27. 78. 94 n C Cable Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com 70, 72 i 112 ‘, Call forward 72.86. 102 /busy 86, 102 /CO line 86. 102 /no answer 86. 102 /no answer/busy 86, 102 /no answer timer 16.75,91 CalI waiting 36, 67.70.86. 102 display/large-display telephone 37. 77. 93 Call Coverage Group 38.4 1.5 1.68. 70. 72, 81.97 covering extension 1 41. 51, 68.81. 97 covering extension 2 41. 51, 68. 81. 97 extensions 41. 97 Call Coverage Group extension tables (1 to 16) 38. 41. 81 Call duration display 3. 74.90 Chart/FF key codes 86. 102 Circuit number (telephone number) 29. 30. Class of Restriction (COR) 50-56.87. 88. 100, 101 Class of sedce setting 51.87. 1038.67.68. 70. 72. 75. 91 CO delayed ringing timer 19.76.92 CO line display after dialing/large-display 37, 77. 91 display during dialing/large-display 37. 77 91 FLASH timer 14, 75. 90 off hook signal 35. 77.91 off hook signal pattern 36. 67. 68. 77. 91 off hook signal volume 36. 67.68. 77. 91 co trunk name 49.87. 103 preference (access code 881 86. 102 Compatibility of the Telephone Network and Terminal Equipment 108 CONF key 42 Connection to a Coin-Operated Telephone Line 107 Connection to a Party Line 107 Copy Mode extensions 34, 63, 89, 102 LED FF keys 63. 89, 102 trunks 63. 89, 102 Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com COR (Class of Restriction) 104 WRSI types 50-56. I 50-56. 87. 88. 103, 87, 88, 103, 104 n d e X D Damage to a telephone line 108 Date 3. 74.90 Day 3.74.90 TRS - all extensions 88. 104 Day 3.74.90 delayed-ring tables 81. 97 riw 81.97 TRS 88.104 Debounce timer 22.77.93 Default charts 74-89 pocket-sized version 90- 105 Delayed-ring capability 4.72 Delete table &CR) 57. 62.89, 105 Detection timers 17. 75. 91 Dial time-out for digits, DID 33, 76.92 Dial pause timer 15.75.91 Dial tone detection 3 1.76.92 Dial tone generation 27.78.94 Dial tone transmission 27. 78. 94 Dialing restriction during an incoming call (TRS) 51. 87. 103 DID confirmation of reset 21.76. 92 dial setting 27. 78. 94 digit dial time-out 33. 76, 92 Immediate or Wink start 32. 76. 92 interdigit dial time-out 33. 76. 92 outside extension 37. 76. 92 reset 21. 76. 92 trunk card 32, 76. 92 trunk lines 28 DID dialing assignment 27.78.94 DID/DNIS emulation 5.74.90 DID/T1 reset 21, 76. 92 Digital pads 23. 77.,93 Digit restrictions (TRS) 52, 88. 104 113 2 1. 32, Direct Inward System Access (DISA) 76.92 Direct Station Select (DSS) 42. 46. 48, 49. 84, 100 DISA enable 32, 76. 92 end timer 32. 76. 92 ID code 32.76. 92 outgoing codes 1 and 2 32, 76. 92 start timer 32, 76. 92 Disconnect timer 22. 76. 92 Display (SSD) 3. 74. 90 DND (Do Not Disturb) 86, 102 DMS dialing assignment 27. 78.94 Do Not Disturb (DND) 86. 102 67.68. 70 D-SLT handset volume level DSS (Direct Station Select) 42. 46, 48. 49.84. 85. 100, 101 extensions 46.84, 100 DSS/72 BLF consoles flexible feature key assignment 46.49.84.85. 100. 101 FF keys 42.46.84 31.76.92 DTMF signal sending time -p-data mode (Xon/Xoff) 5.74.90 flexible feature key assignment 42-44. 83-86 HOLD-recall timer 9, 75. 91 Hunt Group recall timer 11, 75, 91 intercom HOLD-recall timer 18, 75. 91 transfer-recall timer 19. 75. 91 voice/tone caIl 3. 74. 90 keys 42-44, 83-85 name assignment 49.87. 103 number 35.80.96 page groups (00 to 07) 36.80.96 page ring 86. 102 park-HOLD recall timer 12. 75. 91 ports 34, 35-37.80.96 programming 34-37. 80. 96 ring tables 81, 97 ring pattern 67. 68, 70 KTEL 37.80.96 SLT/OPX 37.80.96 transfer-recall timer Extension Module (EM) 35.42.47.77.93 Extension summary 34.38.50.66-70 Extensions - (two or three digits) 86, 102 External Page Interface (Em) page groups 7.8. 75, 91 E F EL (extension line) 83.99 EL/ML keys 43.44.83.99 EM (Extension Module) 35.42.47. 77.93 35.77. EM/24 console station port number 93 Enables DXSA 31. 76. 92 7. 8, 75.91 EPI (external page interface) Exclusive HOLD 3.74.90 Extension 4. 67. 68, 8 1. 97 delayed-ring tables delayed ringing timer 20, 76, 92 digits 3. 74. 90 directory display/large-display telephone 37, 80, 96 FCC Rules and Regulations 106- 110 FFl key - System programming 2-27. 74-78. 90-94 1’F2 key - Trunk programming 28-33.79.95 FF3 key - &tension programming 34-37. 80.96 FF4 key - Ring assignment and Hunt Groups 38-41.81.82. 97, 98 FFS key - Flexible feature key assignment 42-47, 83-86. 99- 102 48.49.87.103 FF6 key - Name assignment FF7 key - Toll restrictions 50-56.87, 88, 104 FFS key - Least Cost Routing 57-62.88.89. 104. 105 Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com I n d e X 114 FF9 key - Copy mode 63.89. 105 FFlO key - System speed dialing 64.65.89. 105 FF key code chart 85.86, 101.102 First attendant 46. 84, 100 FLASH 3, 74. 90 FLASH timer (CO line) 14. 75, 91 FLASH timer (PDX) 16. 75.91 Flexible feature key assignment 42-44, 83-86 Forced verified account code 35.67. 68. 70. 80.96 Forced LCR restriction 35.67. 68. 70, 80. 96 Fourth attendant 4, 74.90 Frame loss 25. 76.92 Frame loss counter 26, 77.93 Framing format 25. 76, 92 I n url e extensions 81. 97 night CO line / pilot extension ring tables 81.97 delayed-ring 40. 8 1, 97 no answer 20, 76, 92 pilot extension 40. 67. 68. 81. 97 pilot name 40. 67.68.81.97 recall timers attendant 10, 75. 93 extension 11. 75. 93 search methods 4.67.68.81.97 tables (1 to 8) 38. 40. 8 1. 97 transfer extension 40.67. 68. 8 1, 97 transfer timer 40. 8 1. 97 Hunt Groups 70. 72, 81.82.97.98 X I G Glare timer immediate wink start Group pickup Guard timer start 22. 77. 93 22. 77. 93 86. 102 22. 77. 93 H Headset mode 86. 102 Hearing-aid compatibihty HOLD 3. 74.90 automatic exclusive system HOLD-recall timers attendant 8. 75, 91 extensions 9. 75.91 Hour 3 Hunt Groups 109 day CO line / pilot extension ring tables 81.97 delayed-ring 40. 8 1, 97 Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com Idle display / large-display telephone 37. 80.96 IDT(intercom dial tone) 37.86. 102 LDT (laqIedispl& 37 Incoming calls restriction (TRS) 5 1,87. 103 Incoming detection timer 22. 77. 93 Incoming Diahng Method 27.78.94 Incoming ground detection timer 17.75. 91 Incoming ring delay timer 15. 76. 92 signal pattern 3 1, 76. 92 timer 14. 76. 92 Incoming ring 39.81.97 day rinR delayed day night night ring Incoming signaDng class 27. 78,94 Index 111 Instructions 1. 2. 28. 34, 38. 42. 48. 50. 57.’ 63. 64. 66. 69. 73, 106. 111 4 Intercom busy tone display 37. 80. 96 / large-display telephone 115 call status display (IDT) / large-display telephone 37. 80, 96 dial tone (IDT) 37. 80. 96 key 86, 102 off hook display / large-display telephone 37, 80, 96 ring signal 81, 97 transfer 86. 102 Intercom Long-distance 5. 74. 90 Loop keys hmlti-liue) hop start, ground 43.83.99 start, n d . or DID truuk cards e 32. 76, 92 Loop start trunk card X 32, 76.92 M timers attendant 17, 18. 76. 92 HOLD recall 17. 76. 92 transfer recall 18. 76. 92 extensions 18, 19. 76.92 HOLD recall 18.76.92 transfer recall 19, 76.92 Intercom MC0 continuous 45.46.84.85. Meet-me answer 86. 102 Message waiting 86. 102 3.74.90 Mmltes 3, 74. 90 (SLT FLASH control) call (TRS) 51.87. 100, 101 answer cancel set tone International 103 ML/EL keys ML/MC0 Month K 83.99 separation 3.74.90 Multi-line J. calls 37.80.96 key assigument 43.44.70. 72, 83.99 Key Plan 34. 38. 48. 66. 69. 70. 71 Key bank (automatic) HOLD Multiple DID 5. 74.90 Mute key 86. 102 f- 3.74.90 N L Name Large-display 87.96, telephones 4.36, 37, 74. 80. 103 and message storing 48.49.87. Name assignment 48.49.87. Network sync source recovery 103 timer 103 22. n 76, 92 LCR add table 57. 62. 89. 105 area codes/office codes 57. 58.88, 104 delete table 57. 62, 89. 105 forced 35. 67. 68, 70. 80. 96 office codes/special area codes 57. 59, 88. 104 time bands 88. 104 time priority tables 57. 58. 60, 88. 104 trunk groups 57.60.61,88, 104 trunk ports 88. 104 LCR (Least Cost Routing) Least Cost Routing Line coding format Lockout code 102 28.57-62.86. 28. 57-62, 86. 102 wiw automatic switch 8 /day 82.84.98. 100 delayed-ring tables 82. 98 key 86,102 ring 39.75.91 TRS 55.86 all extensions 55.88 Non-appearance Number CO line HOLD system) 3.74.90 of channels used (exclusive/ . 24. 25. 77.93 f (LCR) 24. 25, 77. 78. 93. 94 35. 67.68. 70.74.90 Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com 116 Photocopying Wet extension 0 I 1 (Hunt Group) 40. 81.82.97, 98 Off hook Office signal (CO line) 36.80.96 LCR TRS 57.58 50. 52. 56 trunk Ports (9, 81 to 86) 70 24, 25. 77. 78, 93. 94 OrQinal forms 1.2.28. 57. 63. 64.66.69. Outbound ground Outgoing Outpulse 34, 38. 42, 48. 50. timer 17. 75.9 1 signaBn% class 27.78.94 delay timer 22. 77, 93 Out of sync Overrides name assignment names (90 to 99) - large display PSD (personal 86.89. SSD) X PSD 25.26.77,78.93,94 TRS (allows settings 28, 31. 86. 102 2-105 73, 106. 111 detection access (MCO) group Pre-programmed codes 45.46. 83-85, 99- 10 1 Reface 1 Prime line preference 35.67. 68. 70.86. 102 Private line port number 31 Product SafetJr 110 Programming addresses - FFl to FFlO Keys OHCA answerback 49. 87. 103 Onhook transfer 3, 74.90 One-touch dialing 3.74.90 Operating mode during alarm condition 3.74.90 speed 99 dial) 49.87. 103 36.43.49.64.65. 102. 105 Pulse or DTMF P c Pooled codes dial 31. 76. 92 R 1 Page groups (00 to 07) extensions relay 36.67.68. 72.86 7. 8. 75. 91 Page zones 70.84.85. 100, 101 Page call display/large-display Pa@qj duration Parity check (SMDR) Park-H&I key retrieve 84,85, Park-HOLD recall attendant telephone 37 5.74.90 5.74.90 100, 101 11, 75. 91 extensions 12, 75.91 Pause (automatic after dialing 1 to 9,OI 6. 7, 75. 91 Pause-timer PBX (automatic) access codes FLASH timer Permanent 13. 75. 91 5. 6. 75. 91 16.75.91 call forward 37.67.68. 70.80.96 extension 37, 67.68. 70, 80. 96 Personal speed dial (PSD) 36.43.49.64.65. 86,89. Radio interference 110 RAl-A baud rate switch 5.74.90 RAI-B baud rate switch 4. 74.90 Recall timers 2. 8-12, 38. 75, 91 Red alarm counter 22.77.93 Red alarm detection timer 24.26, 77, 78. 93.94 Red alarm recovery detection timer 24.26. 77, 78, 93. 94 timers 102. 105 Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com Red alarm relay control 25.77.93 Redial 3. ?4 Registering equipment 107 Relay (page groups) 7.8. 75. 91 Release acknowledge timer 22.77.93 Remote loopback detection 24.25. 77.78. 93.94 Remote Maintenance Code 19. 75.91 Responsibility of Manufacturer of 109 Registered Equipment Restriction on maximum digits dialed 5 1. 87, 103 Reversion timer (attendant) 12. 75 n d e Ring assignment and Hunt Groups 38.39. 81. 82. 97, 98 Ring assignments 38.40.67.68, 70, 81.82, 97.98 Rw? signal delay timer 14, 75, 91 incoming 31. 76. 92 pilot number and CO line 39.8 1.97 Ring timer (incoming) 14.81.97 Ringback tone with busy signal 37.67.68. 80.96 Ringback transmission 27, 78.94 Ringer Equivalence Number (REN) 107 Ringing Une preference 36. 67. 68, 70. 80. 96 S Save/repeat 86. 102 dial store Second attendant 4. 46. 74.90 Signal loss counter 25.26. 77, 78.93. 94 Single line telephone (SLT) 3. 14, 74. 75. 90.91 Slip counter 24. 26, 77. 78. 93.94 SLT FLASH control 3, 74.90 hook flash 37.67.68.70.80.96 onhook FLASH timer 14. 75.91 SLT (single line telephone) 3. 14. 74. 75. 90.91 SLT DISA ringing pattern 5.74.90 SMDR baud rate 5. 74. 90 data length 5, 74. 90 print mode 1 5.74.90 print mode 2 (long distance/local calls) 5. 74. 90 print mode 3 (titles and TN data) 5. 74. 90 printout/incoming calls 36. 67. 68, 70 stop-bit length 3. 5. 74. 90 timer 16/30 3. 74.90 lTY parity check 4, 74. 90 TTY parity type 4.74.90 Software versions 1 1.0. 2.0 - B card 3.0. 3.1 - A card Special area codes LCR 57. 59,88,89. 104. 105 TRS 50. 53, 56.87. 88. 103. 104 Special office codes LCR 57,59,88,89, 104, 105 TRS 50. 53. 56.87. 88. 103. 104 Speed dial list 48.64.65.89. 105 Splash tone busy override 4. 74. 90 voice call 4. 74, 90 SSD display mode 3.74.90 name assignment (00 to 89) / large-display telephones 4, 49. 87. 103 toll restriction override 3, 74.90 SSD (system speed dial) 2.3.4.48.49. 64, 65. 74. 86. 89. 90. 102. 105 Stacked calls (attendant overflow) 4.74.90 Station lockout code 35.67.68.70.86. 102 Stored codes 21 Snbmodes 2.34 Summary key plan 71.72 Synchronization setting first sync source 22.76.92 second sync source 22.76.92 third sync source 22. 76, 92 Sync loss counter 25, 26. 77. 78. 93.. 94 System HOLD 3.74.90 System programming 2-27. 76.92 ID code 21. 75.91 System size 2 1. 76.92 System speed dial (SSD) 2.3.4.48.49, 64. 65, 74. 86, 89. 90, 102. 105 I n d e X T 43.44.86. Tl alarm keys Tl port class station 37. 80. 96 trunk 33.79.95 Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com / 102 118 (’ Talk back key 86, 102 Telephone types 34.35.80.96 Telephone line system (trunk type) 3 1. 76. 92 Third attendant 4. 74. 90 Time 2. 3. 74. 90 Time bands (LCR) 59, 88, 104 Time priority tables (LCR) 57. 58. 60. 88. 104 Timers attendant HOLD-recall 8, 75. 91 Hunt Group recall 10, 75, 91 intercom HOLD-recall 17, 75. 91 transfer-recall 18. 75. 91 park-HOLD recall 11.75.9 1 reversion 12. 75, 9 1 transfer-recall 9. 75. 9 1 automatic pause timer 13.75.91 call forward/no answer 16.75.91 CO he FLASH 13. 75.91 dial pause 15.75, 91 DISA end 32.76. 92 DISA start 32, 76, 92 extensions HOLD-recall 8, 75. 92 Hunt Group recall 10. 75. 92 intercom HOLD-recall 18. 75. 91 transfer-recall 18. 75, 9 1 incoming ground detection 17. 75. 91 incoming ring delay 15. 75. 9 1 outbound ground detection 17. 75.9 1 PBX FIASH 16.75.91 SLT onhook FLASH 14.75.91 trunk disconnect 32, 76. 92 unsupervised conference talk-time 13. 75, 91 Wink start (DID) 32, 76, 92 Titles 5, 74. 90 Toll Restriction System (TRS) 3, 50-56. 67, 68. 87. 88. 103. 104 Tone busy (voice mail) 4, 74. 90 Tone call 3.86. 102 Tone pattern (incoming ring signal) 3 1. 76. 92 Transfer extension (attendant) 4. 74: 90 Transfer-recall timers attendant 9. 75. 91 extension 10.75.91 TRS area codes/of&e codes 50, 52. 87.88, 103. 104 block mode/area codes (1 to 4) :,I,cCOR types (3 to 61 56. 88, 104 block mode/of&e codes (5 to 8) COR types (3 to 6) 56.88. 104 block mode/special area office codes (13 to 16) 56, 88, 104 COR types (3 to 6) 56, 88, 104 block mode/special office codes (9 to 12) COR types (3 to 6) 56.88, 104 COR 70.87.88, 103. 104 day assignment 50. 55. 67. 68. 88, 104 international calIs 5 1.87, 103 night assignment 50. 55.67.68.88, 104 override 3.87.88. 103. 104 special area code table 50, 53.87. 103 TRS (toll restriction system) 3. 50-56. 67. 68, 87, 88. 103. 104 Trunk class 24.25.77.93 Tmnk mode 27.78.94 L d e X -POqueueing 86. 102 Trunk selection 32.79. 95 Tnmk-to-trunk conferencing 2. 13. 31, 75, 76.91.92 Trunk type 26.78,94 Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com (unsupervised) disconnect timer 32. 76. 92 features list 28.31-33, 76. 92 LCR group order 61, 89. 105 group settings 28.88,89. 104. 105 group tables 60. 61. 88.89. 104, 105 lines 28.76.92 names 29.30. 49. 87. 103 port lists 28-30.76.92 port settings 31. 32. 76. 92 119 piogramrning 28-33 setting 3 types (CO line/PBX line) use 31. 76. 92 lTY data . 3 1, 76.92 I n d e i 5.74.90 U 7. 75.91 UNA (Universal Night Answer) Unattended (unsupervised) conference 2. 13. 31. 35. 67. 68, 75, 76, 91, 92 Universal Night Answer (UNA) riug pattern 7. 75, 91 Unsupervised conference extension capability 35. 75. 91 talk-time 2, 13. 75.91 trunk capability 2, 3 1. 76. 92 V Verified Verified Account Account Codes 8.75.91 Code Toll Restriction 8, 75.91 Voice call Voice mail 3. 74. 86.90. (busy tone) 102 4. 74. 90 W Whk Wink signal start detection timer start timer @ID) 32.79.95 22.77.93 n Yellow alarm couuter 25.26. 77. 78.93.94 Yellow alarm detection timer 24.26.77. 78. 93.94 Yellow alarm notification 24.26.77.78.93, 94 Yellow alarm recovery detection timer 24, !’ 26. 77. 78. 93. .94 Yellow Year alarm relay control 25. 77.93 3.74.90 Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com 120
Source Exif Data:
File Type : PDF File Type Extension : pdf MIME Type : application/pdf PDF Version : 1.3 Linearized : No Modify Date : 2004:12:01 19:48:24-05:00 Create Date : 1999:04:26 11:47:12Z Page Count : 346 Page Mode : UseOutlines Has XFA : No Mod Date : 2002:01:25 23:32:56-06:00 Producer : Photoshop PDF Plug-in 1.0 Creation Date : 1999:04:26 11:47:12Z Author : EZ Manuals Metadata Date : 2002:01:25 23:32:56-06:00 Creator : EZ Manuals Page Layout : SinglePageEXIF Metadata provided by EXIF.tools